JP2022009592A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine, even when continuously flowing down game balls to any one area out of a plurality of areas during a specific game state, capable of reducing such cases that there are differences in the number of prize balls to be put out to players.

SOLUTION: The game machine is so configured that, during a jackpot round game, the number of prize balls based on game balls flowing down a second right-side game area 30r2 at fixed time intervals and entering a large winning hole 32a, and game balls entering a general winning hole 31c, is more than the number of prize balls based on game balls flowing down a first right-side game area 30r1 and entering the large winning hole 32a. On the contrary, during a rightward shooting game state after the jackpot round game, the number of prize balls based on game balls flowing down the second right-side game area 30r2 at fixed time intervals and entering the large winning hole 32a during a small winning game and game balls entering the general winning hole 31c is less than the number of prize balls based on game balls flowing down the first right-side game area 30r1 and entering the large winning hole 32a during the small winning game.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 67

COPYRIGHT: (C)2022,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, there is, for example, a pachinko machine as a typical example of a gaming machine (for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2013-132448 (see FIG. 4)

However, there is a problem in the conventional example having such a configuration.

The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a suitable gaming machine.

The present invention has the following configuration in order to achieve such an object.
That is, the invention according to claim 1 is
In a gaming machine that variablely displays identification information due to the establishment of a start condition and shifts to a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player when the variable display result becomes a predetermined specific display mode.
Information output means that output auditory information that can be audibly recognized according to the progress of the game,
An information output control means that controls the output of information by the information output means,
Equipped with an operation means to receive the operation of the player,
The information output control means is
Specific information output control that controls the output of specific auditory information having a plurality of levels at which the first recognizable time point may differ depending on the player within the specific information production period during the variable display of the identification information based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. Means and
Within the specific information effect period, a setting means for setting an effective period during which the operation of the operation means is valid during the output of the specific auditory information, and a setting means.
A grasping means for grasping the level of the specific auditory information being output based on the operation of the operating means during the valid period, and a grasping means.
It is characterized by comprising a display control means for displaying information suggesting the level on the display means based on the grasped level.

According to the gaming machine according to the present invention, identification information is variablely displayed due to the establishment of starting conditions, and when the variable display result becomes a predetermined specific display mode, it is advantageous for the player. In a gaming machine that shifts to a gaming state
Information output means that output auditory information that can be audibly recognized according to the progress of the game,
An information output control means that controls the output of information by the information output means,
Equipped with an operation means to receive the operation of the player,
The information output control means is
Specific information output control that controls the output of specific auditory information having a plurality of levels at which the first recognizable time point may differ depending on the player within the specific information production period during the variable display of the identification information based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. Means and
Within the specific information effect period, a setting means for setting an effective period during which the operation of the operation means is valid during the output of the specific auditory information, and a setting means.
A grasping means for grasping the level of the specific auditory information being output based on the operation of the operating means during the valid period, and a grasping means.
Based on the grasped level, information suggesting the level can be displayed on the display means.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine of Example 1 of this invention. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a main part of the block diagram shown in FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display content of the 3rd symbol display device. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline of various counters used for game control. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing by a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process by a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing by a payout control device. It is a flowchart which shows the payout control process. It is a flowchart which shows the prize ball control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ball lending control process. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing by a sub-control device. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process by a sub-control device. It is a flowchart which shows the frame button input monitoring and effect processing by a sub-control device. It is a flowchart which shows the effect button input monitoring and effect processing by a sub-control device. It is a flowchart which shows the effect execution management process by a sub-control device. It is a flowchart which shows the specific sound listening determination processing by a sub-control device. It is a flowchart which shows the specific sound output period setting process by a sub-control device. It is a flowchart which shows the opening / closing mode (big hit) display setting processing by a sub-control device. It is a flowchart which shows the variation display mode setting process by a sub-control device. It is a flowchart which shows the one-shot notification sound determination processing by a sub-control device. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing a one-shot notification sound determination table stored in the sub-control device. It is a flowchart which shows the one-announcement effect processing by a sub-control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the normal processing of the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the switching processing of the display mode and the like by the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a normal voice output process, and (b) is a flowchart showing a specific sound / one notification sound output process. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow of the specific sound output effect and one-shot announcement effect. It is a main part of the block diagram which shows the electrical structure of Example 2. It is a flowchart which shows the specific sound output period setting process by the sub-control device of Example 2. It is a flowchart which shows the switching process of the display mode and the like by the display control device of Example 2. It is a figure for demonstrating the reach promotion production. It is a main part of the block part which shows the electric structure of Example 3. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process which concerns on Example 3. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead lottery process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific sound output period setting process which concerns on Example 3. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the variation display mode setting process which concerns on Example 3. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the look-ahead effect. It is a block diagram which shows the main part of the electric structure of Example 4. It is a flowchart which shows the variation display mode setting process by the sub-control device which concerns on Example 4. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the specific sound output period setting process by the sub-control device which concerns on Example 4. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the step-up notice production. It is a front view of the game board of Example 5. It is a block diagram which shows the main part of the electrical connection of Example 5. It is a figure explaining the opening number suggestion effect and the advantageous game state suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline of the gaming system of the pachinko machine of Example 6. It is a flowchart which shows the menu display process by a sub-control device. It is a flowchart which shows the password input process by a sub-control device. It is a flowchart which shows the code display process for game end by a sub-control device. This is a menu screen for pachinko / pachislot machines. It is a flowchart which shows the game machine interlocking game server processing. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine of Example 7. It is a figure explaining the game area of a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in the 1st right side game area. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in the 2nd right side game area. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine of Example 8. It is a figure explaining the flow of the game ball in the 2nd right side game area of Example 8. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine of Example 9. It is a figure explaining the flow of the game ball in the 2nd right side game area. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine of Example 10. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine of Example 11. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine of Example 12. It is a figure for demonstrating the hit type. It is a figure for demonstrating the opening / closing pattern of a big prize opening. It is a 1st hit type determination table for a 1st start port. It is a 2nd hit type determination table for a 2nd start port. It is a table explaining the number of prize balls which can be acquired in the 1st right game area. It is a table explaining the number of prize balls which can be acquired in the 2nd right game area. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine of Example 13. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine of Example 14. It is a perspective view of the variable winning apparatus, FIG. 76A shows a state in which a main body case is attached, and FIG. 76B shows a state in which a plate portion is removed from the main body case. It is a front view of the variable winning apparatus, FIG. 77 (a) shows the state which attached the main body case, and FIG. 77 (b) shows the state which removed the plate part from the main body case. 77 (a) is a sectional view taken along line AA of the variable winning device, FIG. 78 (a) shows a closed state of the variable winning device, and FIG. 78 (b) shows an open state of the variable winning device. .. It is a perspective view of an opening / closing door and a drive part. FIG. 77 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB of the variable winning device shown in FIG. 77 (a), and is particularly a diagram showing a stop portion. It is an exploded perspective view of the variable winning device seen from the front side of a gaming machine. It is an exploded perspective view of the variable winning device seen from the rear side of a gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the opening and closing process of a big prize opening. It is a perspective view explaining the opening and closing operation of an opening / closing door, FIG. The open state of the first round and the game ball flowing down the first right game area are shown. FIG. 85 (a) is a perspective view illustrating the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing door following FIG. 84, showing a closed state after the first round and a game ball flowing down the first right game area, and FIG. Indicates the open state after the second round and the game ball flowing down the first right side game area. It is a timing chart which shows the opening / closing timing of an opening / closing door and the detection timing of a game ball. It is a perspective view explaining the opening and closing operation of an opening / closing door, FIG. The open state of the first round and the game ball flowing down the second right game area are shown. FIG. 88 (a) is a perspective view illustrating the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing door following FIG. 87, showing a closed state after the first round and a game ball flowing down the second right game area, and FIG. Indicates the open state after the second round and the game ball flowing down the second right game area. It is a figure explaining the board surface structure of the game board attached to the inner frame which concerns on the modification. (A) to (d) are examples of the notification image instructing the first right side gaming area or the second right side gaming area.

Hereinafter, various embodiments of the pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

Here, the meanings of the terms used in the following description will be described.
The "specific game state" refers to a game state in which a predetermined game value is given to a player when the result of a lottery based on the establishment of a start condition is a specific result. In the specific game state, the specific game that closes the specific entrance is performed a predetermined number of times on condition that either a predetermined time elapses after the specific entrance is opened or a predetermined number of game balls enter. Will be. The specific gaming state may be referred to as a "special gaming state".
The "specific result" may be a big hit winning result, or a big hit lottery result may be out of the question, but it may be a so-called small hit winning result. The jackpot winning may notify the player with a specific stop symbol such that three symbols of the same type are aligned, or notify the player with a specific stop symbol such that different types of symbols are aligned in a predetermined manner. Alternatively, a specific image other than the symbol may be stopped to notify the player. The small hit winning may be notified to the player with a specific stop symbol such that different types of symbols are aligned in a predetermined manner, or a specific image other than the symbol may be stopped and notified to the player. .. The specific gaming state based on the jackpot winning may be referred to as the jackpot gaming state. The specific gaming state based on the small hit winning may be referred to as the small hit gaming state.
The "predetermined game value" may be obtained during the execution of the specific game, during the game for a specific period after the end of the specific game, or during the execution of the specific game and the end of the specific game. It may be obtained both at a later specific period. The game value obtained during the execution of the specific game is, for example, the payout of the game medium for entering the ball into the specific ball entrance. The game value obtained in a specific period after the end of a specific game is a high probability state in which the probability that the result of the lottery based on the establishment of the start condition (special symbol start condition) will be the specific result (per special symbol) is high. Probability change state), time saving state (support state) where the probability that the lottery result based on the establishment of the start condition (normal symbol start condition) will be a specific result (per normal symbol) is high probability, and before the execution of the specific game A specific video or image that was not seen in the normal game state is displayed, and the game mode (mode in which a specific video or image is displayed) before or after the specific game is another game mode (specific video or An effect of shifting to a mode in which an image or an image different from the image is displayed) is executed. A specific game state in which a probability change state occurs as a game value may be referred to as a specific game state with probability change.
"Specific game" is a condition that either a predetermined time has passed since the specific entrance is opened or a predetermined number of game balls are entered in both the big hit game state and the small hit game state. It is a game that closes the specific entrance, but especially in the case of a big hit game, either a predetermined time has passed since the specific entrance was opened or a predetermined number of game balls enter. The period until the specific entrance is closed is called one round, and the game in which the round game is executed a predetermined number of times may be called a big hit round game.
The "big hit round game" differs depending on the number of rounds and the type of big hit winning that the opening / closing pattern of the specific entrance is won. As the number of rounds, for example, a short number of about 1 to 3 rounds, an intermediate number of about 7 to 9 rounds, and a long number of about 14 to 16 rounds are set. The opening / closing pattern may be a constant pattern regardless of the length of the number of rounds, a different pattern depending on the length of the number of rounds, or a different pattern even with the same number of rounds. ..
In the "specific game state with probability variation", a jackpot round game with a short number of rounds may be adopted, and an opening / closing pattern may be adopted in which the player opens and closes the specific ball opening in a short time such that it is difficult for the player to notice the occurrence of the jackpot round game. be. As a result, the player does not see the notification of the jackpot winning, or the notification of the jackpot winning is difficult for the player to notice (for example, in a specific stop symbol such that different types of symbols are aligned in a predetermined mode). (Notification of, or notification of stopping a specific image other than the symbol), and when the player is not aware of the jackpot winning, the jackpot round game is started and ended without the player noticing, and the probability change state is You can make it look like it happened suddenly.
In the "small hit game state", the notification is performed in the same manner as the "mode in which the notification of the big hit winning is difficult for the player to notice" when the above-mentioned specific game state with probability variation is generated, and the above-mentioned specific game with probability variation is performed. As with the state, a short opening / closing pattern may be adopted. As a result, even if the player knows the existence of "a mode in which the notification of the jackpot winning is difficult for the player to notice", whether it causes a specific gaming state with a probability variation or stays in the small hit gaming state is determined. It can be difficult to distinguish. It should be noted that it is possible for a player who is accustomed to the game to determine whether it is a specific game state with a probability change or a small hit game state by the lighting mode of the indicator lamp indicating the type of the big hit winning, but it is difficult for a general player. ..

Example 1 is an example of the present invention and the invention described later (system A).
The pachinko machine of the first embodiment will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 30. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 5 is a main part of the block diagram shown in FIG. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the third symbol display device 42.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 that forms an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and is fixed to a game island of a game hall (hall), and one side portion (for example, the front surface) of the outer frame 11. The inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame 11 with the opening / closing shaft J1 as the left side portion in the view), and the inner frame with one side portion (for example, the left side portion in the front view) of the inner frame 12 as the opening / closing shaft J2. It is provided with a front frame set 14 that can be freely opened and closed with respect to 12.

The outer frame 11 is formed of a wooden plate material in a rectangular shape as a whole when viewed from the front, and each plate material is assembled by a detachable fastener such as a machine screw. In the present embodiment, for example, the outer dimension of the outer frame 11 in the vertical direction is 809 mm (inner dimension 771 mm), and the outer dimension in the left-right direction is 518 mm (inner dimension 480 mm). The outer frame 11 may be made of a light metal such as resin or aluminum.

The inner frame 12 is roughly divided into a resin base 12a as a main member forming the outer shape thereof and a game board 30 attached to the resin base 12a. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the inner frame 12 includes a front frame set 14 that can be opened on one side on the front side of the resin base 12a.

Here, the front frame set 14 will be described in a little more detail.

As shown in FIG. 1, the front frame set 14 has a lower plate portion 13 located at the lowermost portion, an upper plate portion 21 located above the lower plate portion 13, and the upper plate portion when viewed from the front. It is roughly classified into a glass frame portion 23 located above the 21.

By attaching these lower plate portion 13, upper plate portion 21, and glass frame portion 23 to each location on the front side of the base plate body (not shown) which is a resin molded part of the front frame set 14, the front frame set 14 Is configured.

As shown in FIG. 1, the lower plate portion 13 is a component in which a component forming the lower plate 15 and a component surrounding the component are integrated, and is located at the lowermost portion of the front frame set 14. , Screws and other fasteners fix the base plate (not shown) to the bottom of the base plate when viewed from the front. The lower plate portion 13 is provided with a lower plate 15 and a ball pulling lever 17 on the front surface side thereof.

As shown in FIG. 1, the lower plate 15 as a ball tray is provided on the left side of the large three-dimensional character unit 25 in the front view of the pachinko machine 10, and has a size of about half the width of the front frame set 14. The game balls discharged from the discharge port 16 can be stored in the lower plate 15. The ball pulling lever 17 is for pulling out (discharging) the game ball in the lower plate 15, and by moving the ball pulling lever 17 to the left side in FIG. 1, a predetermined position on the bottom surface of the lower plate 15 ( For example, a circular discharge portion formed at a substantially central portion) is opened, and the game ball stored in the lower plate 15 can be pulled out downward through the opened circular discharge portion on the bottom surface of the lower plate 15.

As shown in FIG. 1, the upper plate portion 21 is a component in which a component forming the upper plate 19 and a component surrounding the component are integrated, and is a lower portion of the front frame set 14 (the above-mentioned lower plate 15). It is fixed to the lower part of the base plate body (not shown) in front view by fasteners such as screws so as to be located at the upper position), and is provided with an upper plate 19 as a tray for a game ball. Here, the upper plate 19 is a ball tray for temporarily storing the game balls and guiding them toward the launching device 229 while arranging them in a row.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the upper dish portion 21 is provided with various operation buttons operated by the player on the upper surface portion thereof. These operation buttons include an effect button 80 provided on the upper surface of the upper plate portion 21 near the ball storage space of the upper plate 19, and a portion on the front side of the effect button 80 (more for the player than the effect button 80). Examples include an upper selection button 71, a lower selection button 72, a left selection button 73, and a right selection button 74 (collectively, selection buttons 71 to 74) arranged side by side (near places). The effect button 80 corresponds to the operating means of the present invention. The operating means may be an operating means other than the push button type, for example, a lever type, a touch sensor type, or the like.

As shown in FIG. 1, the glass frame portion 23 has a window portion 101 formed on the upper side of the upper plate portion 21 and various illuminated portions (first illuminated portion 300) provided around the window portion 101. , 2nd illumination unit 302 and 3rd illumination unit 304) and sound output units 24a and 24b. The sound output unit 24a includes a speaker that outputs normal sound in a frequency band that is output as the normal game progresses. As will be described later, the sound output unit 24b is a specific sound having a frequency band having a predetermined height (for example, 19 kHz) that can be heard only by some players, and a frequency band having a height lower than that (17 kHz, 15 kHz). Also outputs. Therefore, the sound output unit 24b includes a speaker capable of outputting even the high frequency band of such a specific sound. The sound output units 24a and 24b correspond to the audio output means of the present invention.

As shown in FIG. 1, the sound output units 24 are provided at two upper left and right positions in the front view of the front frame set 14, and output sounds from speakers provided inside or at the back of the front frame set 14. It is formed of a plurality of output ports for the purpose of. In FIG. 1, only a part of this output port is shown, and the whole figure is omitted.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 1, the front frame set 14 has a game area 30a (see FIG. 3) of the game board 30 at the center of the glass frame portion 23 located above the upper plate portion 21. A window portion 101 having a substantially vertically elongated elliptical shape is formed so that most of them can be visually recognized from the outside. Specifically, the window portion 101 has a substantially vertically elongated elliptical shape and has a hollow center (opening 101a), and a glass unit (not shown) is omitted so that the opening 101a is covered with a glass plate 137 having a substantially vertically elongated elliptical shape or the like. Is attached to the back side of the front frame set 14. This glass unit has a double glass structure in which two glass plates 137 are arranged close to each other in the front-rear direction. The substantially central portion of the window portion 101 may be linear, and the glass plate 137 may also be adapted to the shape. Further, the glass plate 137 is not limited to glass, and any material thereof may be used as long as it is a transparent plate having a predetermined strength.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the glass frame portion 23 includes a first illuminated portion 300, a second illuminated portion 302, and a third illuminated portion 304 around the window portion 101. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 1, the front frame set 14 has a first illuminated portion 300 (left illuminated portion) having an LED or the like built in the left portion around the window portion 101 when viewed from the front. ), The second illuminated portion 302 (right illuminated portion) having an LED or the like built in the right part around the window portion 101, and the third electric unit having an LED or the like built in the upper part around the window portion 101. It is provided with a decoration portion 304 (upper illumination portion). These illuminated units play a role of enhancing the effect of effect during the game by controlling the change of the light emitting mode such as lighting and blinking according to the change of the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach.

In the pachinko machine 10, the first illumination unit 300, the second illumination unit 302, and the third illumination unit 304 function as a jackpot lamp, and by lighting or blinking at the time of a jackpot, the pachinko machine 10 notifies that the jackpot is in progress. do. In addition, the first illumination unit 300 and the second illumination unit 302 of the pachinko machine 10 are provided with a prize ball lamp 105 that lights up while paying out the prize ball, and an error indicator lamp 106 that lights up when a predetermined error occurs. There is.

Further, a small window 107 made of transparent resin is provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 101 at a position diagonally lower to the right so that a part of the surface of the inner frame 12 and the surface of the game board 30 can be visually recognized. Since the predetermined portion of the small window 107 is flat, the certificate stamp or the like attached to the lower right corner of the game board 30 can be suitably read by the machine from the flat portion of the small window 107.

Further, a ball lending operation unit 120 is arranged at the lower right of the window unit 101, and the ball lending operation unit 120 is provided with a ball lending button 121 and a return button 122. When the ball lending operation unit 120 is operated with bills, cards (for example, prepaid cards), etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball lending operation unit 120 is operated in response to the operation. Gaming balls will be rented. The ball lending button 121 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 19 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 122 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. The ball lending operation unit 120 may be further provided with a frequency display unit (not shown). This frequency display unit (not shown) displays the balance information of the card or the like. A pachinko machine, a so-called cash machine, in which a game ball is directly lent to an upper plate from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit does not require a ball lending operation unit 120. Therefore, a decorative sticker or the like is attached to the installation portion of the ball rental operation unit 120. As a result, it is possible to standardize the ball lending operation unit between the pachinko machine using the card unit and the cash machine.

Next, the configuration of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 3, the game board 30 is provided with a game board 30b which is made of square wooden (for example, plywood) in a front view and has a shape in which both corners on the left side are removed, and a peripheral portion thereof (described later). The outer portions of the rails 51 and 52) are attached in contact with the back side of the resin base 12a of the inner frame 12. The game area 30a, which is a substantially central portion on the front side of the game board 30, is formed on the front surface of the base plate body (not shown) of the front frame set 14 through the glass plate 137 of the window portion 101 shown in FIG. It is visible from the front outside of the frame set 14.

Further, the game board 30 includes a general winning opening 31, a variable winning device 32, a starting winning device 33 (for example, an operating chucker), a third starting opening 34 (hereinafter, 34), and a variable display device unit 35. These general winning openings 31, variable winning devices 32, starting winning devices 33, through gates 34, and variable display device units 35 are respectively arranged in the through holes formed by router processing in the game board 30, and the game is played. It is attached from the front side of the board 30 with wood screws or the like.

The start winning device 33 is composed of a single winning device in which a first starting port 33a (for example, an operating chucker) and a second starting port 33b (for example, an operating chucker) are arranged one above the other in order from the top. There is. The first start port 33a on the upper side is provided with an operation port switch (passage detection switch) for the first start port 33a (not shown), and the ball can enter the first start port 33a. It is detected by the actuation port switch for the first start port 33a. Further, the second starting port 33b on the lower side is provided with an operating port switch (passage detection switch) for the second starting port 33b (not shown), and the ball can enter the second starting port 33b. Detected by the actuation switch for the second start port 33b. Whether the game ball enters the first starting port 33a on the upper side or the game ball enters the second starting port 33b on the lower side as described above, it is a starting prize. There is no change, and those incoming balls can be detected individually.

Further, the entry to the general winning opening 31 is detected by the detection switch (the winning opening switch not shown), and the entry to the variable winning device 32 is detected by the detection switch (count switch not shown). Based on the output of the detection switch, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the upper plate 19 (or the lower plate 15).

For example, in the case of entering a ball into the first starting port 33a and the second starting port 33b, three prize balls are paid out. Further, in the case of entering the general winning opening 31 and the variable winning device 32, 10 prize balls are paid out. The number of these prize balls is arbitrary and may be various.

A game ball enters the through gate 34, and the entry is detected by a detection switch (passage detection switch (not shown)). However, even if the ball enters the through gate 34, the game ball is paid out. Not done.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 3, the game board 30 is provided with an out port 36, and a game ball that has not entered various winning devices or the like is passed through the out port 36 to a ball discharge path (not shown). You will be guided to the direction. A large number of nails 39 are planted on the game board 30 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill 37 are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the variable display device unit 35 variablely displays the first symbol (for example, a special symbol) as identification information, triggered by winning a prize in the first starting port 33a and the second starting port 33b. The first symbol display device 40, the second symbol display device 41 that variablely displays the second symbol (for example, a normal symbol) triggered by the passage of the through gate 34, the first start port 33a, and the second start port 33b. It is provided with a third symbol display device 42 that variablely displays the third symbol (for example, a decorative symbol) triggered by winning a prize. The third symbol display device 42 corresponds to the display means of the present invention. The display means is a display means other than the third symbol display device 42, for example, a display device dedicated to a display effect, or a light transmissive resin such as an acrylic panel capable of displaying an image provided in place of the glass plate 137 or together with the glass plate 137. It may be a board.

As shown in FIG. 3, the first symbol display device 40 is, for example, a segment display (for example, a 7-segment LED display with a decimal point) in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner. The part 40a is provided. The first segment display unit 40a emits variable light or the like based on the entry of a ball into the first starting port 33a or the second starting port 33b. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the first symbol display device 40 includes a hold lamp 40c indicating the number of hold of variable display in the first segment display unit 40a.

The first segment display unit 40a randomly or sequentially changes the light emission of each segment light emitting unit based on the entry into the first starting port 33a or the second starting port 33b, thereby displaying the variation of the first symbol. When a state (in this embodiment, the emission fluctuation mode of each segment light emitting portion) is generated and the emission fluctuation is stopped, for example, when the first symbol (for example, a number or a character) is emitted and displayed, it means a probability variation jackpot (specific hit). However, when the second symbol (for example, numbers or letters) is displayed by light emission, it means the latent probability variation jackpot (latent specific hit), and when the third symbol (for example, numbers or letters) is displayed by light emission, the normal jackpot (non-specific hit) is displayed. It means that the fourth symbol (for example, a number or a letter) is emitted and displayed, which means that the symbol is off. It should be noted that the display of the first symbol to the fourth symbol by the first segment display unit 40a does not know what the general player means even if he / she sees it. It is an indication that it is unknown (or difficult to understand) whether it indicates a latent probability change jackpot, a normal jackpot or a miss.

In this way, when the probability variable jackpot (specific hit), the latent probability variable jackpot (latent specific hit), or the normal jackpot (non-specific hit) is reached, the variable winning device 32 is in the specific gaming state (for example, the jackpot state) described later.

As the first symbol display device 40, a single or a plurality of LEDs of a type capable of emitting light of at least two colors may be adopted. Specifically, for example, when two LEDs capable of emitting light in red and blue are adopted as the first symbol display device 40, the first pattern display device 40 is changed by alternately changing the emission color of each LED. A variable display state of the design (emission color mode of each LED) is generated, for example, when both LEDs stop in the red light emitting state, a probability variation jackpot (specific hit) is shown, and one LED stops in the red light emitting state and the other. When the LED of is turned off, it indicates a latent probability change jackpot (latent specific hit), when both LEDs stop in the blue light emitting state, it shows a normal jackpot (non-specific hit), and when both LEDs stop in different color emitting states, it comes off. Is mentioned. Further, at least one of the first segment display unit 40a and the holding lamp 40c constituting the first symbol display device 40 is a display device of another type such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT or a dot matrix display device. In particular, it may be configured to be displayed on the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42. The pattern displayed on the first symbol display device 40 includes a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, or a plurality of types. A configuration in which colors are displayed can be considered.

The second symbol display device 41 includes a display unit 41a on which, for example, "○" is drawn for the second symbol, a display unit 41b on which, for example, "x" is drawn for the second symbol, and a holding lamp 41c. The second start on the lower side when, for example, the display symbols (ordinary symbols) by the display units 41a and 41b fluctuate each time the game ball passes through the through gate 34, and the fluctuation display stops at a predetermined symbol. The mouth 33b is configured to be in operation (open) for a predetermined time. The number of times the game ball has passed through the through gate 34 is held up to four times, and the number of times held is lit and displayed by the hold lamp 41c. The display units 41a and 41b have an LED (light emitting diode) inside, and are configured to be variablely displayed by switching the light emission (or lighting of the lamp) of the LED. Further, at least one of the second symbol display device 41 and the hold lamp 41c may be configured by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT or a dot matrix display device, and in particular. It may be configured to be displayed on the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42.

In the third symbol display device 42, the variation display and the predetermined display (stop display) of the first symbol are performed on the first symbol display device 40 based on the winning of the first start port 33a and the second start port 33b. In the case of such a situation, the variation display and the predetermined display (stop display) of the third symbol are performed accordingly. In the third symbol display device 42, not only the display effect triggered by winning a prize in the first start port 33a or the second start port 33b, but also the display in the specific game state that shifts after the big hit is won. Directing etc. are performed.

The third symbol display device 42 is composed of, for example, a liquid crystal display device, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 45 described later. On the third symbol display device 42, for example, as shown in FIG. 6, three decorative symbol rows L, M, and R on the left, middle, and right are displayed. Each decorative symbol row L, M, R is composed of a plurality of decorative symbols, and these decorative symbols are variably displayed on the third symbol display device 42 so as to be scrolled for each decorative symbol row L, M, R. To. In the present embodiment, the third symbol display device 42 (liquid crystal display device) includes, for example, a large liquid crystal display having an size of 11 inches. In the variable display device unit 35, a center frame 47 is arranged on the front side of the third symbol display device 42 so as to substantially surround the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42 in a front view. In the present embodiment, a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the third symbol display device 42, but other types of image display devices (for example, PDP: plasma display panel, EL: electroluminescence display, organic EL, etc.). May be adopted.

The variable winning device 32 shown in FIG. 3 is normally in a closed state in which the game ball cannot win (or may be in a closed state in which it is difficult to win), and is in an open state in which the game ball is likely to win in the event of a big hit. It is operated repeatedly in the closed state of. Such a state in which the variable winning device 32 is repeatedly operated in the open state and the normal closed state at the time of a big hit is called a specific gaming state (for example, a big hit state), and a large number of games are played in the variable winning device 32. Since the ball enters (wins) and a large amount of game balls are paid out in response to the prize, the gaming state is advantageous for the player. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the number of game balls input (the number of game balls launched into the game area 30a by the launching device 229) is the number of game ball prize balls paid out (general winning opening 31, variable). The normal game state (game ball consumption state), which is larger than the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of the game ball into the winning device 32, the first starting port 33a, the second starting port 33b, etc., and the game ball prize. The number of balls paid out can be changed to a specific gaming state (for example, a jackpot state) in which the number of balls paid out is larger than the number of balls thrown in.

More specifically, when the game ball wins a prize for the first starting port 33a or the second starting port 33b, the first segment display unit 40a of the first symbol display device 40 is variablely displayed, and the first segment after the fluctuation is stopped. A specific gaming state occurs when the display of the display unit 40a is stopped at a preset symbol. For example, when the first symbol is stopped and displayed, it means that the specific game state of the probability variation jackpot (specific hit) is won, and when the second symbol is stopped and displayed, it means that the latent probability variation jackpot (latent specific hit) is won. When the 3rd symbol is stopped and displayed, it means that the player has won the specific game state of normal jackpot (non-specific hit), and the 4th symbol is stopped and displayed. Means out of the game (being defeated in a specific game state).

When a specific game state occurs, the variable winning device 32 is configured such that the large winning opening 32a is in a predetermined open state and the game ball is easily won a prize (big hit state). Specifically, the large winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 is repeatedly opened a predetermined number of times (for example, 16 rounds), with the passage of a predetermined time or a predetermined number of winnings in the open state as one round. Further, the number of times the game ball has passed through the first starting port 33a and the second starting port 33b is held up to four times, and the number of holding times is held by the holding lamps 40c1, 40c2, 40c3, 40c4 (generally speaking, the holding lamps). (Called 40c) is displayed. The hold lamp 40c is turned on in the order of 40c1, 40c2, 40c3, 40c4. The hold lamp 40c may be configured to hold display or the like on a part of the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3, two rails 51 and 52 for guiding the game ball launched from the launching device 229 (see FIG. 2) to the upper part of the game board 30 are attached to the game board 30. The game ball launched by the rotation operation of the game ball launch handle 18 is guided to a predetermined game area 30a through the ball guide passage 49 described later of the two rails 51 and 52. The two rails 51 and 52 are long stainless steel metal strip-shaped members, which are double-mounted on the game board 30 inside and outside. The inner rail 51 is formed in a shape excluding a portion of a substantially vertical ellipse from diagonally upper left to diagonally lower right in the front view of the game board 30. The outer rail 52 is formed so that a part (mainly the left side portion) faces the inner rail 51. In such a case, the guide rail is formed by the inner rail 51 and the outer rail 52, and the ball guide passage 49 is formed by the portions where the rails 51 and 52 are parallel to each other at a predetermined interval (the portion on the left side when facing the rail). .. The ball guide passage 49 is formed in a groove shape having a contact surface with the game board 30, that is, a groove shape in which the front side is open.

A return ball prevention member 53 is attached to the tip end portion (upper left portion in FIG. 3) of the inner rail 51. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball once guided from the ball guide passage 49 between the inner rail 51 and the outer rail 52 to the upper part of the game board 30 to return to the inside of the ball guide passage 49 again. Further, in a state where the game board 30 is attached to the inner frame 12, the position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the game ball on the outer rail 52 (upper right portion in FIG. 3: portion corresponding to the tip portion of the outer rail 52). Is located with the return rubber 54. Therefore, the game ball launched with a momentum equal to or higher than a predetermined value hits the return rubber 54 and is repelled. Since the outer rail 52 is made of a long stainless steel metal band, the flight of the game ball can be made smoother, that is, the frictional resistance of the game ball can be reduced. As shown in FIG. 3, the game area in the first symbol display device 40 is from the tip end portion of the outer rail 52 (upper right portion in FIG. 3) to the right end portion (lower right portion in FIG. 3) of the inner rail 51. The game area 30a is partitioned by the location of the wall portion 56 on the 30a side and the wall portion 55 (shown by a broken line in FIG. 3) formed on the inner frame 12.

As shown in FIG. 3, the lower right corner of the game board 30 is a space for attaching a seal SL (which may be a plate) such as a certificate stamp (for example, a serial number is written). By attaching a sticker SL such as a certificate stamp to the lower right corner of the game board 30, the game board 30 and the certificate stamp can be given uniqueness.

Next, the game area 30a of the game board 30 will be described. As shown in FIG. 3, the game area 30a is partitioned into a substantially vertically elongated circular shape by the inner peripheral portions (inner and outer rails) of the inner rail 51 and the outer rail 52. In particular, in the present embodiment, the game board 30 is formed. The game area 30a partitioned on the board surface of the player is largely configured.

In the present embodiment, the gaming area 30a is viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10, except for the area of the guide rail which is a parallel portion of the inner and outer rails 51 and 52 among the areas surrounded by the inner rail 51 and the outer rail 52. It is an area. Therefore, since the guide rail portion is not included in the game area 30a, the limit position on the left side of the game area 30a is specified not by the outer rail 52 but by the inner rail 51. Further, the limit position on the right side of the game area 30a is specified by the wall portion 55 (a part of the inner frame 12). Further, the lower limit position of the game area 30a is specified by the inner rail 51. Further, the upper limit position of the game area 30a is specified by the outer rail 52.

Although disclosure of detailed drawings is omitted, game balls are supplied to the launcher 229 one by one from a ball outlet (a ball outlet leading from the most downstream portion of the upper plate 19) of the front frame set 14 (not shown). ..

Next, the configuration of the back surface of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. As shown in FIG. 2, in the pachinko machine 10, various control boards are arranged vertically and horizontally on the back surface (actually, the back surface of the inner frame 12 and the game board 30), and a predetermined control board is stacked back and forth (actually,). For example, the payout control board 311a of FIG. 4, which will be described later, is located on the front side in the rear view, and the power supply control board of the power supply device 313 and the launch control board of the launch control device 312 are located on the back side of the payout control board 311a). Further, a game ball supply device (pain mechanism unit 352) for supplying the game balls, a resin protective cover 353, and the like are attached. In the present embodiment, various control boards are separately mounted on a plurality (three) mounting bases 230 to 232 shown in FIG. 2, and these are used as each control board unit, and each control board unit is individually placed on the inner frame 12 or. It is attached to the back of the game board 30. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 2, the main control device 261 is mounted on the mounting base 230, the sub control device 262 is mounted on the mounting base 232 and unitized, and the payout control device 311 and the launch control device are respectively. The 312 and the power supply device 313 are mounted on the mounting base 231 to form a unit.

Further, as shown in FIG. 2, in the payout mechanism unit 352, various parts (tank 355, tank rail 356, case rail 357, payout device 358 and power switch board 382, which will be described later) are reversed L when viewed from the rear of the pachinko machine 10. The unit is arranged in the shape of a rail, and the payout mechanism portion 352 and the protective cover 353 are also integrated as one unit. Since the unit is sometimes referred to as a back pack, the unit is referred to as "back" here. It is called "pack unit 203".

The back pack unit 203 is configured so that it can be attached and detached in units of units without using any tools, and in addition to this, a support shaft portion is provided in a part thereof with respect to the inner frame 12 or the back surface of the game board 30. It has a structure that can be opened and closed. This is also a device for making it possible to easily confirm the hidden configuration or the like even if the back pack unit 203 and other configurations are arranged so as to overlap each other in the front-rear direction.

Further, on the back surface of the game board 30, a prize detection mechanism for detecting the passage of a game ball such as various prize openings is provided. Specifically, a winning opening switch (not shown) is provided at a position corresponding to the general winning opening 31 on the front side of the game board 30, and a count switch (not shown) is provided on the variable winning device 32. The count switch is a switch for counting winning balls. Further, at positions corresponding to the first starting port 33a and the second starting port 33b, an operating port switch for the first starting port 33a (not shown) and an operating port switch for the second starting port 33b (not shown). (Omitted) (not shown) are provided, and the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33a and the second starting port 33b is detected by the respective operating port switches. A gate switch is provided at a position corresponding to the through gate 34, and the passage of the game ball to the through gate 34 is detected by the gate switch.

The winning opening switch (not shown) of the general winning opening 31 and the gate switch of the through gate 34 are connected to the board surface connection board (not shown) through electrical wiring (not shown), and the board surface connection board is in the main control device 261 described later. It is connected to the main control board 261a (see FIG. 4). Further, the count switch of the variable winning device 32 is connected to the large winning opening relay terminal board (not shown), and the large winning opening relay terminal board is also connected to the main control board 261a. On the other hand, the operation port switches of the first start port 33a and the second start port 33b are directly connected to the main control board 261a without going through the relay board.

Others Although not shown, the variable winning device 32 is provided with a large winning opening solenoid for opening the large winning opening 32a, and the second starting opening 33b on the lower side is for opening an electric accessory. The actuating port solenoid is provided.

The detection results detected by the winning detection mechanism are taken into the main control board 261a in the main control device 261 described later, and the payout command (of the game ball) according to the winning situation each time is taken from the main control board 261a. The number of payouts) is transmitted to the payout control board 311a. Then, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out by the output of the payout control board 311a.

As shown in FIG. 2, the main control device 261 is mounted on the lower mounting base 230 in the rear view of the pachinko machine 10, and the sub control device 262 is mounted on the upper mounting base 232 in the rear view of the pachinko machine 10. Has been done. Here, as shown in FIG. 4, the main control device 261 includes a CPU 501 that controls the main control, a ROM 502 that stores a game program, a RAM 503 that stores necessary data according to the progress of the game, and various devices. Main control including input / output port 505 for communication, random number generator used for various lottery (not shown), clock pulse generation circuit used for time counting and synchronization (not shown), etc. A substrate 261a is provided, and the main control substrate 261a is housed in a substrate box 263 (encapsulating means) made of a transparent resin material or the like. The substrate box 263 includes a box base having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are unopenably connected by a sealing unit 261c, whereby the substrate box 263 is sealed.

Further, the sub control device 262 includes, for example, a CPU 551 that controls voice and lamp display and control of the display control device 45 according to an instruction from the main control board 261a in the main control device 261, and other ROM 552, RAM 552, bus line 554, and the like. A sub control board 262a including an input / output port 555 and the like is provided, and the sub control board 262a is housed in a board box made of a transparent resin material or the like. The power supplied from the power supply board described later is output to the display control device 45 via the sub control device 262. The sub control device 262 corresponds to the audio output control means of the present invention.

As shown in FIG. 5, the sub-control device 262 has various flags and counters described in detail later in the storage area of the RAM 553, that is, 30 × n game times (n: integer) from the power-on to the pachinko machine 10. The first specific sound (19 kHz) having a frequency band of a predetermined height that can be heard only by some players within the specific sound effect period during the variable display of the third symbol based on the arrival of the first specific sound (19 kHz). The first, second, and third specific sound output flags that control the output of the second specific sound (17 kHz) and the third specific sound (15 kHz) having a lower frequency band to the sound output unit 24. , A counter that counts the elapsed time of the specific sound effect period, and an audible frequency band that the player could hear based on the operation of the effect button 80 during the valid period (first specific sound: 19 kHz, second). Based on the first, second, and third specific sound listening flags that grasp the specific sound: 17 kHz, the third specific sound: 15 kHz, and the audible frequency band, the first and first according to the audible frequency band. 2, The first, second, and third specific sound listening display flags for displaying the third specific sound listening image on the third symbol display device 42, and the first, second, and second when the variable display result is the jackpot display mode. , The first, second, and third notification sounds of the height (19 kHz, 17 kHz, 15 kHz) corresponding to the height of the audible frequency band grasped by the third specific sound listening flag are output. , The third notification sound flag, etc. are provided.

As shown in FIG. 2, the payout control device 311, the launch control device 312, the power supply device 313, and the card unit connection board 314 are mounted on the mounting base 231. The payout control device 311 includes a CPU that forms the center of control, and a control board that includes other ROMs, RAMs, various ports, and the like. Further, the launch control device 312 includes a launch control board. Further, the power supply device 313 is provided with a power supply control board. The payout control board 311a of the payout control device 311 controls the payout of prize balls and rented balls. Further, the launch control board of the launch control device 312 controls the launch device 229 (see FIG. 4) according to the operation of the game ball launch handle 18 by the player, and the power supply board of the power supply device 313 controls various control devices and the like. The required predetermined power supply voltage is generated and output. The launching device 229 of this embodiment employs a solenoid-type launching component that hits a game ball with a launching mallet (not shown) that can move forward and backward according to energization / non-energization of the launching solenoid (not shown). In addition, as other launching devices 229, there are various types such as a mechanical launching component that launches a game ball by hitting it with a launching pestle that operates according to the drive of a launch motor, and an electromagnetic launching component that launches a game ball by generating an electromagnetic field. You may adopt the type of. The card unit connection board 314 is electrically connected to the ball lending operation unit 120 (see FIG. 1) on the front of the pachinko machine and a card unit (not shown), and the player takes in the command of the ball lending operation and dispenses it. It is output to. The card unit connection board 314 is not required for a cash machine in which a game ball is directly lent to the upper plate 19 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit.

The payout control device 311, the launch control device 312, the power supply device 313, and the card unit connection board 314 are each housed in a board box made of a transparent resin material or the like. In particular, in the payout control device 311, as in the main control device 261 described above, the box base and the box cover constituting the substrate box 311b (encapsulating means) are unopenably connected by the sealing unit (sealing means). The board box 311b is sealed.

As shown in FIG. 2, the payout control device 311 is provided with a state return switch 311c. For example, when the state return switch 311c is pressed when a payout error such as a ball jam in the payout motor section occurs, the payout motor 358a (see FIG. 4) is slowly rotated in the forward direction to clear the ball jam (return to the normal state). ) Is planned.

Further, the power supply monitoring board 261b is provided with a RAM erasing switch 323. The pachinko machine 10 has a backup function, and can maintain the state at the time of a power failure even in the unlikely event of a power failure, and can return to the state at the time of a power failure when recovering from the power failure (recovery of power). Therefore, if the power is turned off in the normal procedure (for example, when the hall is closed), the state before the power is turned off is stored in memory. Therefore, if you want to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, turn on the power while pressing the RAM erase switch 323. It is decided to put it in.

Next, the configuration of the back pack unit 203 will be described. As shown in FIG. 2, the back pack unit 203 integrates a resin-molded protective cover 353 and a game ball payout mechanism portion 352.

The back pack unit 203 is provided with a tank 355 that opens upward at the uppermost portion thereof, and the game balls supplied from the island equipment (game island equipment) of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 355. Below the tank 355, for example, a tank rail 356 having two horizontal rows of ball passages and gently sloping downward toward the downstream side is connected, and further, a case rail 357 is vertically connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 356. Are concatenated. A payout device 358 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 357, and a required number of game balls are appropriately paid out according to a predetermined electrical configuration such as a payout motor 358a. Then, the game balls paid out from the payout device 358 are supplied to the upper plate 19 through a payout passage (not shown) or the like.

Further, the tank rail 356 is provided with a vibrator 360 for adding vibration to the tank rail 356. For example, the vibrator 360 is fastened to and attached to the tank rail 356 with, for example, two screws. Further, the vibrator 360 is not in surface contact with the tank rail 356, but is in contact with the two screw portions, and the vibration generated by the vibrator 360 is more effectively transmitted to the tank rail 356. Therefore, if a ball jam occurs near the tank rail 356, the vibrator 360 is driven to eliminate the ball jam.

A payout relay board (not shown) that relays a signal of a payout command from the payout control device 311 to the payout device 358 is installed in the payout mechanism unit 352, and a power switch board 382 for taking in the main power supply from the outside is installed. is set up. For example, an AC 24V main power supply is supplied to the power switch board 382 via a voltage converter, and the power is turned on or off by the switching operation of the power switch 382a.

The payout mechanism portion 352 from the tank 355 to the payout passage (not shown) is all molded of a conductive resin material (for example, a conductive polycarbonate resin) and is grounded (earthed) at a part thereof. .. As a result, the generation of noise due to the charging of the game ball is suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 2, an inner frame open detection switch 388 for detecting that the inner frame 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11 is provided on the upper right side of the inner frame 12. When the inner frame 12 is opened, it is output from the inner frame open detection switch 388 to the computer in the hall (inside the pachinko shop).

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. The pachinko machine 10 includes a main control device 261, a payout control device 311, a launch control device 312, a sub control device 262, a display control device 45, a voice output control device 47, a power supply device 313, and the like. .. Hereinafter, these devices will be described in detail individually.

The main control device 261 of the pachinko machine 10 is equipped with a CPU 501 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The CPU 501 is a ROM 502 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 501, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 502 is executed. A certain RAM 503 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in.

The RAM 503 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 313 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and the RAM 503 temporarily stores various data and the like. It has memory and area.

That is, when the power is turned off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 executes the normal processing to the end, so that the RAM 503 is used when the power is turned off (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter). It is only necessary to store and retain the contents of the counter buffer and the holding ball storage area, and the state of the pachinko machine 10 can be restored to the state before the power is turned off when the power is turned on again. Specifically, it is not necessary to provide the RAM 503 with a dedicated backup area for storing values such as registers and I / O for game information during normal processing when the power is turned off. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 501 is configured to input a power failure signal S1 output from a power failure monitoring circuit 542, which will be described later, when the power is turned off due to a power failure or the like. Upon occurrence, power failure processing (NMI interrupt processing) is immediately executed.

An input / output port 505 is connected to the CPU 501 having the ROM 502 and the RAM 503 built therein via a bus line 504 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 505 includes a RAM erasing switch circuit 543, a payout control device 311, a launch control device 312, a sub control device 262, a first symbol display device 40, a second symbol display device 41, and other switches not shown. Etc. are connected. Further, the main control device 261 has a function of controlling the variation display of the first symbol in the first symbol display device 40 and the variation display of the second symbol in the second symbol display device 41.

Similar to the RAM 503 of the main control device 261 described above, the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 313 and data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. , RAM 513 is provided with a memory and an area for temporarily storing various data and the like.

The RAM 513 stores and holds information on the state at the time of power off so that the state of the pachinko machine 10 can be restored to the state before the power is turned off when the power is turned off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. That is, the storage retention of the RAM 513 is executed when the power is turned off by the steps in the latter half of the NMI interrupt process and the payout control process, and conversely, the restoration of the stored information of the RAM 513 is executed in the power recovery process when the power is turned on. ..

An input / output port 515 is connected to the CPU 511 containing the ROM 512 and the RAM 513 via a bus line 514 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 261, a launch control device 312, a payout motor 358a, and the like are connected to the input / output port 515, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 4, the launch control device 312 permits or prohibits the launch of the game ball by the launch device 229, and the launch device 229 is permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the launch control device 312 includes a card unit connection signal S4 from the payout control device 311 (a signal output when the above-mentioned card unit is connected to the pachinko machine 10) and a player. The touch detection signal S5 output when the game ball launch handle 18 is touched, and the launch stop switch 18a for stopping the launch provided on the game ball launch handle 18 are output when the launch stop switch 18a is not operated. The launch permission signal S7 is output to the main control device 261 on condition that all of the launch maintenance signals S6 are input. Further, a volume signal S10 corresponding to the operation amount of the game ball launch handle 18 is input to the launch control device 312 from the game ball launch handle 18, and the launch control device 312 outputs this volume signal S10 to the main control device 261. do.

That is, the firing permission state is in the period when the firing permission signal S7 is ON (high level), and the firing permission state is in the firing permission state during the period when the firing permission signal S7 is OFF (low level). That is, the main control device 261 is on the launch rail and the launch control signal S8 (pulse signal) that controls the launch solenoid (not shown) that launches the game ball during the period when the input launch permission signal S7 is ON. The ball feed control signal S9 (pulse signal) that controls the ball feed solenoid that feeds the game ball is repeatedly output to the launch control device 312 at a predetermined repetition cycle. The amplitude value of the launch control signal S8 (pulse signal) is determined by the main control device 261 based on the volume signal S10. For example, the larger the operation amount of the game ball launch handle 18, the more the launch control signal S8 (pulse signal). ) Increases the amplitude value. The launch control device 312 drives and controls the launch device 229 based on the launch control signal S8 and the ball feed control signal S9, and launches the game ball with an intensity corresponding to the operation amount of the game ball launch handle 18. On the contrary, the main control device 261 does not output the launch control signal S8 and the ball feed control signal S9 to the launch control device 312 during the period when the input launch permission signal S7 is OFF, and the launch device 229 does not output the game ball. Will not be fired.

The display control device 45 controls the variable display of the third symbol (decorative symbol) in the third symbol display device 42. The display control device 45 includes a CPU 521, a ROM (program ROM) 522, a work RAM 523, a video RAM 524, a character ROM 525, an image controller 526, an input port 527, an output port 529, and a bus line 530, 531. And have. The output of the sub control device 262 is connected to the input of the input port 527, and the CPU 521, the ROM 522, the work RAM 523, and the image controller 526 are connected to the output of the input port 527. Further, an output port 529 is connected to the image controller 526 via a bus line 531 and a third symbol display device 42, which is a liquid crystal display device, is connected to the output of the output port 529.

The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 controls the decorative symbol display in the third symbol display device 42 based on various commands in which various commands from the main control device 261 are edited and transmitted by the sub control device 262. The ROM 522 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 521, and the work RAM 523 temporarily stores the work data and flags used when the various programs are executed by the CPU 521. It is a memory for.

The video RAM 524 is a memory for storing display data displayed on the third symbol display device 42, and by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 524, the display contents of the third symbol display device 42 are changed. The character ROM 525 is a memory for storing character data such as decorative symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 42. The image controller 526 adjusts the timings of the CPU 521, the video RAM 524, and the output port 529 to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads the display data stored in the video RAM 524 from the character ROM 525 at a predetermined timing. It is to be displayed on the symbol display device 42.

The voice output control device 46 controls the output of normal sound in the sound output unit 24a and the output of specific sound in the sound output unit 24b. As shown in FIG. 5, the audio output control device 46 includes a CPU 561, a ROM 562, a RAM 563, and the like. The CPU 561 and the RAM 563 execute a process of controlling the output of a normal sound and the output of a specific sound in accordance with the display effect of the third symbol display device 42. The ROM 562 stores a program for voice output processing and sound data corresponding to normal voice and specific sound. The audio output unit 24a includes an amplifier 24a1 and a speaker 24a2 for outputting normal audio. The voice output unit 24b includes an amplifier 24b1 and a speaker 24b2 for outputting a specific sound or a one-shot notification sound.

Further, the power supply device 313 includes a power supply unit 541 for supplying electric power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10. The power supply unit 541 supplies the operation power required for each of the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 541 takes in an AC 24-volt power supply supplied from the outside and generates a + 12V power supply for driving various switches and motors, a + 5V power supply for logic, a backup power supply for RAM backup, and the like. Then, these + 12V power supply, + 5V power supply, and backup power supply are supplied to the main control device 261, the payout control device 311 and the like. An operating power source (+ 12V power source, + 5V power source, etc.) is supplied to the launch control device 312 via the payout control device 311.

As shown in FIG. 4, the main control device 261 includes a main control board 261a and a power supply monitoring board 261b separate from the main control board 261a in a board box 263 made of a transparent resin material or the like. .. The power supply monitoring board 261b includes a power failure monitoring circuit 542 that monitors a power failure due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM erase switch circuit 543 that is connected to the RAM erase switch 323.

The power failure monitoring circuit 542 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal S1 to each NMI terminal of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 and the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 542 monitors the voltage of AC 24 volts with the power supply unit 541, and determines that a power failure (power failure) has occurred when the time when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts exceeds, for example, 20 milliseconds. , The power failure signal S1 is output to the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311. By the output of the power failure signal S1, the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the power failure time processing (NMI interrupt processing).

In addition, even after the time when the AC 24 volt monitored by the power supply unit 541 becomes less than 22 volts exceeds 20 milliseconds, the power supply unit 541 has a sufficient time to execute the power failure processing. It is configured to maintain the output of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, at a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 can normally execute and complete the power failure processing.

The RAM erase switch circuit 543 is a circuit for taking in the switch signal of the RAM erase switch 323 and clearing the backup data of the RAM 503 of the main control device 261 and the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311 according to the state of the switch 323. When the RAM erase switch 323 is pressed, the RAM erase switch circuit 543 outputs the RAM erase signal S2 to the main control board 261a. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the RAM erase switch 323 is pressed (including turning on the power due to the elimination of a power failure), the data of the RAM 503 is cleared in the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 is the main control device. When the initialization command from 261 is received, the data in RAM 513 is cleared.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 6, three decorative symbol rows L, M, and R on the left, middle, and right are set in the third symbol display device 42 (liquid crystal display device), and the decorative symbol rows L, Three decorative symbols, an upper decorative symbol, a middle decorative symbol, and a lower decorative symbol, are displayed in a variable manner for each of M and R. In the present embodiment, the series of symbols is composed of a main decorative symbol SZ with numbers "0" to "9", and a sub-decorative symbol FZ composed of diamond-shaped symbols. The main decorative symbols SZ are displayed in ascending or descending order, and the sub-decorative symbols FZ are arranged between the main decorative symbols SZ to form a series of decorative symbol rows L, M, and R. Then, the main decorative symbol SZ and the sub-decorative symbol FZ are displayed in a variable manner from top to bottom with periodicity.

In such a case, in the left decorative symbol row L, the above series of decorative symbols are displayed in descending order (that is, in the order in which the number of the main decorative symbol SZ decreases), and in the middle decorative symbol row M and the right decorative symbol row R, the same is true. The series of decorative symbols are displayed in ascending order (that is, in order in which the number of the main decorative symbol SZ increases). Then, the variable display is stopped in the order of the left decorative symbol row L → the right decorative symbol row R → the middle decorative symbol row M, and at the time of the stop, the five effective lines on the third symbol display device 42, that is, the upper line L1 and the middle line. If the main decorative symbol SZ is a combination of jackpot symbols (in the present embodiment, the same combination of main decorative symbols SZ) in any of L2, lower line L3, right-up line L4, and left-up line L5, it is special as a jackpot. The game video is displayed.

Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described.

In the present embodiment, the CPU 501 in the main control device 261 uses a random number related to the operation of the accessory and another random number used for the game to draw a lottery for the first symbol display device 40 (big hit lottery: first). The big hit lottery of symbols) and the setting of symbol display, the lottery of the second symbol display device 41 (the winning lottery of the second symbol), the setting of the symbol display, and the decorative symbol (third symbol) of the third symbol display device 42. A lottery related to variable display and its setting will be performed.

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as a random number related to the operation of the accessory, as shown in FIG. 7, a jackpot random number counter C1 used for a jackpot lottery of the first symbol display device 40 and a first random number counter. The jackpot symbol counter C2 used for selecting the jackpot symbol of the symbol display device 40, the initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and the second symbol display device 41 used for the winning lottery. The two symbol random number counter C4 and the initial value second symbol random number counter CINI2 used for setting the initial value of the second symbol random number counter C4 are used.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, as other random numbers used for the game, as shown in FIG. 7, in order to roughly specify the type of the variation pattern when selecting the variation pattern of the decorative symbol of the third symbol display device 42. The stop pattern selection counter C3 used for selecting the stop pattern of, the variation type counters CS1, CS2, CS3 used for selecting the variation pattern of the decorative symbol of the third symbol display device 42, and the outlier symbol of the second symbol display device 41. The second symbol out-of-symbol symbol counter C5 used for selection is used. Each of the above-mentioned counters is composed of a program executed by the CPU 501.

For example, "stop pattern 0" indicates a complete deviation variation pattern group consisting of a plurality of types of complete deviation variation patterns, and "stop pattern 1" is a front-back deviation reach variation pattern group consisting of a plurality of types of anteroposterior reach variation patterns. The "stop pattern 2" indicates a group of reach fluctuation patterns other than the front-back deviation, which consists of a plurality of types of reach fluctuation patterns other than the front-back deviation, and the "stop pattern 3" indicates a group of reach fluctuation patterns other than the front-back deviation, and the "stop pattern 3" consists of a plurality of types of normal jackpot fluctuation patterns. The normal jackpot fluctuation pattern group is shown, and the "stop pattern 4" shows a probability variation jackpot fluctuation pattern group consisting of a plurality of types of probability variation jackpot fluctuation patterns.

For all of these counters C1 to C5, CINI1 to CINI2, CS1 to CS3, "1" is added to the previous value (hereinafter referred to as "update") each time the counter is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it becomes "0". It is a return loop counter. Each counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 shown in FIG. 7. Further, the RAM 503 is provided with a holding ball storage area consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area, second holding area, third holding area, fourth holding area). In each of these areas, values such as a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot symbol counter C2, and a stop pattern selection counter C3 are set according to the winning history of the game balls to the first starting port 33a and the second starting port 33b. It is designed to be stored in chronological order. The winning of the game ball in the first starting port 33a and the second starting port 33b is also referred to as the establishment of the starting condition. Each value stored in the execution area is also referred to as a variable display for the executed portion, and each value stored in the reserved ball storage area is also referred to as a variable display for the unexecuted portion.

Specifically, if the start condition is satisfied during the period when neither the executed portion nor the unexecuted portion is stored in the execution area and the reserved ball storage area, the execution portion variation display is performed in the execution area. Is stored. If the start condition is satisfied during the period when the variation display of the execution portion is stored in the execution area, the unexecuted portion is in the order of the first hold area, the second hold area, the third hold area, and the fourth hold area. The variable display of is stored. When the variation display of the execution portion is stored in the execution area, the variation non-execution condition for not executing the variation display of the symbol is satisfied with respect to the variation display of the unexecuted portion stored in the hold ball storage area.

The variable display of the unexecuted portion stored in the first hold area, the second hold area, the third hold area, and the fourth hold area is also referred to as the first hold, the second hold, the third hold, and the fourth hold.

The variation display of the unexecuted portion stored in the reserved ball storage area corresponds to the variation display of the unexecuted portion of the invention according to (C1), and the reserved ball storage area is the holding means of the invention according to (C1). Corresponds to.

Each of the above-mentioned counters will be described in detail below with reference to FIG. 7. The jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, "0" to "599", reach the maximum value (that is, "599"), and then return to "0". In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The initial value random number counter CINI1 is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599), is updated once for each timer interrupt (see FIG. 12) described later, and is a normal process described later. It is repeatedly updated within the remaining time (see FIG. 9). The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated (once for each timer interrupt (see FIG. 12) described later in this embodiment), and the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 33a and the second starting port 33b. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 503 at the timing.

The hit value of the jackpot random number counter C1, that is, the number of random numbers that become jackpots is set in two types, one at low probability and the other at high probability, and the number of random numbers that become jackpot at low probability is two. The value is "150,450", the number of random numbers that are big hits at high probability is four, and the value is "50,150,350,450". That is, when the probability is low, the jackpot probability is 1/300, and when the probability is high, the jackpot probability is 1/150. In addition, the high probability time refers to a state in which a jackpot is achieved by a predetermined probability fluctuation symbol and the subsequent jackpot probability is increased as an added value, that is, a so-called "probability change", which is a normal time (low probability time). Refers to the time when it is not in such a probabilistic state. Further, the high probability time (probability change state) is continued until the next big hit after the probability change big hit or the latent probability change big hit is completed (after the big winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 is opened for 16 rounds, for example).

The jackpot symbol counter C2 is a symbol at the time of a jackpot when the fluctuation of the first segment display unit 40a of the first symbol display device 40 is stopped (in this embodiment, the final display symbol after the fluctuation display of the first segment display unit 40a). ) Is determined. In this embodiment, the jackpot symbol counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, "0" to "9", reach the maximum value (that is, "9"), and then return to "0". There is. The jackpot symbol counter C2 is periodically updated (once for each timer interrupt (see FIG. 12) described later) in the same manner as in the case of the jackpot random number counter C1 described above, and the game ball is set to the first starting port 33a, the first starting port 33a. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 503 at the timing when the starting port 33b of 2 is won. When the above-mentioned jackpot random number counter C1 is a hit and the values of the jackpot symbol counter C2 are "1", "4", and "7", the first segment display unit 40a of the first symbol display device 40 is used. Stops at the third symbol and indicates a low-probability jackpot, a so-called normal jackpot (non-specific hit). Further, when the above-mentioned jackpot random number counter C1 is a hit and the values of the jackpot symbol counter C2 are "0", "2", "5", and "8", the first symbol display device 40 is the first. The segment display unit 40a stops at the first symbol and indicates a high probability jackpot, a so-called probability variation jackpot (specific hit). Further, when the above-mentioned jackpot random number counter C1 is a hit and the values of the jackpot symbol counter C2 are "3", "6", and "9", the first segment display unit 40a of the first symbol display device 40 Stops at the second symbol and indicates a jackpot at a high latent probability, a so-called latent probability variation jackpot (latent specific hit). When the jackpot random number counter C1 is off, the first segment display unit 40a of the first symbol display device 40 stops at the fourth symbol regardless of the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2, indicating the off. That is, as the distribution of the jackpot type, probability variation: latent probability variation: normal = 4: 3: 3.

Further, the stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, "0" to "238", reach the maximum value (that is, 238), and then return to "0". In the present embodiment, the stop pattern selection counter C3 causes the decorative symbol to reach on the third symbol display device 42, and then the final stop decorative symbol is shifted by one to the front and back of the reach decorative symbol to stop. Similarly, after the reach occurs, the final stop decorative symbol stops at a position other than the front and back of the reach decorative symbol, and the "reach other than the front and rear deviation" and the "complete deviation" where the reach does not occur are drawn. For example, C3 = 0 to 201 corresponds to complete deviation, C3 = 202 to 208 corresponds to front-rear out-of-reach, and C3 = 209 to 238 corresponds to non-front-rear reach. The content of the lottery (reach lottery) of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is whether the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability or a high probability, and the fluctuation time shortening function of the first symbol display device 40 is not activated. It may be set individually depending on whether it is in operation or in operation, how many balls are reserved for operation at the start of fluctuation of the first symbol, and the like. The stop pattern selection counter C3 is periodically updated (once for each timer interrupt (see FIG. 12) described later), and the RAM 503 is at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 33a and the second start port 33b. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area of.

Further, among the three variable type counters CS1 to CS3, the variable type counter CS1 is added one by one in order within the range of, for example, "0 to 198", and after reaching the maximum value (that is, "198"), "0". The variation type counter CS2 is configured to return to "0" after reaching the maximum value (that is, "240") by adding 1 in order within the range of "0 to 240", for example. The variable type counter CS3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, "0 to 162", reach the maximum value (that is, "162"), and then return to "0". In the following description, the variation type counter CS1 will be appropriately referred to as a “first variation type counter”, the variation type counter CS2 may be referred to as a “second variation type counter”, and the variation type counter CS3 may be appropriately referred to as a “third variation type counter”. ..

The first variation type counter CS1 determines a rough variation pattern group of decorative symbols such as the reach type of the decorative symbol (third symbol) such as so-called normal reach, super reach, premium reach, etc., and the type of complete deviation. .. Here, for example, it is assumed that the stop pattern selection counter C3 has a value indicating "stop pattern 1" (that is, a value indicating a front-rear reach deviation pattern group), and the first variation among the front-back out-of-reach fluctuation pattern group. It is assumed that the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach group (consisting of a plurality of normal reach of different types) is determined by the type counter CS1.

Subsequently, one more variation pattern from the variation pattern group thus determined by the first variation type counter CS1 is determined by the second variation type counter CS2. Here, for example, it is assumed that one type of normal reach from the normal reach group is determined by the second variable type counter CS2. It should be noted that a plurality of different types of normal reach can be realized by giving a difference such as a difference in the elapsed time until the final stop decorative symbol (for example, the middle decorative symbol in the present embodiment) stops after the reach occurs. Can be mentioned.

Further, subsequently, the third variation type counter CS3 determines which time the variation time addition is set in one variation pattern thus determined by the second variation type counter CS2. For example, as the addition time, when the decorative symbol (third symbol) of the intermediate decorative symbol row on the third symbol display device 42 stops slipping, the decorative symbol of the intermediate decorative symbol row slips after that. The additional time, which is the time until the stop display is displayed, can be mentioned. In this way, the variation type counters CS1 to CS3 can be used to determine a more detailed decorative pattern variation mode. That is, by combining these fluctuation type counters CS1 to CS3, it is possible to easily realize a wide variety of fluctuation patterns.

It should be noted that the symbol variation mode can be determined only by the first variation type counter CS1, the symbol variation mode can be determined only by the first variation type counter CS1 and the second variation type counter CS2, or the first variation type counter CS1 and the stop symbol can be determined. It is also possible to determine the symbol variation mode in combination with the above, or to determine the symbol variation mode in combination with the first variation type counter CS1 and the second variation type counter CS2 and the stopped symbol.

The variation type counters CS1 to CS3 are updated once every time the normal processing described later is executed once, and are repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal processing. Then, the buffer values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 to CS3 are acquired when the fluctuation pattern is determined at the start of the fluctuation of the first symbol by the first symbol display device 40. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 7, since the fluctuation type counters CS1 to CS3 are acquired at the start of fluctuation of the first symbol by the first symbol display device 40, it is not necessary to store them in the reserved ball storage area. , It is only necessary to sequentially update and store it in the counter buffer.

The size and range of each of the above-mentioned counters are merely examples and can be arbitrarily changed. However, it is desirable that the sizes of the jackpot random number counter C1, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counters CS1 to CS3 are all different prime numbers and are not synchronized in any case.

Further, as shown in FIG. 7, the second symbol random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol of the second symbol display device 41. The second symbol random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is sequentially added in the range of "0" to "250", and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250), the counter returns to "0". The second symbol random number counter C4 is periodically updated (once for each timer interrupt (see FIG. 12) described later), and is acquired when the game ball passes through either the left or right second starting port 34. The number of random numbers to be won is 149, and the range is "5 to 153".

In particular, when the second symbol random number counter C4 makes one round, the initial value at that time is read as the initial value of the second symbol random number counter CINI2. The initial value second symbol random number counter CINI2 is a loop counter similar to the second symbol random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250), and is updated once for each timer interrupt (see FIG. 12) described later. , It is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal processing (see FIG. 9) described later. The second symbol random number counter C4 is periodically updated (once for each timer interrupt (see FIG. 12) described later in this embodiment), and the second RAM 503 is set at the timing when the game ball passes through the second starting port 34. 2 Stored in the symbol hold storage area.

That is, the RAM 503 also has a second symbol hold storage area, which is an area different from the hold ball storage area, and has one execution area for the second symbol and four hold areas for the second symbol (second symbol). A second symbol hold storage area (1st to 4th areas for symbol hold) is provided, and each of these areas has a second symbol holding history according to the winning history of the game ball to the second starting port 34. 2 Each value of the symbol random number counter C4 is stored in time series.

Further, the second symbol out-of-symbol symbol counter C5 is updated once every time the second symbol control process of the normal process in FIG. 9, which will be described later, is executed once, and the value thereof is the second symbol out-of-symbol symbol of the counter buffer. The second symbol counter C5, which was updated and acquired in the buffer and was updated and acquired in the second symbol out-of-symbol symbol buffer when stored in the second symbol holding ball storage area of the second symbol random number counter C4, is also the second symbol. It is stored in the hold ball storage area. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 7, when the value of the second symbol random number counter C4 is unsuccessful, "x" is drawn based on the value of the second symbol out-of-symbol symbol counter C5 in the second symbol holding ball storage area. The display unit 41b is lit and displayed. It should be noted that the second symbol variation display result may be performed based only on the second symbol random number counter C4 without providing the second symbol off symbol counter C5. That is, if the second symbol random number counter C4 is won, the display unit 41a on which "○" is drawn is lit and displayed, and if it is not selected, the display unit 41b on which "x" is drawn is lit and displayed.

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 501 in the main control device 261 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 8 to 18. The processing of the CPU 501 is roughly divided into a main processing that is started when the power is turned on, a timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (at a cycle of 2 msec in this embodiment), and a power failure to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). There is an NMI interrupt process that is activated by inputting a signal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described first, and then the main process will be described.

FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process, and this process is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261, for example, every 2 msec.

In FIG. 12, first, in step S601, the reading process of various winning switches is executed. That is, the state of various switches (excluding the RAM erasing switch 323) connected to the main control device 261 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

After that, in step S602, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the initial value second symbol random number counter CINI2 are updated. Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (“599” in the present embodiment), it is cleared to “0”, and the initial value second symbol random number counter is used. CINI2 is incremented by 1 and cleared to "0" at the time of 1 increment after the counter value reaches the maximum value ("250" in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503 (see FIG. 7).

Further, as shown in FIG. 12, in the subsequent step S603, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot symbol counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot symbol counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 are each incremented by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (“599”, “9”, respectively in the present embodiment, respectively. Clear to "0" at the time of 1 increment after reaching "250"). Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C3 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503 (see FIG. 7).

After that, as shown in FIG. 12, in step S604, the start winning process associated with winning the first starting port 33a and the second starting port 33b is executed. Explaining this start winning process by the flowchart of FIG. 13, in step S701, it is determined by the detection information of the actuating opening switch whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the first starting opening 33a and the second starting opening 33b. When it is determined that the game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 33a and the second starting port 33b, in the following step S702, the number N of balls on hold for operation of the first symbol display device 40 is the upper limit value (the present embodiment). Then, it is determined whether or not it is less than 4). The process proceeds to step S703 on condition that the first starting port 33a and the second starting port 33b have won a prize and the number of operation-reserved balls N <4, and the number of operation-reserved balls N is incremented by one.

Further, in the following step S704, a random number related to the winning of the first symbol is acquired. Specifically, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot symbol counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 updated in step S603 are set to the first of the free storage areas of the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 503 shown in FIG. Store in the area of.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12, in the subsequent step S605, the launch control process is executed. Specifically, in the launch control process, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 controls the launch control signal S8 and the ball feed control when the launch permission signal S7 from the launch control device 312 is ON, as shown in FIG. The signal S9 is output to the launch control device 312, and the game ball launch control is performed by the launch device 229. After performing the firing control process in this way, the CPU 501 temporarily ends the timer interrupt process.

FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing, and this processing is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt, the state of the main control device 261 when the power is turned off is stored in the backup area of the RAM 503.

That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal S1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501 in the main control device 261. Then, the CPU 501 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt process of FIG. The NMI interrupt process of FIG. 14 is stored in the ROM 502 of the main controller 261. During a predetermined time after the power failure signal S1 is output, power is supplied from the power supply unit 541 so that the processing of the main control device 261 can be executed, and the NMI interrupt processing is executed within this predetermined time.

In the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 14, in step S801, the power cutoff occurrence information is set in the backup area. In this embodiment, the information on the occurrence of power failure is flagged and stored in the backup area.

Next, the main process will be described.
FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing an example of the main process executed by the CPU 501 in the main control device 261. This main process is started by resetting when the power is turned on.

First, in step S101, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 executes the initial setting process accompanying the power-on. Specifically, a predetermined predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Further, in step S102, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 waits for the control device on the sub side (sub control device 262, payout control device 311, etc.) to be in an operable state, for example, for about 1 second, for weight processing. To execute. In the following step S103, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 permits RAM access.

After that, the data backup process is executed for the RAM 503 in the CPU 501. That is, in step S104, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the RAM erase switch 323 provided on the power supply monitoring board 261b is pressed (ON), and if it is off, the process proceeds to step S105, and if it is off, the process proceeds to step S105. If there is, the process proceeds to step S113. In the following step S105, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is set in the backup area of the RAM 503 (whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information flag is set). Further, in step S106, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 calculates the RAM determination value, and in the following step S107, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 matches the RAM determination value with the RAM determination value saved when the power is turned off. Whether or not, that is, the effectiveness of the backup is determined. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. It is also possible to determine the effectiveness of the backup based on whether or not the keywords written in the predetermined area of the RAM 503 are correctly stored.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when it is desired to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch 323. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 323 is turned on, the process proceeds to the initialization process of the RAM 503 (step S113 or the like). Similarly, when the power cutoff occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the used RAM area is cleared and the RAM 503 is initialized (step). Move to S113 etc.). That is, in step S113, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 clears the used area of the RAM 503 to "0" and executes the initialization process of the RAM 503.

In the following step S114, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 transmits a payout initialization command. As described above, the payout initialization command is output to the payout control device 311 when the main control device 261 is initialized.

Further, in step S115, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 transmits a command at the time of turning on the power to the sub control board 262a. Since this command at the time of turning on the power includes a command for determining the model of the pachinko machine, the model can be determined based on the command content on the sub side such as the sub control board 262a or the display control device 45. ..

Further, in step S116, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 executes the initial setting of the CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit). In step S117, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets interrupt permission and shifts to a normal process (see FIG. 9) described later.

On the other hand, when the RAM erase switch 323 is not pressed, the power is restored on condition that the power cutoff occurrence information is set and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal. Execute the process (process when the power is cut off and restored). That is, in step S108, the power cutoff occurrence information is cleared. In step S109, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 transmits a payout return command to the payout control device 311 and instructs the payout control device 311 to start payout control. Although the details will be described later, when the payout control device 311 receives the payout return command from the main control device 261, the payout control device 311 returns and starts the payout control.

In step S110, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 transmits a command for causing the control device on the sub side to be duplicated in the gaming state when the power is turned off, and in step S111, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is CTC (Counter). / Timer Circuit) Initial setting is executed. Further, in step S112, interrupt permission is set, and then the process proceeds to normal processing (see FIG. 9) described later. For example, even if the power is cut off during the normal processing, the power is turned off after the last step of the normal processing (step of "RAM access prohibited" shown in FIG. 9) is executed, so that the power is turned off after the power is restored. Will be executed from step S201, which is the first step of normal processing.

Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In this normal process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, the processes of steps S201 to S207 are executed as periodic processes having a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter update processes of steps S210 and S211 are executed in the remaining time.

In FIG. 9, first, in step S201, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 performs an external output process of transmitting output data such as a command updated in the previous process to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence / absence of prize detection information is determined, and if there is prize detection information, a prize ball payout command corresponding to the number of acquired game balls is transmitted to the payout control device 311. Further, since the decorative symbol (third symbol) is also variablely displayed by the third symbol display device 42 in conjunction with the first symbol variation display (variation display of the first segment display unit 40a) of the first symbol display device 40. However, when displaying the variation of the first symbol of the first symbol display device 40, a variation pattern designation command, a decorative symbol designation command, a total stop command (confirmation command), and the like are transmitted to the sub control device 262 in the external output processing.

In this pachinko machine 10, at the start of fluctuation of the first symbol, the external output of normal processing is performed in the order of variation pattern specification command → effect command (command for specifying change of variation time, etc.) → decorative symbol specification command. A predetermined number of commands (for example, three) are sent each time a process is performed (that is, three commands are sent every 4 msec), and a total stop command is sent at the timing when the fluctuation time elapses. In addition, after the fluctuation of the first symbol is started, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of each external output processing of the normal processing is performed in the order of the fluctuation pattern designation command → effect command → decorative symbol designation command (that is, 3 every 4 msec). The command may be sent one by one, and the all stop command may be sent at the timing when the fluctuation time elapses.

The variation pattern designation command is a command for designating a variation pattern of a decorative symbol (third symbol) that is variablely displayed on the third symbol display device 42. The variation pattern designation command is transmitted from the main control device 261 to the sub control device 262, and is transmitted from the sub control device 262 to the display control device 45. The display control device 45 controls the third symbol display device 42 so as to display and execute the variation pattern of the decorative symbol based on the transmitted variation pattern designation command.

In the decorative symbol designation command, the variable display effect of the decorative symbol (third symbol) on the third symbol display device 42 is a probability variation jackpot (specific hit), a latent probability variation jackpot (latent specific hit), and a normal jackpot (non-specific hit). , Is a command to specify whether it is out of order. The decorative symbol designation command is transmitted from the main control device 261 to the sub control device 262, and is transmitted from the sub control device 262 to the display control device 45. The display control device 45 displays the display result of the variation pattern of the decorative symbol as a result according to the transmitted decorative symbol designation command (probability variable jackpot (specific hit), latent probability variable jackpot (latent specific hit), normal jackpot (non-specific)). The display of the third symbol display device 42 is controlled so as to be a hit) or a miss).

The all stop command is a command for instructing the stop of the variable pattern of the decorative symbol (third symbol) that is variablely displayed on the third symbol display device 42. The all stop command is transmitted from the main control device 261 to the sub control device 262, and is transmitted from the sub control device 262 to the display control device 45. The display control device 45 controls the third symbol display device 42 so as to stop and display the variation pattern of the decorative symbol based on the transmitted all-stop command.

Further, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sends a fluctuation pattern designation command and an effect command (command for designating a change of the fluctuation time, etc.) to the sub control device 262 in the external output process (step S201) of the normal process. May be sent. That is, it is determined which time the fluctuation time addition (addition time due to the above-mentioned sliding effect of the decorative symbol) is set based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS3, and such addition time is appropriately set to the sub control device 262. Directing commands are used to indicate. Therefore, after the variation of the first symbol starts, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of each external output process of the normal process is performed in the order of the variation pattern specification command → effect command → decorative symbol specification command (that is, 3 every 4 msec). A command may be sent, and a full stop command may be sent at the timing when the fluctuation time elapses.

Next, in step S202, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 executes the update of the variation type counters CS1 to CS3. Specifically, the variable type counters CS1 to CS3 are incremented by 1 respectively, and when the counter values reach the maximum value (198, 240, 162 in the present embodiment) and then 1 increment is performed, "0" is obtained. Clear to. Then, the updated values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 to CS3 are stored in the corresponding buffer area shown in FIG. 7 of the RAM 503.

In the following step S203 of FIG. 9, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 reads the prize ball counting signal, the payout abnormality signal, and the lower plate full tank signal received from the payout control device 311. After that, in step S204, the first symbol variation processing for displaying the variation of the first symbol by the first symbol display device 40 is executed. By this first symbol variation processing, a jackpot determination and a setting of a variation pattern of the first symbol are performed. However, the details of the first symbol variation processing will be described later.

After that, in step S205, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 executes a large winning opening opening / closing process for opening or closing the large winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 in the case of a big hit state. That is, the large winning opening 32a is opened in each round of the big hit state, and whether the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 32a has elapsed or whether the specified number of game balls have won in the large winning opening 32a for each round. judge. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the opening of the large winning opening 32a in that round is stopped and closed, and if there is a remaining round, the opening of the large winning opening 32a is repeatedly executed for the remaining number of rounds.

Further, in step S206, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 executes the display control of the second symbol by the second symbol display device 41. Briefly, on condition that the game ball has passed through the second starting port 34, the second symbol random number counter C4 is acquired each time, and the display units 41a and 41b of the second symbol display device 41 are used. The variation display of the second symbol is carried out. Then, the lottery of the second symbol is carried out by the value of the second symbol random number counter C4, and when the second symbol is in the winning state, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is the second lower side as shown in step S207. The opening process of the second starting port 33b that opens the starting port 33b for a predetermined time is performed. Although the explanation is omitted, the second symbol random number counter C4 is also updated by the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 12, like the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot symbol counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3. ing.

Further, in step S208, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is set in the backup area of the RAM 503 (whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information flag is set). If the power-off occurrence information is not set, the process proceeds to step S209, and if the power-off occurrence information is set, the process proceeds to step S212.

After that, in step S209, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the previous normal process. Then, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process, the initial value random number counter CINI1, the initial value second symbol random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counters CS1 to CS3 are repeatedly updated (steps S210 and S211). ). That is, in step S210, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the initial value second symbol random number counter CINI2 are updated. Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and is cleared to "0" when the counter value is incremented by 1 after reaching the maximum value ("599" in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503. Similarly to this, the initial value second symbol random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and cleared to "0" when the counter value reaches the maximum value ("250" in this embodiment) and then incremented by 1. do. Then, the update value of the initial value second symbol random number counter CINI2 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

Further, in step S211, the variation type counters CS1 to CS3 are updated (similar to the step S202). Specifically, the variable type counters CS1 to CS3 are incremented by 1, and the counter values are incremented by 1 after reaching the maximum value (“198”, “240”, “162” in the present embodiment). Clear each to "0". Then, the updated values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 to CS3 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S201 to S207 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the initial value second symbol random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the initial value random number counter CINI1 (that is, the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1) and the initial value Value The second symbol random number counter CINI2 (that is, the initial value of the second symbol random number counter C4) can be updated at random.

Further, when the power cutoff occurrence information is set in step S208 and the process proceeds to step S212, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets interrupt prohibition. Subsequently, in step S213, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 transmits a power cutoff notification command indicating that the power supply has been quickly cut off to another control device. Subsequently, in step S214, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 stops the output of the control signal. Subsequently, in step S215, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 calculates the RAM determination value and stores it in the backup area. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. Subsequently, in step S216, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 prohibits RAM access. After that, it goes into an infinite loop in case the power is completely cut off and the process cannot be executed.

Next, the first symbol variation process in step S204 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In FIG. 10, in step S401, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the jackpot is currently being hit. The jackpot includes during a special game displayed on the third symbol display device 42 at the time of the jackpot and during a predetermined time after the end of the special game. In the following step S402, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the variation display of the first symbol is being performed by the first symbol display device 40. Then, if the jackpot is not performed and the fluctuation display of the first symbol is not performed, the process proceeds to step S403, and the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 has the number N of operation pending balls of the first symbol display device 40 larger than "0". Determine if not. At this time, if the jackpot is in progress or the number of balls on hold for operation N is "0", this process is terminated as it is.

Further, if it is neither during the big hit nor during the fluctuation display of the first symbol and the number of balls on hold for operation N> 0, the process proceeds to step S404. In step S404, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 subtracts "1" from the number N of balls on hold. In step S405, a process of shifting the data stored in the reserved ball storage area is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the hold 1st to 4th areas of the hold ball storage area to the execution area side, and is a process of sequentially shifting the hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area →. The data in each area is shifted such as the hold 1st area, the hold 3rd area → the hold 2nd Uria, the hold 4th area → the hold 3rd area, and so on.

After that, in step S406, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 executes the fluctuation start process. Here, the fluctuation start process will be described in detail using the flowchart of FIG. 11. In step S501, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is set to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area. Whether it is a big hit or not is determined based on it. Specifically, whether or not it is a jackpot is determined based on the relationship between the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the mode at that time (whether it is a probabilistic state or a normal state), and as described above, at the time of normal low probability. Of the numerical values "0" to "599" of the jackpot random number counter C1, "150,450" is the winning value (2 pieces), and in the high probability, "50,150,350,450" is the winning value (4 pieces). be.

When the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines that the jackpot is a jackpot, in step S502, the jackpot symbol corresponding to the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area, that is, the first symbol display. It is determined whether it is one of the first symbol to the third symbol displayed on the first segment display unit 40a of the apparatus 40. That is, based on the table (not shown) showing the correspondence between the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 and the symbol, the jackpot symbol corresponding to the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 (“specific hit symbol”, “hidden specific hit symbol” or "Non-specific hit design") is requested.

Next, in step S503, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines a fluctuation pattern (big hit effect pattern) at the time of a big hit. Specifically, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 does not use the stop pattern selection counter C3, but instead uses the values of the jackpot symbol counter C2 and the values of the variable type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 503. Check in order and determine the fluctuation pattern.

That is, based on the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2, the decorative symbol in the third symbol display device 42 is displayed by the "stop pattern 3" of the normal jackpot (non-specific hit), or the third symbol display device 42. It is determined whether or not the decorative pattern is displayed by the "stop pattern 4" of the probabilistic jackpot (specific hit). The type of the "stop pattern 3" or the "stop pattern 4" thus determined is further determined based on the value of the first variable type counter CS1. That is, a rough variation pattern group of decorative symbols such as a reach type of decorative symbols (third symbol) such as normal reach, super reach, premium reach, etc. is determined. Subsequently, one variation pattern is determined based on the value of the second variation type counter CS2 from the variation pattern group of the rough decorative symbols determined in this way. For example, based on the value of the second variation type counter CS2, the elapsed time until the final stop decorative symbol (medium decorative symbol in the present embodiment) stops after the reach occurs is set to a predetermined time, and the finer decorative symbol is set. Determine the variation mode. In the case of a jackpot, the following relationships, that is, the relationship between the numerical value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 and the stop pattern, the relationship between the numerical value of the first variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern, and the numerical value of the second variation type counter CS2. The relationship with the stop symbol time is predetermined for each by a table for jackpots and the like.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S501 that it is not a big hit, in step S504, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 uses a fourth symbol to indicate an out-of-order symbol, that is, the first segment display unit 40a of the first symbol display device 40. Set to the stop symbol to display the stop.

Next, in step S505, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines a variation pattern (disengagement effect pattern) at the time of disconnection, and sets the deviation variation pattern in the variation pattern designation command. Specifically, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 confirms the values of the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 503 in that order, and determines the variation pattern. decide.

That is, based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, after the reach of the decorative symbol on the third symbol display device 42 is generated, the final stop decorative symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach decorative symbol to stop. "Stop pattern 1", which is "Stop pattern 2" which is "Reach other than front and back" where the final stop decorative symbol stops at a position other than before and after the reach decorative symbol, and "Completely off" where reach does not occur. It is determined which stop pattern is to be used, which is "stop pattern 0". For example, when the determined stop pattern is, for example, "stop pattern 1" which is the front-rear out-of-reach reach, normal reach and super reach from the front-back out-of-reach fluctuation pattern group based on the value of the first variation type counter CS1. For example, a variation pattern in which the reach type of the decorative symbol (third symbol) is specified is determined, and a rough variation pattern group of the decorative symbol is determined. Here, it is assumed that the normal reach is decided. Subsequently, one variation pattern is further determined based on the value of the second variation type counter CS2 from the normal reach variation pattern group of the rough decorative pattern determined in this way. For example, based on the value of the second variation type counter CS2, the elapsed time until the final stop decorative symbol (medium decorative symbol in the present embodiment) stops after the reach occurs is set to a predetermined time, and the finer decorative symbol is set. Determine the variation mode. In the case of deviation, the following relationships, that is, the relationship between the numerical value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the stop pattern, the relationship between the numerical value of the first variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern, and the numerical value of the second variation type counter CS2. The relationship between the stop symbol time and the stop symbol time is pre-defined by a table or the like for disengagement.

In the present embodiment, as one of the above-mentioned tables for deviation, for example, at a low probability, in the state of the fluctuation time shortening function of the first symbol display device 40, at the start of fluctuation of the first symbol. Some are adopted when the number of pending operations of the first symbol is "0", and when the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is "0 to 201", it corresponds to no reach (completely off), and " "202-208" corresponds to the front-rear reach, and "209-238" corresponds to the reach other than the front-rear reach.

Subsequently, in step S506, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines the effect time addition, that is, the determination of the addition of the effect time of the jackpot variation pattern determined in step S503 or the deviation variation pattern determined in step S505. conduct. More specifically, based on the value of the variable type counter CS3, the decorative symbol (third symbol) of the intermediate decorative symbol row on the third symbol display device 42 stops slipping, and the effect time is increased (the middle decoration). A variation pattern is determined, including the increase in the time it takes for the decorative symbol in the pattern sequence to slip and stop and appear).

Further, in step S507, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 issues a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the jackpot variation pattern determined in step S503, or a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the deviation variation pattern determined in step S505. Set.

Subsequently, in step S508, when the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 has passed through steps S502 and S503, the jackpot symbol of the first symbol display device 40 determined in step S502 (“specific hit symbol” or “non-specific hit symbol”). When the decorative symbol designation command corresponding to "specific hit symbol") is set and steps S504 and S505 have been passed, the decorative symbol designation command corresponding to the out-of-order symbol of the first symbol display device 40 determined in step S504 is used. Set.

Subsequently, in step S509, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets the effect time addition designation command corresponding to the effect time addition determined in step S506, and ends this process.

Returning to the description of FIG. 10, if step S402 is YES, that is, if the variation display of the first symbol is in progress, the process proceeds to step S407, and the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the variation time of the first symbol has elapsed. To determine. The fluctuation time of the first symbol is determined based on the fluctuation pattern and the effect time addition determined as described above using FIG. 11, that is, the fluctuation time of the first symbol is determined according to the fluctuation pattern of the first symbol. The fluctuation time of is determined, and when the fluctuation time elapses, step S407 is positively determined. If the fluctuation time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S408, and if the fluctuation time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S409.

Then, in step S408, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 updates the variation display of the first symbol on the first symbol display device 40. That is, the variable display of the first segment display unit 40a of the first symbol display device 40 is continued, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in step S409, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 stops the variation display of the first symbol, and sets the stop symbol of the first symbol to the display symbol. That is, when the jackpot symbol (probability variation jackpot) is determined in step S502 of FIG. 11, the first segment display unit 40a is first displayed after the variation display of the first segment display unit 40a of the first symbol display device 40. Stop and display with a symbol (meaning probable change jackpot (specific hit)). When the jackpot symbol (latent probability variation jackpot) is determined in step S502 of FIG. 11, the first segment display unit 40a is designated as the second symbol after the variation display of the first segment display unit 40a of the first symbol display device 40. Stops and displays with (meaning latent probability change jackpot (latent specific hit)). When the jackpot symbol (normal jackpot) is determined in step S502 of FIG. 11, after the variation display of the first segment display unit 40a of the first symbol display device 40, the first segment display unit 40a is represented by the third symbol. Stop display (usually means big hit (non-specific hit)). When the symbol is determined to be out of alignment in step S504 of FIG. 11, the first segment display unit 40a is stopped and displayed by the fourth symbol after the variation display of the first segment display unit 40a of the first symbol display device 40 (. It means off).

Subsequently, in step S410, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets a total stop command for instructing the stop of the variation pattern of the decorative symbol (third symbol) that is variablely displayed on the third symbol display device 42. After that, this process ends.

Next, the payout control executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 will be described. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the main process of the payout control device 311, and this main process is started by resetting when the power is turned on.

First, in step S901, the initial setting process accompanying the power-on is executed. Specifically, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 sets the stack address and the interrupt mode. Further, in step S902, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 permits RAM access, and in step S903, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 sets an external interrupt vector.

After that, in step S904, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 determines whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is set in the backup area of the RAM 513. Further, in step S905, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 calculates the RAM determination value, and in the following step S906, whether or not the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value saved when the power is turned off, that is, the backup is effective. Determine the sex. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of RAM 513. It is also possible to determine the effectiveness of the backup based on whether or not the keywords written in the predetermined area of the RAM 513 are correctly stored.

Subsequently, in step S907, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 performs the initial setting of the RAM 513 at the time of power recovery. Specifically, when the main control device 261 is initialized, a payout initialization command is transmitted from the main control device 261 to the payout control device 311, and the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 is the initial payout from the main control device 261. Upon receiving the conversion command, the RAM 513 is initially set at the time of power recovery in this step S907. That is, the RAM area is initialized, and the control of paying out the game ball is started.

Therefore, when the RAM erasing switch 323 is pressed (ON) when the power is turned on, the main control device 261 is initialized, and the payout initialization command is transmitted from the main control device 261 to the payout control device 311. Therefore, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 performs the initialization process of the RAM 513 based on the payout initialization command from the main control device 261.

Subsequently, in step S908, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 performs the initial setting of the peripheral device of the CPU 511. Specifically, the CPU peripheral device is a timer control device called a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit), and the CTC is set to a predetermined value to generate a timer interrupt every 2 milliseconds (ms).

Subsequently, in step S909, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 sets the interrupt permission and shifts to the payout control process described later.

On the other hand, when the power cutoff occurrence information is not set in step S904, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) in step S906, the payout control device 311 also similarly. The CPU 511 clears the entire area of the RAM 513 to "0" (step S910), and performs an initialization process (step S911).

Next, the flow of the payout control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In FIG. 16, in step S1001, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 acquires and stores a command from the main control device 261. Here, as the command to be stored, 15 types of prize ball commands (15 types of prize ball commands for instructing 1 to 15 payouts) and a payout control start to the payout control device 311 are instructed. There are 17 types of commands, including a payout return command for the purpose and a payout initialization command for instructing the payout initialization to the payout control device 311.

In step S1002, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 determines whether or not the payout permission has been received. That is, it is determined whether or not the payout return command or the prize ball command has been received. Further, in step S1003, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 checks the state return switch (not shown) and executes the state return operation when it is determined that the state return operation has started.

After that, in step S1004, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 executes the setting of the lower plate full tank state or the lower plate full tank release state according to the change in the state of the lower plate 15. That is, when the lower plate 15 is full, the lower plate 15 is determined by the detection signal of the lower plate full switch, and when the lower plate is full, the lower plate full state is set and the lower plate is not full. , Execute the setting of the lower plate full tank release state.

Further, in step S1005, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 executes the setting of the state without the tank ball or the state without the tank ball according to the change in the state of the tank ball. That is, the state without a tank ball is determined by the detection signal of the switch without a tank ball, the setting of the state without a tank ball is executed when there is no tank ball, and when the state without a tank ball disappears, the state without a tank ball is released. Perform the settings.

After that, in step S1006, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 determines whether or not there is a state of notifying, and if there is a state of notifying, the 7-segment LED provided in the payout control device 311 notifies.

In steps S1007 to S1009, the prize ball payout process is executed. In this case, if the prize balls cannot be paid out and the total number of prize balls stored in step S1001 is not "0" (both steps S1007 and S1008 are NO), the process proceeds to step S1009 and the prize ball control process ( FIG. 17), which will be described later, is started. If the prize balls cannot be paid out or the total number of prize balls is 0 (YES in any of steps S1007 and S1008), the process proceeds to the process of paying out the prize balls.

After that, in steps S1010 to S1012, the ball rental payout process is executed. In this case, if the ball lending cannot be paid out and the ball lending request from the card unit is received (NO in step S1010, YES in S1011), the process proceeds to step S1012 and the ball lending control process (described later). FIG. 18) is started. Further, if the ball lending is not payable or the ball lending request is not received (YES in step S1010 or NO in S1011), the subsequent vibe motor control (step S1013) is executed.

In step S1013, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 executes control (vibe motor control) of the vibrator 360 (see FIG. 2). After that, in step S1014, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 determines whether or not a power failure has occurred. If a power failure occurs, the process proceeds to step S1015, and if not, the process returns to step S1001. In step S1015, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 sets the power-off occurrence information, and in step S1016, the RAM determination value is created. After that, it goes into an infinite loop in case the power is completely cut off and the process cannot be executed.

Here, in the prize ball control process shown in FIG. 17, in step S1101, the payout motor 358a is driven to execute the payout of the prize ball. In the following step S1102, it is determined whether or not the rotation of the payout motor 358a is normal based on the detection result of the payout rotation sensor. If the rotation of the payout motor 358a is not normal, the process proceeds to step S1103, the payout motor 358a is driven to execute the retry process, the payout motor 358a is stopped, and then the process returns to the payout control process of FIG.

If the rotation of the payout motor 358a is normal, the process proceeds to step S1104, and whether or not the game ball is normally counted is determined by the detection result of the payout count switch. If the count of the game balls is not normal, the process proceeds to step S1105, the payout motor 358a is driven to execute the retry process, the payout motor 358a is stopped, and then the process returns to the payout control process of FIG.

Further, if the count of the game balls is normal, the process proceeds to step S1106, and it is determined whether or not the count number of the game balls by the payout count switch reaches the total number of prize balls and the payout is completed. If the payout is completed, the payout motor 358a is stopped in step S1107, and then the process returns to the payout control process of FIG.

Further, in the ball lending control process shown in FIG. 18, in step S1201, the payout motor 358a is driven to execute the payout of the lending ball. In the following step S1202, whether or not the rotation of the payout motor 358a is normal is determined based on the detection result of the payout rotation sensor. If the rotation of the payout motor 358a is not normal, the process proceeds to step S1203, the payout motor 358a is driven to execute the retry process, the payout motor 358a is stopped, and then the process returns to the payout control process of FIG.

If the rotation of the payout motor 358a is normal, the process proceeds to step S1204, and whether or not the game ball is normally counted is determined by the detection result of the payout count switch. If the count of the game balls is not normal, the process proceeds to step S1205, the payout motor 358a is driven to execute the retry process, the payout motor 358a is stopped, and then the process returns to the payout control process of FIG.

Further, if the count of the game balls is normal, the process proceeds to step S1206, and it is determined whether or not the count number of the game balls by the payout count switch reaches a predetermined number of rented balls (25 pieces) and the payout is completed. If the payout is completed, the payout motor 358a is stopped in step S1207, and then the process returns to the payout control process of FIG.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout control device 311, and the state of the payout control device 311 when the power is turned off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like is stored in the backup area of the RAM 513 due to the NMI interrupt. Similarly, power is supplied from the power supply unit 541 so that the processing of the payout control device 311 can be executed for a predetermined time after the power failure signal S1 is output. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal S1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311, and the CPU 511 interrupts the control during execution. The NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 14 is started. The contents are as described with reference to FIG.

Next, the main process and the normal process of the sub control device 262 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 and 20. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing an example of the main process executed by the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262, and this main process is started by resetting at the time of turning on the power. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing an example of a normal process executed by the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262.

First, in step S1301, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 executes the initial setting process accompanying the power-on. Specifically, port setting (port I / O switching and initial value output), timer setting (1 millisecond interval timer, liquid crystal command strobe output timer), and interrupt setting (subcommand strobe interrupt) are performed. ..

Further, in step S1302, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the power cutoff process is incomplete. Specifically, whether or not the various lamps (annular illumination unit 102, central illumination unit 103, etc.) of the front frame set 14 of the pachinko machine 10 are all turned off and the speaker is in a mute state. Determine. Then, if the power cutoff process is not completed, the process proceeds to step S1304, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1303.

Subsequently, in step S1303, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the RAM of the sub control device 262 is destroyed, and if it is destroyed, the process proceeds to step S1304, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1307. .. In step S1304, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs a RAM area read / write check of the sub control device 262. Then, in step S1305, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the RAM of the sub control device 262 is normal. If the RAM of the sub control device 262 is normal, the process proceeds to step S1306, and if it is abnormal, the process proceeds to step S1312. In step S1306, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 writes the RAM destruction check data for each area of the RAM 553, and sets the RAM destruction check data for determining that the data is destroyed if there is a read abnormality.

Then, in step S1307, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the power is turned on after the power is turned off. If the power is turned on after the power is turned off, the process proceeds to step S1308, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1309.

In step S1308, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 clears the RAM area other than the unprocessed RAM area. Specifically, the unprocessed RAM area is an area for storing information that causes a problem in the system when the data is cleared, and is an area of information that is desired to be retained except when the RAM area is destroyed. For example, a subcommand reception buffer, power-on information, and the like can be mentioned. When the power of the main control device 261 is turned off and the sub control device 262 is reset (when the power cutoff notification command is received from the main control device 261), the RAM area other than the unprocessed RAM area is cleared.

In step S1309, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the interrupt permission. In step S1310, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the initial value of the RAM of the sub control device 262. In step S1311, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the effect initialization flag to "1" and shifts to the normal process shown in FIG.

In step S1312, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 notifies the RAM abnormality and enters an infinite loop. For example, notification such as turning on a predetermined lamp unconditionally can be mentioned.

As shown in FIG. 20, in step S1401, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed from the start of normal processing. If 1 ms or more has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S1402, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1410.

In step S1402, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs the lamp output process. Specifically, the lamp output is performed according to the variation pattern effect of the decorative symbol (third symbol) on the third symbol display device 42.

In step S1403, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 gives a power-on notification. Specifically, a power-on command is used to notify for 30 seconds.

In step S1404, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs a customer waiting effect. Specifically, the title / still image is switched. That is, a so-called demo screen is displayed.

In step S1405, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs the hold quantity display update process of the first symbol change. Specifically, this hold quantity display update process is a process for displaying the hold lamp 40c of the first symbol display device 40 on the third symbol display device 42 as well.

In step S1406, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs frame button input monitoring / effect processing. Specifically, this frame button input monitoring / effect processing is a pachinko machine provided with a frame button that can be pressed by the player (for example, the upper selection button 71, the lower selection button 72, the effect button 80, etc. shown in FIG. 2). This is for producing a machine-specific effect by pressing the frame button on the machine. Therefore, this process is not necessary for pachinko machines that do not have such a frame button.

In step S1407, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs the lamp editing process. Specifically, the process of editing the lamp lighting pattern corresponding to (synchronized with) the variation pattern effect of the decorative symbol on the third symbol display device 42 is performed.

In step S1408, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs sound editing / output processing. Specifically, a process of sounding (synchronizing) a sound corresponding to (synchronizing) the variation pattern production of the decorative symbol on the third symbol display device 42 (outputting voice, music, sound effect, etc.) is performed.

In step S1409, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs the effect execution management process. Specifically, time management or the like for synchronizing the lamp, the sound, and the liquid crystal display (the variation pattern effect of the decorative symbol on the third symbol display device 42) is performed.

In step S1410, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs a process of updating the value of a random number for determining the variation pattern of the decorative symbol to be performed by the third symbol display device 42 and the effect of the voice lamp. Specifically, this random number takes a value of, for example, "0" to "32767", and returns to "0" when the upper limit value "37268" is reached.

In step S1411, when the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 receives a command from the main control device 261, the CPU 551 performs a process corresponding to each command.

Specifically, when the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 receives the fluctuation pattern designation command from the main control device 261, the CPU 551 transmits a display command obtained by converting the fluctuation pattern designation command into a command to the display control device 45. The fluctuation pattern specification command may be output as it is. Further, when the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 receives the decorative symbol designation command from the main control device 261, the CPU 551 transmits a stop display command obtained by converting the decorative symbol designation command into a command to the display control device 45. Further, when a notice command is generated in addition to the stop display command in the command conversion of the decorative symbol designation command, the notice command is also transmitted to the display control device 45. As this notice command, for example, the presence or absence of the appearance of a school of fish as a notice can be mentioned. Further, when the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 receives the total stop command (confirmation command) from the main control device 261, the CPU 551 transmits the total stop command to the display control device 45 as it is.

In step S1412, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs a command output process for outputting a command to the display control device 45 or the like. The CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 transmits various commands such as the above-mentioned display command and stop display command to the display control device 45.

In step S1413, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the RAM of the sub control device 262 is destroyed. If the RAM is not destroyed, the process returns to step S1401, and if the RAM is destroyed, an infinite loop is entered.

Here, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing of step S1406 shown in FIG. 20 by the sub control device 262 will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 22. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a frame button input monitoring / effect processing by the sub control device 262. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the effect button input monitoring / effect processing by the sub control device 262.

As shown in FIG. 21, the sub control device 262 performs the frame button input monitoring process. Specifically, first, in step S1501, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs selection button input monitoring / effect processing.

In step S1502, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs the effect button input monitoring / effect process and ends this process.

<Direction button input monitoring / effect processing>
Here, the effect button input monitoring / effect process will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 22, in step S1700, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 monitors the input of the effect button 80 shown in FIG.

In step S1701, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the fluctuation pattern has a specific sound effect. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the game round is a game round including the first reach variation pattern after the 30 × n (n = integer) game round. The reach fluctuation pattern may be various reach fluctuation patterns such as normal reach and super reach. This is to secure the time for performing the specific sound effect in the game times in which the specific sound effect is performed. If the game number includes the first reach variation pattern after the 30 × n game number, the process proceeds to step S1702, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1713, which will be described later.

In step S1702, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not it is the specific sound effect start timing in the specific sound effect period. The specific sound effect start timing is determined in the reach variation pattern, such as after a predetermined second after the reach is established. If it is the specific sound production start timing, the process proceeds to step S1703, otherwise the process proceeds to step S1708 described later.

In step S1703, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the specific sound effect start flag to "1" and proceeds to step S1704. In step S1704, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 starts counting the counter for the specific sound effect period. The specific sound effect period is determined as a predetermined second during the reach fluctuation.

In step S1705, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the effect button 80 has been detected. If the effect button 80 is detected, the process proceeds to step S1707, otherwise the process ends. In step S1705, a positive judgment is made only when the effect button 80 is normally detected. For example, when the effect button 80 is repeatedly hit, it is determined that only the first pressing detection is valid, and the subsequent pressing detection is invalid.

In step S1707, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the effect button detection flag to "1" and proceeds to step S1708. In step S1708, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 acquires the time information (hereinafter, button detection time information) of the counter for the specific sound effect period at the time when the effective pressing of the effect button 80 is detected.

In step S1709, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not it is the end timing of the specific sound effect. The specific sound effect end timing corresponds to the end time of the specific sound effect period. If it is the end timing of the specific sound effect, the process proceeds to step S1710, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1712, which will be described later.

In step S1710, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the specific sound effect start flag to “0” and proceeds to step S1711. In step S1711, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 ends the counting of the counter for the specific sound effect period.

In step S1712, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the specific sound effect start flag is already "0" without waiting for the specific sound effect end timing. If the specific sound effect start flag is "0", the process proceeds to step S1711 described above, otherwise the process ends.

In step S1713, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 proceeds to step S1714 if the game number at the time when the operation of the effect button 80 is detected is the 300 × nth time (n: integer), and if not, this process. To finish.

In step S1714, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the one-shot notification sound determination flag indicating that the timing for determining the pitch of the one-shot notification sound has arrived to "1", and ends this process. The process of determining the one notification sound will be described later.

Next, the effect execution management process of step S1409 shown in FIG. 20 by the sub control device 262 will be described with reference to FIGS. 23 to 28. Further, FIG. 5 is also referred to for a description of the flag used in the specific sound effect and the like.

FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the effect execution management process by the sub control device 262. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the effect button validity determination period setting process by the sub control device 262. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a specific sound output process by the sub control device 262. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an open / close mode (big hit) display setting process by the sub control device 262. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing a variation display mode setting process by the sub control device 262. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a one-shot notification sound determination process by the sub control device 262.

<Specific sound listening judgment processing>
As shown in FIG. 23, in step S1901, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs the effect button validity determination period setting process. The effect button validity determination period setting process will be described below with reference to FIG. 24.

As shown in FIG. 24, in step S2001, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the effect button detection flag described above is “1” in step S1707. If the effect button detection flag is "1", the process proceeds to step S2002, otherwise the process ends.

In step S2002, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the button detection time information acquired in step S1708 is within the first specific sound validity determination period described below. The first specific sound validity determination period is a period for detecting that the player operates the effect button 80 by listening to the first specific sound during the output of the first specific sound, and the first specific sound output. It is a period for validating the operation of the effect button 80 set in advance according to the period. The same applies to the second and third specific sound validity determination periods described later. If the button detection time information is within the first specific sound validity determination period, the process proceeds to step S2003, otherwise the process proceeds to step S2004.

In step S2003, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the first specific sound listening flag described below from "0" to "1", and sets the first specific sound listening count counter described below to "1". Add and proceed to step S2008. The first specific sound listening flag is provided in the RAM 553 of the sub control device 262, and the audible frequency band that the player can hear based on the operation of the effect button 80 during the first specific sound validity determination period is set. It is a flag to grasp that it is 19 kHz. The first specific sound listening count counter is provided in the RAM 553 of the sub control device 262 and is a counter that counts the number of times the player has listened to the first specific sound. The same applies to the second and third specific sound listening count counters, which will be described later.

At this time, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the first specific sound listening display flag indicating that the player was able to hear the first specific sound to "1", and sets the first specific sound listening display. Set the command. The first specific sound listening display flag is provided in the RAM 553 of the sub control device 262. The first specific sound listening display command is transmitted to the display control device 45. The second and third specific sound listening display flags are also processed in the same manner.

In step S2004, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the button detection time information is within the second specific sound validity determination period. If it is within the second specific sound validity determination period, the process proceeds to step S2005, and if not, the process proceeds to step S2006. In step S2005, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the second specific sound listening flag described below from "0" to "1", and adds the second specific sound listening count counter by "1" to the step. Proceed to S2008. The second specific sound listening flag is a flag for grasping that the audible frequency band that the player could hear is 17 kHz based on the operation of the effect button 80 during the second specific sound valid determination period. .. Further, the second specific sound listening display flag is set to "1".

In step S2006, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the button detection time information is within the third specific sound validity determination period. If it is the third specific sound validity determination period, the process proceeds to step S2007. In step S2007, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the third specific sound listening flag described below from "0" to "1", and adds the third specific sound listening count counter by "1" to the step. Proceed to S2008. Further, the third specific sound listening display flag is set to "1".

If the rejection is determined in step S2006, the button detection time information is not any of the first to third specific sound validity determination periods, so the process proceeds to step S2009 described later. As described above, when the press of the effect button 80 is detected outside the first to third specific sound validity determination periods in the specific sound effect period, the detection of the press is treated as invalid. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the inaccurate age group of the player is grasped based on the fact that the effect button 80 is operated without hitting within the specific sound effect period.

The specific sound effect of this embodiment ends when the player listens to any of the first to third specific sounds and presses the effect button 80. Therefore, in step S2008, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 and the specific sound effect start flag are returned to "0", and the process proceeds to step S2009. In step S2009, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 returns the effect button detection flag to "0" and ends this process.

The first to third specific sound listening flags in the RAM 553 of the sub-control device 262 described above correspond to the grasping means of the present invention. Further, the first to third specific sound listening display flags in the RAM 553 of the sub control device 262 correspond to the specific information display control means of the present invention.

<Selection button validity judgment period setting process>
Returning to the effect execution process shown in FIG. 23, in step S1902, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs the selection button validity determination period setting process. The selection button validity determination period setting process sets a period during which the operation detection of the selection buttons 71 to 74 is valid.

<Specific sound output period setting process>
In step S1903, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs a specific sound output period setting process. This specific sound output process will be described below with reference to FIG. 25.

As shown in FIG. 25, in step S2100, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the specific sound effect start flag is “1”. If the specific sound effect start flag is "1", the process proceeds to step S2101 to start the specific sound effect, otherwise the process ends.

In step S2101, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 issues a specific sound effect display start command for controlling the display control device 45 to display the display necessary for starting the specific sound effect on the third symbol display device 42. set.

In step S2102, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the first specific sound output timing has arrived. If it is the first specific sound output timing, the process proceeds to step S2103, and if not, the process proceeds to step S2110.

In step S2103, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the first specific sound output flag described below to "1" and sets the first specific sound output start command. The first specific sound output flag is provided in the RAM 553 of the sub control device 262, and every time the 30 × nth game round arrives, only some players listen to it within the specific sound production period of a predetermined length. This is a flag output by the first specific sound having a possible frequency band of 19 kHz. The first specific sound output end command is transmitted to the voice output control device 47.

In step S2104, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 adds or subtracts a timer for counting the first specific sound output period provided in the RAM 553, counts the first specific sound output period, and proceeds to step S2105.

In step S2105, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the value of the timer has become 0. If the value of the timer is not 0, the process proceeds to step S2106, and if the value of the timer becomes 0, the process proceeds to step S2109.

In step S2106, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the first specific sound listening flag described above in step S2003 is "1". If the first specific sound listening flag is "1", the process proceeds to step S2109, and if not (if "0"), this process ends.

In step S2109, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 is based on the fact that the value of the timer for counting the first specific sound output period becomes 0 or the specific sound effect start flag is set to "0". Set the first specific sound output flag to "0" and set the first specific sound output end command. The first specific sound output end command is transmitted to the voice output control device 47. This ends this process.

In step S2110, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not it is the second specific sound output timing. If it is the second specific sound output timing, the process proceeds to step S2111, and if not, the process proceeds to step S2119.

In step S2111, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the first specific sound listening flag is "1". If the first specific sound listening flag is "1", this process ends. If the first specific sound listening flag is not "1", the process proceeds to step S2112. In step S2112, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the second specific sound output flag to "1", sets the second specific sound output start command, and proceeds to step S2113. The second specific sound output start command is output to the voice output control device 47.

In step S2113, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 adds or subtracts a timer for the second specific sound output period provided in the RAM 553, and counts the second specific sound output period. In step S2114, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the value of the timer is 0. If the value of the timer is not 0, the process proceeds to step S2115. If the value of the timer is 0, the process proceeds to step S2118.

In step S2115, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the second specific sound listening flag described above in step S2004 is "1". If the second specific sound listening flag is "1", the process proceeds to step S2118, otherwise (if "0"), this process ends.

In step S2118, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 is based on the fact that the value of the timer for counting the second specific sound output period becomes 0 or the specific sound effect start flag is set to "0". Set the second specific sound output flag to "0" and set the second specific sound output end command. The second specific sound output end command is transmitted to the voice output control device 47. This ends this process.

In step S2119, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not it is the third specific sound output timing. If it is the third specific sound output timing, the process proceeds to step S2120. If it is not the third specific sound output timing, this process ends.

In step S2120, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the second specific sound listening flag is set to "1". If the second specific sound listening flag is "1", this process ends. If the second specific sound listening flag is not "1", the process proceeds to step S2121.

In step S2121, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the third specific sound output flag to "1", sets the third specific sound output command, and proceeds to step S2122. The third specific sound output command is output to the voice output control device 47.

In step S2122, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 adds or subtracts a timer for a third specific sound output period provided in the RAM 553, and counts the third specific sound output period. In step S2123, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the value of the timer has become 0. If the value of the timer is not 0, the process proceeds to step S2124. When the value of the timer becomes 0, the process proceeds to step S2127.

In step S2124, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the third specific sound listening flag described above in step S2006 is "1". If the third specific sound listening flag is "1", the process proceeds to step S2127, otherwise (if "0"), the present process is terminated.

In step S2127, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the third specific sound output flag to "0" and ends the third specific sound output based on the fact that the specific sound effect start flag is set to "0". Set the command. The third specific sound output end command is transmitted to the voice output control device 47. This ends all of this processing.

The above-mentioned first specific sound corresponds to the high frequency band specific sound of the present invention, and the second specific sound and the third specific sound correspond to the low frequency band specific sound of the present invention. The first to third specific sound output flags provided in the RAM 553 of the sub control device 262 described above correspond to the specific sound output control means of the present invention.

<Open / close mode (big hit) display setting process>
Returning to the effect execution process shown in FIG. 23, in step S1904, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs the open / close mode (big hit) display setting process. This open / close mode (big hit) display setting process will be described below with reference to FIG. 26.

As shown in FIG. 26, in step S2201, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 proceeds to step S2202 if the opening command is received, and proceeds to step S2203 otherwise.

In step S2202, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets a display opening command.

In step S2203, if the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 has received the ending command, the process proceeds to step S2204, and if not, the process ends.

In step S2204, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the display ending command and ends this process.

<Variable display mode setting process>
Returning to the effect execution process shown in FIG. 23, in step S1905, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs the variation display mode setting process. This variation display mode setting process will be described below with reference to FIG. 27.

As shown in FIG. 27, in step S2301, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 proceeds to step S2302 if it has received the variation pattern designation command, and proceeds to step S2308 if it has not received it.

In step S2302, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the variation pattern designation command is a big hit. If it is a big hit, the process proceeds to step S2303, and if it is not a big hit, the process proceeds to step S2307.

In step S2303, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs a one-shot notification lottery. The one-shot notification lottery is a lottery for whether or not to output a specific sound for notifying the variable display result before the variable display result is displayed when the variable display result is a big hit. ..

In step S2304, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the result of the one-shot notification lottery is to perform the one-shot notification effect. If the one-shot notification effect is performed, the process proceeds to step S2305, and if the one-shot notification effect is not performed, the process proceeds to step S2307.

In step S2305, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the one-shot notification effect flag to "1". In step S2306, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets a display command for the symbol sequence variation including the one-shot notification effect, and ends this process.

In step S2307, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets a display command for the symbol sequence variation that does not include the one-shot notification effect, and ends this process.

In step S2308, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 proceeds to step S2309 if it has received the decorative symbol designation command, and ends this process if it has not received it.

In step S2309, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets a stop display command according to the designated stop symbol, and ends this process.

<One-shot notification sound determination process>
Returning to the effect execution process shown in FIG. 23, in step S1906, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs the one-shot notification sound determination process. This one notification sound determination process will be described below with reference to FIG. 28.

As shown in FIG. 28, in step S2401, whether or not the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 has a one-shot notification sound determination flag of "1" (whether or not it is a game round of the 300 × nth (n: integer)). ) Is determined. In this embodiment, one notification sound determination process is performed every time the 300 × nth game round arrives from the power-on of the pachinko machine 10. If it is the 300 × nth game, the process proceeds to step S2402, otherwise the process ends.

In step S2402, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 reads the one notification sound determination table from the ROM 552. In steps S2403, S2406, and S2408, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines the pitch of the one-shot notification sound with reference to the one-shot notification sound determination table.

Here, with reference to FIG. 29, a one-shot notification sound determination table stored in ROM 552 of the sub-control device 262 will be described. 29 (a) and 29 (b) are diagrams showing a one-shot notification sound determination table stored in the sub control device 262.

The one-shot notification sound determination table is stored in ROM 552 of the sub-control device 262, and when the audible frequency band is grasped a predetermined number of times, the mode of the audible frequency band grasped a predetermined number of times is set to the highest value. Based on this, the height of the upper limit of one notification sound estimated to be audible by the player is determined, and the type of one notification sound is determined based on the height of the determined upper limit of one notification sound.

The RAM 553 of the sub-control device 262 stores the grasped audible frequency band in a predetermined storage area. In determining the one-shot notification sound, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 reads out the one-shot notification sound determination table stored in the ROM 552 and reads out the audible frequency band stored in the RAM 553 so far.

The pitch of the first notification sound includes the first notification sound having the same frequency band of 19 kHz as the first specific sound, and the second first notification sound having the same frequency band of 17 kHz as the second specific sound. There is a third first notification sound having the same frequency band of 15 kHz as the third specific sound. As shown in FIG. 29 (a), the height of the upper limit of the one-shot notification sound is the number of times of listening to the specific sound that could be heard most among the first to third specific sound listening times (hereinafter, the most). It is determined based on the first condition determined based on the number of listening times) and the second condition determined based on the individual first to third specific sound listening times, and is determined according to the height of the upper limit of one notification sound. The type of notification sound is determined.

First, the case where the first condition is that the maximum number of listening times is 9 or 10 times will be described. That is, when the second condition is that the number of times the first specific sound is heard is 9 or 10 times, the height of the upper limit of the one-shot notification sound is determined to be the first first notification sound (19 kHz). In this case, the output one notification sound is determined by the probability that the first notification sound is 100%. This is because it is presumed that the player who has heard the first specific sound most frequently is likely to hear the first notification sound having the same pitch as the first specific sound.

Further, when the second condition is that the number of times the second specific sound is heard is 9 or 10 times, the height of the upper limit of the one-shot notification sound is determined to be the second first notification sound (17 kHz). When the upper limit is determined to be the second first notification sound in the second condition described above, the output one notification sound is determined with a probability of 100% of the second first notification sound.

When the second condition is that the number of times the third specific sound is heard is 9 or 10 times, the height of the upper limit of the one-shot notification sound is determined to be the third first notification sound (15 kHz). When the upper limit is determined to be the third first notification sound in the second condition described above, the output one notification sound is determined with a probability of 100% of the third first notification sound.

Next, the case where the first condition is that the maximum number of listening times is 6 to 8 times will be described. That is, when the second condition is that the number of times the first specific sound is heard is 6 to 8 times, the height of the upper limit of the one-shot notification sound is determined to be the first first notification sound (19 kHz). In this case, the output one notification sound is determined with a probability of 70% for the first notification sound, 20% for the second notification sound, and 10% for the third notification sound. This is because the player who can hear the first specific sound can hear any of the first to third first notification sounds.

Further, when the second condition is that the number of times the second specific sound is heard is 6 to 8 times, the height of the upper limit of the one-shot notification sound is determined to be the second first notification sound (17 kHz). In this case, the output one notification sound is determined with a probability of 70% for the second notification sound and 30% for the third notification sound. When the second condition is that the number of times the third specific sound is heard is 6 to 8 times, the height of the upper limit of the one-shot notification sound is determined to be the third first notification sound (15 kHz). In this case, the output one notification sound is determined by the probability of the third first notification sound with a probability of 100%.

Next, the case where the first condition is the maximum number of listening times is 5 will be described. That is, when the second condition is that the number of times the first specific sound is heard is 5 times (others are 4 times or less), the height of the upper limit of the one-shot notification sound is determined to be the first first notification sound (19 kHz). .. In this case, the output one notification sound is determined with a probability of 50% for the first notification sound, 30% for the second notification sound, and 20% for the third notification sound. This is because it is presumed that it is more difficult to hear the first notification sound than the player who has listened to the first specific sound 6 to 8 times.

Further, when the second condition is that the number of times of listening to the second specific sound is 5 times (others are 4 times or less), the height of the upper limit of the one-shot notification sound is determined to be the second first notification sound (17 kHz). .. In this case, the output one notification sound is determined by the probability of each of the second and third first notification sounds with a probability of 50%. When the second condition is that the number of times the third specific sound is heard is five, the height of the upper limit of the one-shot notification sound is determined to be the third first notification sound (15 kHz). In this case, the output one notification sound is determined by the probability of the third first notification sound with a probability of 100%.

Next, when the first condition is that the maximum number of listenings is 4 or less, the height of the upper limit of one notification sound is determined to be 100% probability with the third first notification sound (15 kHz). This is because it is presumed that such a player is not very interested in the specific sound production.

In addition to the one-shot notification sound, the type of production other than the one-shot notification sound may be determined. For example, the type of music used in the game after the end of the jackpot round generated in the variable display including the one notification sound may be determined, or used during the jackpot round generated in the variable display including the one notification sound. The type of music to be played may be determined. In the following, with reference to FIG. 29 (b), an example of determining the type of music to be used after the end of the jackpot round will be described according to how the one notification sound is determined.

That is, the first notification sound (one notification sound two times before) is determined based on the games from 1 to (300 x 1 time), and the first notification sound is determined based on the games from 301 to (300 x 2 times). When the notification sound (previous one notification sound) is determined and the first notification sound (current one notification sound) is determined based on the games from 601 to (300 x 3 times), that is, the first 1 When the one-shot notification sound is determined three times in a row, the song used after the jackpot round is determined to be the "latest hit song". This is because the fact that the first notification sound is determined three times in a row means that there is a high possibility that players up to their early twenties who can easily hear the first notification sound are playing the game. be.

Similarly, when the second first notification sound is determined three times in a row, the song used after the end of this jackpot round is determined to be a "slightly previous hit song". This means that the second notification sound is determined three times in a row, which means that it is possible that players in their late twenties to thirties who can easily hear the second notification sound are playing the game. Because it is expensive.

Similarly, when the third first notification sound is determined three times in a row, the song used after the end of this jackpot round is determined to be an "old hit song". This is because the fact that the third first notification sound is determined three times in a row means that there is a high possibility that a player in his forties or older who can hear the third first notification sound is playing the game. Is.

Next, after the song to be used after the jackpot round is determined to be the "latest hit song" based on the games of 1 to 900 times, the second shot is based on the games of 901 to (300 x 4 times). The notification sound is determined, the second notification sound is determined based on the games from 1201 to (300 x 5 times), and the second notification sound is determined based on the games from 1501 to (300 x 6 times). That is, if the first notification sound is determined three times in a row and then the second notification sound is determined three times in a row, the song used after the jackpot round is "a little". "Previous hit song" is decided. This is because the player in his early twenties who was playing the game when the previous "latest hit song" was decided finished the game, and the player in his late twenties to thirties newly played the game. This is because there is a high possibility that they will be there.

Similarly, if the first notification sound is determined three times in a row and then the third notification sound is determined three times in a row, the song used after the jackpot round is "old hit". It is decided to be a song. This is a possibility that a player in his early twenties who was playing a game when the previous "latest hit song" was decided has finished the game, and a new player in his forties or later is playing a game. Is high.

In addition, if the first notification sound is determined three times in a row and then determined as the first notification sound, the second notification sound, and the third notification sound, after the jackpot round is completed. The song used in is determined to be an "all-time hit song". An "all-time hit song" is a hit song that includes a "recent hit song", a "slightly previous hit song", and an "old hit song", respectively. It cannot be determined whether the reason why the pitch of the determined one-shot notification sound is irregular is that the player has changed or the player is no longer interested in the specific sound production. Because.

Further, the "all-time hit song" may be determined when the pitch of the one-shot notification sound determined based on 1 to 900 games is irregular. In addition, after the "all-time hit song" is determined, the pitch of the one-shot notification sound determined based on the next 901 to 1800 games is the same height (for example, the first first notification sound). In the case of consecutive times, the "recent hit song" may be determined. It was not possible to determine what kind of player was playing the game in the 1st to 900th games, but it was possible to determine that the player in his early twenties was playing the game in the 901 to 1800 games. be.

In addition, along with "recent hit songs", "slightly previous hit songs", and "old hit songs", the image of the singer may be displayed on the third symbol display device 42 as a changing background, or in the era of songs. The combined image and video may be displayed on the third symbol display device 42 as a changing background. Further, when it is determined that the player has changed, an image based on the change of the player may be displayed on the third symbol display device 42. For example, if the "recent hit song" changes to a "slightly earlier hit song", an image such as "time slip in the XX generation" is displayed when the normal game starts after the jackpot round ends. It may be the device 42.

The one-shot notification sound determination table stored in the ROM 552 of the sub-control device 262 described above corresponds to the specific notification sound determination means of the invention according to (A7).

Return to FIG. 28. In step S2403, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the condition that the upper limit of the one notification sound is the first notification sound is satisfied. If the condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S2404, and if the condition is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S2405.

In step S2404, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the flag of any of the first to third first notification sounds to "1" and sets the corresponding first to third first notification sound output start commands. Set either. The first to third first notification sound flags are provided in the RAM 553 of the sub control device 262, and when the fluctuation display result is a big hit result, the high audible frequency band grasped by the first specific sound listening flag. It is a flag to output the first to third notification sounds of a height (19 kHz to 15 kHz) that can be heard by a player having this audible frequency band according to (19 kHz). The first to third notification sound output start commands are output to the voice output control device 47.

In step S2405, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the condition that the upper limit of the one notification sound is the second first notification sound is satisfied. If the condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S2406, and if the condition is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S2407.

In step S2406, one of the flags of the second and third notification sounds is set to "1", and one of the corresponding second and third notification sound output start commands is set. The second and third first notification sound output start commands are output to the voice output control device 47. The second and third first notification sound flags are set in this audible frequency band according to the height (17 kHz) of the audible frequency band grasped by the second specific sound listening flag when the variable display result is a jackpot result. It is a flag to output the second and third first notification sounds at a height (17 kHz to 15 kHz) that can be heard by a player having a frequency.

In step S2407, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the condition that the upper limit of the one notification sound is the third first notification sound is satisfied. If the condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S2408, and if the condition is not satisfied, the present process is terminated.

In step S2408, the third first notification sound flag is set to "1" and the third first notification sound output start command is set. The third first notification sound output start command is output to the voice output control device 47. The third first notification sound flag is a third height (15 kHz) corresponding to the height (15 kHz) of the audible frequency band grasped by the third specific sound listening flag when the variable display result is a jackpot result. It is a flag that outputs a one-shot notification sound.

The above-mentioned first to third notification sounds correspond to the specific notification sounds of the invention according to (A6), and the first to third notification sounds flags provided in the RAM 553 of the above-mentioned sub control device 262. Corresponds to the specific sound notification means of the invention according to (A6).

Returning to the effect execution process shown in FIG. 23, in step S1907, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs the one-shot notification effect process. This one notification effect processing will be described below with reference to FIG. 30. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a one-shot notification effect process by the sub control device 262.

In step S2501, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the one notification flag is "1". If the one-announcement flag is "1", the process proceeds to step S2502 in order to perform the one-announcement effect, and if not, this process ends.

In step S2502, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the first notification sound flag is "1". If the first notification sound flag is "1", the process proceeds to step S2503, otherwise the process proceeds to step S2505.

In step S2503, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the predetermined one notification timing has been reached. If it is the timing of one notification, the process proceeds to step S2504, and if not, the present process is terminated.

In step S2504, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the first first notification sound output start command, and proceeds to step S2505. The first notification sound output start command is output to the voice output control device 47.

In step S2505, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 adds or subtracts a timer provided in the RAM 553, counts the one notification sound output period, and proceeds to step S2506. In step S2506, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the value of the timer has become 0. If the value of the timer becomes 0, the process proceeds to step S2507, otherwise the process ends.

In step S2507, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the first notification sound output flag to "0", sets the first notification sound output end command, and ends this process. The first notification sound output end command is output to the voice output control device 47.

In step S2508, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the second first notification sound flag is "1". If the second notification sound flag is "1", the process proceeds to step S2509. If not, the process proceeds to step S2514.

In step S2509, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the predetermined one notification timing has been reached. The timing of this one notification is the same as the timing of step S2503 described above. If it is one notification timing, the process proceeds to step S2510, and if not, this process ends.

In step S2510, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the second first notification sound output start command, and proceeds to step S2511. The second first notification sound output start command is output to the voice output control device 47.

In step S2511, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 adds or subtracts a timer provided in the RAM 553, counts the one notification sound output period, and proceeds to step S2512. In step S2512, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the value of the timer has become 0. If the value of the timer becomes 0, the process proceeds to step S2513, otherwise the process ends.

In step S2513, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the second first notification sound output flag to "0", sets the second first notification sound output end command, and ends this process. The second first notification sound output end command is output to the voice output control device 47.

In step S2514, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the third first notification sound flag is “1”. If the third notification sound flag is "1", the process proceeds to step S2515, otherwise the process ends.

In step S2515, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the predetermined one notification timing has been reached. The timing of this one notification is the same as the timing of step S2503 described above. If it is one notification timing, the process proceeds to step S2516, and if not, this process ends.

In step S2516, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the third first notification sound output start command, and proceeds to step S2517. The second first notification sound output start command is output to the voice output control device 47.

In step S2517, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 adds or subtracts the timer provided in the RAM 553, counts the one notification sound output period, and proceeds to step S2518. In step S2518, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the value of the timer has become 0. If the value of the timer becomes 0, the process proceeds to step S2519, otherwise the process ends.

In step S2519, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the second first notification sound output flag to "0", sets the second first notification sound output end command, and ends this process. The second first notification sound output end command is output to the voice output control device 47.

Next, the normal processing of the display control device 45 will be described with reference to FIG. 31. FIG. 31 (a) is a flowchart showing normal processing of the display control device, and FIG. 31 (b) is a flowchart showing switching processing of a display mode or the like by the display control device.

As shown in FIG. 31A, in step S3001, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 performs command input processing for input processing various commands transmitted from the sub control device 262, and proceeds to step S3002. Examples of these various commands include a display command, a stop display command, a display opening command, a display ending command, a demo start command, a symbol column fluctuation start command, and the like.

In step S3002, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 performs a display mode switching process (display of symbol sequence variation, jackpot opening, jackpot ending, etc.), and proceeds to step S3003. Here, the switching process of the display mode and the like will be described with reference to FIG. 31 (b).

As shown in FIG. 31B, in step S3101, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the specific sound effect start command has been received. If the specific sound effect start command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3102, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3103.

In step S3102, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 starts the specific sound effect display. Specifically, the display control device 45 controls the display of the third symbol display device 42 so as to display the information necessary for the specific sound effect. The information required for the specific sound production will be described later.

In step S3103, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not any of the first specific sound effect effect command, the second specific sound listening display command, and the third specific sound listening display command is received. In step S3104, if the display control device 42 receives the first to third specific sound listening display commands, the display control device 42 displays different results according to the height of the frequency band of the specific sound that the player could hear. I do. The different result display will be described later.

In step S3105, if the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 has received the symbol sequence variation start command, the process proceeds to step S3106, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3107.

In step S3106, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 starts the symbol sequence variation. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6, the display control device 45 starts to change the main decorative symbol SZ and the sub-decorative symbol FZ of the three decorative symbol rows L, M, and R.

In step S3109, if the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 has received the display opening command, the process proceeds to step S3110, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3111. In step S3110, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 controls the display of the third symbol display device 42 so as to start the display of the jackpot opening.

In step S3111, if the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 has received the display ending command, the process proceeds to step S3112, and if not, the process ends. In step S3112, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 controls the display of the third symbol display device 42 so as to start the display of the jackpot ending.

Returning to FIG. 31A, in step S3003, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines the stop symbol and proceeds to step S3004.

In step S3004, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines the variation display mode, and proceeds to step S3005.

In step S3005, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines the auxiliary effect (message to be provided and displayed to the player, etc.), and proceeds to step S3006.

In step S3006, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 controls the display image of the third symbol display device 42.

For example, in the symbol sequence variation, as shown in FIG. 6, the display control device 45 finally stops the symbol variation display of the main decorative symbol SZ and the sub-decorative symbol SZ in each decorative symbol sequence L, M, R. The display control of the third symbol display device 42 is performed so as to perform variable display to be displayed.

In step S3007, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 performs other processing (demo, hold display, etc.).

In step S3008, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed from the start of normal processing. If 1 ms or more has elapsed, the process returns to step S3001, and if not, the process returns to step S3008.

Next, the normal voice output processing and the specific sound / one notification sound output processing will be described with reference to FIG. 32. FIG. 32 (a) is a flowchart showing a normal voice output process, and FIG. 32 (b) is a flowchart showing a specific sound / one notification sound output process.

As shown in FIG. 32 (a), in step S3151, the CPU 561 of the voice output control device 47 determines whether or not a normal voice output command has been received from the sub control device 262. The normal voice output command is a command for designating the voice to be output according to the progress of the game, such as the variable display effect on the third symbol display device 42 and the effect during the jackpot round. If the normal voice output command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3152, otherwise the process ends.

In step S3152, the CPU 561 of the voice output control device 47 designates sound data based on the song number of the melody designated by the normal voice output command. Next, in step S3153, the CPU 561 of the audio output control device 47 determines the amplification amount when amplifying the analog format sound data by the amplifier based on the set value of the volume switch.

Next, in step S3154, the CPU 561 of the voice output control device 47 reads out the digital sound data corresponding to the song number specified in step S3152 from the ROM 562. Next, in step S3155, the CPU 561 of the voice output control device 47 converts the read digital-format normal voice sound data into analog-format sound data.

Next, in step S3156, the CPU 561 of the voice output control device 47 outputs analog-format sound data to the sound output unit 24a for normal voice. Specifically, in the sound output unit 24a, the amplifier 24a1 amplifies the analog format sound data according to the amplification value determined in step S3153, and the speaker 24a2 outputs the amplified sound data as a melody that can be heard by the player. ..

Next, as shown in FIG. 32 (b), in step S3161, whether or not the CPU 561 of the voice output control device 47 has received the specific sound output start command or the one-shot notification sound output start command from the sub control device 262. To judge. The specific sound output start command is a command for starting the output of the first to third specific sounds. The one-shot notification sound output start command is a command for starting the output of the one-shot notification sound. If the command is received, the process proceeds to step S3162, and if not, the process ends.

In step S3162, the CPU 561 of the voice output control device 47 designates the sound data of the first to third specific sounds to be output based on the designation in the specific sound output command. Next, in step S3163, the CPU 561 of the audio output control device 47 determines the amplification amount when amplifying the analog format sound data by the amplifier based on the set value of the volume switch.

Next, in step S3164, the CPU 561 of the voice output control device 47 prevents the specific sound and the one-shot notification sound from being mixed with the normal voice and becoming difficult to hear when outputting the specific sound and the one-shot notification sound. In addition, the amplification amount of normal sound is changed (decreased).

Next, in step S3165, the CPU 561 of the voice output control device 47 reads the sound data of the first to third specific sounds specified in step S3162 from the ROM 562. Next, in step S3166, the CPU 561 of the voice output control device 47 converts the read digital sound data of the specific sound into analog sound data.

Next, in step S3167, the CPU 561 of the voice output control device 47 outputs analog-format sound data to the sound output unit 24b for a specific sound. Specifically, as for the output to the sound output unit 24b, the amplifier 24a1 amplifies the audio data in the analog format according to the amplification value determined in step S3163, and the speaker 24b2 amplifies the amplified sound data as the first to third identification. Output as sound.

Next, in step S3168, the CPU 561 of the voice output control device 47 determines whether or not a specific sound output end command or a one-shot notification sound output end command has been received from the sub control device 262. The specific sound output end command is issued when the first to third specific sound output periods are completed or when the effect button 80 is detected during the first to third specific sound output periods, the first to third specific sounds are output. This is a command to end the output of. The one-shot notification sound output end command is a command for ending the output of the one-shot notification sound when the output period of the one-shot notification sound ends. If the command is received, the process proceeds to step S3169, otherwise the process ends.

In step S3169, the CPU 561 of the voice output control device 47 has finished outputting the specific sound and the one-shot notification sound, so that the amplification amount of the normal voice changed (decreased) in step S3164 is returned to the original amplification amount. Make normal sound output as before.
<Example of specific sound production and one-shot notification production>

Next, an example of the specific sound effect and the one-shot notification effect will be described with reference to FIG. 33.

As shown in FIG. 33 (a), the specific sound effect is performed every 30 × n game times. Further, for each 300 × nth game, the one-shot notification sound is determined based on the audible frequency band grasped by the specific sound production up to that point. It should be noted that a predetermined one-shot notification sound may be used until the one-shot notification sound is first determined. As shown in FIG. 33 (b), the specific sound effect period is 6 seconds from a predetermined second after the start of the reach effect (may be at the same time as the start of the reach, 5 seconds after the start of the reach, etc.) during each variation display. It is set. In the specific sound production period, the first specific sound (19 kHz) → the second specific sound (17 kHz) → the third specific sound (15 kHz) so that the time that can be first audibly recognized differs depending on the attribute of the player. The changing specific sound is output from the sound output unit 24. The first to third specific sound output possible periods during which the first to third specific sounds can be output are set after the first specific sound output possible period is 0 to 2 seconds after the start, and the second specific sound output is performed. The possible period is set from 2 seconds to 4 seconds after the start, and the third specific sound output possible period is set from 4 seconds to 6 seconds after the start. It is possible to change the timing and length of outputting the first to third specific sounds within the period in which the first to third specific sounds can be output. In this embodiment, the first specific sound output period is set from 0 second to 1 second after the start of the specific sound production period, and the second specific sound output period is from 3 seconds to 4 seconds after the start of the specific sound production period. It is set after a second, and the third specific sound output period is set 4 to 5 seconds after the start of the specific sound effect period.

In the variation display of the 300 × nth game round, for example, 2 seconds before the start of the specific sound production, as information necessary for the specific sound production, for example, the button is pressed when a “keen sound is heard” shown in FIG. Necessary for specific sound effects such as an image that informs the start of the specific sound effect such as "Press!", An image that explains the operation method of the effect button 80 in the specific sound effect, and an image that informs that the specific sound effect is being executed. Information is displayed on the third symbol display device 42 by the display control device 45. Instead of displaying such an image, an LED is built in the effect button 80, and the LED is turned on during the specific sound effect period to notify the player that the specific sound effect period is in effect. May be good.

In the first specific sound output period, the first specific sound (19 kHz) is output from the sound output unit 24. The first specific sound tends to be easily heard by players in their early twenties among the players in the playable age group. When the effect button 80 is pressed during the first specific sound validity determination period, the sub-control device 262 grasps that the audible frequency band of the player is 19 kHz. By reading out this audible frequency band, the gaming machine maker can understand that there is a high possibility that the age group of the players playing the game with the gaming machine is in their early twenties. At this time, the first specific sound listening image (for example, "I heard up to 19 kHz. Wow! Wow!" Is displayed on the third symbol display device 42 to inform the result that the player was able to hear the first specific sound. And "You are a superhuman.") Is displayed, so you can grasp the audible frequency band while attracting the player's interest.

When the player cannot hear the first specific sound during the first specific sound output period, the second specific sound (17 kHz) is output from the sound output unit 24 during the second specific sound output period. Sound having a frequency band of 17 kHz tends to be easily heard by players in their thirties or older among players in the gameable age group. When the effect button 80 is pressed during the second specific sound validity determination period, the sub-control device 262 grasps that the audible frequency band of the player is 17 kHz. By reading out this audible frequency band, the gaming machine maker can understand that there is a high possibility that the age group of the players playing the game with the gaming machine is in their late twenties to thirties. At this time, on the third symbol display device 42, a second specific sound listening image (for example, "I heard up to 17 kHz. It's amazing!" Or " A text image) such as "You are a superhuman in a little while" is displayed, so you can grasp the audible frequency band while attracting the player's interest.

When the player cannot hear the second specific sound during the second specific sound output period, the third specific sound (15 kHz) is output from the sound output unit 24. Sound having a frequency band of 15 kHz tends to be easily heard by players in their 40s or older among players in the gameable age group. When the effect button 80 is pressed during the third specific sound validity determination period, the sub-control device 262 grasps that the audible frequency band of the player is 15 kHz. By reading out this audible frequency band, the gaming machine maker can understand that there is a high possibility that the age group of the players playing the game with the gaming machine is in their 40s or older. At this time, on the third symbol display device 42, a second specific sound listening image (for example, "It seems that you heard up to 15 kHz" or "You are." Character images such as "It's still normal.") Are displayed, so you can grasp the audible frequency band while attracting the player's interest.

The specific sound effect is performed every 30 × nth game, and the mode of the audible frequency band grasped a certain number (for example, 10 times from 30 to 300) for each 300 × nth game. Based on, the pitch of the one-shot notification sound is determined. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 33 (c), it is assumed that the mode is in the frequency band of 19 kHz, and the one-shot notification sound (first first notification sound) having the same height as the first specific sound is used. ) Has been decided. In the one-shot notification effect, the first notification sound having a frequency band of 19 kHz is output from the sound output unit 24 for, for example, 2 seconds, so even if there are players in their late 20s or later in the surrounding gaming machines, 20 Players in their late teens and later do not notice the first notification sound, and only players in their early twenties who play games with the gaming machine notice the first notification sound. Therefore, only a player in his early twenties who plays a game with the gaming machine can be quietly notified that he has won a big hit. In this way, by reflecting the circumstances (age group) peculiar to the player who plays the game with the pachinko machine in the one-shot notification production, the one-shot notification production is more effective than the conventional one-shot notification production that anyone can understand. It can improve the interest.

The above-mentioned first to third specific sound listening images correspond to the specific information of the present invention.
<Action and effect of Example 1>

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, if the effect button 80 can be pressed during the first to third specific sound validity determination periods, the audible frequency band (first specific sound) in the third symbol display device 42. : 19 kHz, 2nd specific sound: 17 kHz, 3rd specific sound: 15 kHz) While giving the player the fun of being able to see the first to third specific sound listening images, the game is in progress. It is possible to obtain information for grasping the age group of a person. Since the audible frequency band is higher as the player's age group is lower and lower as the player's age group is higher, the gaming machine manufacturer is grasped by the first to third specific sound listening flags in the RAM 553 of the sub-control device 262. By reading out the audible frequency band, it is possible to suitably investigate the age group of the players who play the game with the pachinko machine 10 to be investigated.

Example 2 is an example of the invention described in (System B) described later.
The pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 37. FIG. 34 is a main part of the block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the second embodiment. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a specific sound output process by the sub control device 262 according to the second embodiment. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a switching process of the display mode and the like by the display control device 45 of the second embodiment. FIG. 37 is a diagram for explaining the reach promotion effect.

The difference between the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment and that of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 34.

The sub-control device 262 of the present embodiment is not provided with the first, second, and third first notification flags provided in the first embodiment, but is specified during the variation display effect of the third symbol. Based on the fact that the audible frequency band is grasped by the sound effect, it is determined whether the effect mode of the reach promotion effect executed during the subsequent variable display of the third symbol is the reach promotion effect A, B, or C. However, in the determined effect mode, the first, second, and third reach promotion effect flags that control the reach promotion effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 42 are provided, as in the first embodiment. different. The first, second, and third reach promotion effect flags will be described in detail later.

The effect button input monitoring / effect process shown in FIG. 22 and the effect execution management process shown in FIG. 23 are also referred to in this embodiment except for the steps related to the one-shot notification effect. In this embodiment, the variation pattern with the specific sound effect corresponding to step S1701 is a variation pattern command including the reach promotion effect, and the variation has a length required to execute the specific sound effect and the reach promotion effect. It is a pattern command. In the specific sound listening determination process shown in FIG. 24, the step of counting the number of times of specific sound listening is referred to by replacing it with the step of setting the above-mentioned first to third reach promotion effect flags to "1". The specific sound output period setting process shown in FIG. 25 is performed as follows according to this embodiment.

<Specific sound output period setting process>
The specific sound output period setting process performed by the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 will be described with reference to FIG. 35.

In step S3201, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the specific sound effect start flag is “1”. If the specific sound effect start flag is "1", the process proceeds to step S3202 to start the specific sound effect, otherwise the process ends.

In step S3202, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 issues a specific sound effect display start command for controlling the display control device 45 to display the display necessary for starting the specific sound effect on the third symbol display device 42. set.

In step S3203, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the first specific sound output timing has arrived. If it is the first specific sound output timing, the process proceeds to step S3204, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3210.

In step S3204, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the first specific sound output flag to "1", sets the first specific sound output start command, and proceeds to step S3205. The first specific sound output end command is transmitted to the voice output control device 47.

In step S3205, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 subtracts the timer and counts the output period in which the first specific sound is output. In step S3206, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the value of the timer has become 0. If the value of the timer is not 0, the process proceeds to step S3207, and if the value of the timer becomes 0, the process proceeds to step S3209 described later.

In step S3207, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the first specific sound listening flag described above in step S2003 of FIG. 24 is “1”. If the first specific sound listening flag is "1", the process proceeds to step S3209, otherwise (if "0"), this process ends.

When the first reach promotion effect flag is "1", the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the first reach promotion effect display command. The first reach promotion effect display command is transmitted to the display control device 45.

In step S3209, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the first specific sound output flag to "0" and sets the first specific sound output end command. The first specific sound output end command is transmitted to the voice output control device 47. This ends this process.

In step S3210, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the second specific sound output timing has arrived. If it is the second specific sound output timing, the process proceeds to step S3211, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3218.

In step S3211, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the first specific sound listening flag is “1”. If the first specific sound listening flag is "1", this process ends. If the first specific sound listening flag is not "1", the process proceeds to step S3212. In step S3212, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the second specific sound output flag to "1", sets the second specific sound output start command, and proceeds to step S3213. The second specific sound output start command is output to the voice output control device 47.

In step S3213, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 subtracts the timer and counts the output period of the second specific sound. In step S3214, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the value of the timer is 0. If the value of the timer is not 0, the process proceeds to step S3215. If the value of the timer is 0, the process proceeds to step S3217 described later.

In step S3215, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the second specific sound listening flag described above in step S2005 of FIG. 24 is “1”. If the second specific sound listening flag is "1", the process proceeds to step S3217, and if not (if "0"), this process ends.

When the second reach promotion effect flag is "1", the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the second reach promotion effect display command. The second reach promotion effect display command is transmitted to the display control device 45.

In step S3217, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the second specific sound output flag to "0" and sets the second specific sound output end command. The second specific sound output end command is transmitted to the voice output control device 47. This ends this process.

In step S3218, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the third specific sound output timing has arrived. If it is the third specific sound output timing, the process proceeds to step S3219. If it is not the third specific sound output timing, this process ends.

In step S3219, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the second specific sound listening flag is set to "1". If the second specific sound listening flag is "1", this process ends. If the second specific sound listening flag is not "1", the process proceeds to step S3220. In step S3220, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the third specific sound output flag to "1", sets the third specific sound output start command, and proceeds to step S3221. The third specific sound output start command is output to the voice output control device 47.

In step S3221, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 subtracts the timer and counts the output period of the third specific sound. In step S3222, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the value of the timer has become 0. If the value of the timer is not 0, the process proceeds to step S3223. When the value of the timer becomes 0, the process proceeds to step S3225 described later.

In step S3223, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the third specific sound listening flag described above in step S2007 of FIG. 24 is “1”. If the third specific sound listening flag is "1", the process proceeds to step S3225, otherwise (if "0"), this process ends.

When the third reach promotion effect flag is "1", the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the third reach promotion effect display command. The third reach promotion effect display command is transmitted to the display control device 45.

In step S3225, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the third specific sound output flag to "0" and sets the third specific sound output end command. The third specific sound output end command is transmitted to the voice output control device 47. This ends this process.

<Display mode switching process>
A display mode switching process performed by the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 will be described with reference to FIG. 36. Since steps S3301,3302 to S3309 to step S3312 are the same as the processes of steps SS3301,3302, 3109 to step S3112 of the first embodiment, the first embodiment is referred to.

In step S3303, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the first reach promotion effect display command has been received. If the first reach promotion effect display command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3304, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3305.

In step S3304, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 controls the display of the third symbol display device 42 so as to start the reach promotion effect A. The reach promotion effect A is a normal symbol when the reach display by the third symbol performed by the third symbol display device 42 is the reach by the normal symbol (“2”, “4”, “6” or “8”). This is a promotion effect that sandwiches three different reach effect displays while promoting the reach display by the probabilistic pattern (“1”, “3”, “5”, “7”, or “9”) to the reach display by.

In step S3305, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the second reach promotion effect display command has been received. If the second reach promotion effect display command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3306, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3307.

In step S3306, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 controls the display of the third symbol display device 42 so as to start the reach promotion effect B. The reach promotion effect B is a promotion effect in which two different reach effect displays are sandwiched while the reach display based on the normal symbol is promoted to the reach display based on the probabilistic symbol.

In step S3307, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the third reach promotion effect display command has been received. If the third reach promotion effect display command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3308, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3309.

In step S3308, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 controls the display of the third symbol display device 42 so as to start the reach promotion effect C. The reach promotion effect C is a promotion effect in which one different reach effect display is sandwiched while the reach display by the normal symbol is promoted to the reach display by the probabilistic symbol.

<Example of reach promotion production>
An example of reach promotion effects A to C will be described with reference to FIG. 37.

In this example, the variable display time including the reach promotion effects A to C is set to 36 seconds, and the final display time is set to 2 seconds. The reach effect period is set from 4 seconds to 36 seconds after the start of fluctuation. Of these, the reach effect period based on the normal symbol is set from 4 seconds to 30 seconds after the start of fluctuation, and the reach effect period based on the probabilistic symbol is set 30 seconds to 36 seconds after the start of fluctuation.

The specific sound effect period is set from 6 seconds to 24 seconds after the start of fluctuation. The period during which the first specific sound (19 kHz) can be output (hereinafter, the period during which the first specific sound can be output; the second and third specific sounds are also referred to in the same manner) is 6 to 12 seconds after the start of fluctuation. The second specific sound (17 kHz) output possible period is set 12 to 18 seconds after the start of fluctuation, and the third specific sound (15 kHz) output possible period is set 18 to 24 seconds after the start of fluctuation. To.

The first specific sound output period is set for 2 seconds of the first specific sound output possible period, that is, 8 to 10 seconds after the start of fluctuation. The second specific sound output period is set for 2 seconds of the second specific sound output possible period, that is, 12 to 14 seconds after the start of fluctuation. The third specific sound output period is set for 2 seconds of the third specific sound output possible period, that is, 20 to 22 seconds after the start of fluctuation.

When the pressing of the effect button 80 is detected at the timing t1 (9 seconds after the start of fluctuation) during the first specific sound output period, the reach promotion effect A is started. In the reach promotion effect A, a normal reach effect that normally expects a big hit to occur is displayed until the first specific sound output possible period elapses. Since the first specific sound is heard in the reach promotion effect A, the second and third specific sounds are not output during the second and third specific sound output periods in the following description.

In reach promotion effect A, at the timing when the first specific sound output possible period ends (12 seconds after the start of fluctuation), the normal reach effect is changed to the super reach effect (normal symbol reach), which has a higher expectation than the normal reach effect. To. The super reach effect is displayed until the timing when the second specific sound output possible period ends (18 seconds after the start of fluctuation), and at the timing when the second specific sound output possible period ends, the degree of expectation is higher than the super reach effect. Moreover, it is changed to a premium reach effect (normal symbol reach) whose appearance rate is lower than that of the super reach effect. The premium reach effect is displayed until the timing when the third specific sound output possible period ends (24 seconds after the start of fluctuation), and when the third specific sound output possible period ends, the effect button 80 is requested to be pressed. It will be changed to reach production with button chance (normal pattern reach).

In the reach effect with push button chance, when the effect button 80 is pressed during the reach effect period or the effect button 80 is not pressed during the reach effect period, a predetermined time has elapsed. It ends in (30 seconds after the start of fluctuation). In the reach effect with a push button chance, the normal symbol reach is promoted to the probabilistic symbol reach when a predetermined time (30 seconds after the start of fluctuation) has elapsed. After that, after a confirmation display time of 2 seconds, the same symbol as the probability variation reach symbol becomes a stop symbol, and the probability variation jackpot is confirmed.

In this way, in the reach promotion effect A, the player changes from the normal reach effect → the super reach effect → the premium reach effect → the reach effect with the push button chance, so that all the reach promotion effects can be seen. By assuming that the premium reach effect is a jackpot display result with a high probability (for example, a probability close to 90%), the player is expected to have a jackpot display result through promotion from the normal reach effect to the super reach effect. It is possible to further increase the expectation that the jackpot display result will be obtained in the premium reach production.

When the press of the effect button 80 is detected at the timing t2 (13 seconds after the start of fluctuation) during the second specific sound output period, the reach promotion effect B is started. In the reach promotion effect B, the normal reach effect is displayed until the second specific sound output possible period elapses. Since the second specific sound is heard in the reach promotion effect B, the third specific sound is not output during the period when the third specific sound can be output.

In the reach promotion effect B, the normal reach effect is changed to the super reach effect at the timing when the second specific sound output possible period ends (18 seconds after the start of fluctuation). The super reach effect is displayed until the timing when the third specific sound output possible period ends, and is changed to the reach effect with a push button chance at the timing when the third specific sound output period ends. In the reach effect with a push button chance, the normal symbol reach is promoted to the probabilistic symbol reach when the effect button 80 is pressed and when a predetermined time has elapsed. After that, the same symbol as the probabilistic reach symbol becomes the stop symbol, and the probabilistic jackpot is confirmed.

In this way, in the reach promotion effect B that is started based on the fact that the second specific sound is heard, the player changes from the normal reach effect → the super reach effect → the reach effect with the push button chance, but the premium reach effect is performed. I can't see it. In addition, in the case of the super reach effect, the jackpot display result may be obtained or the off display result may be present (for example, the probability of about 50%). It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the display result will be out of alignment.

When the pressing of the effect button 80 is detected at the timing t3 (21 seconds after the start of fluctuation) during the third specific sound output period, the reach promotion effect C is started. In the reach promotion effect C, the normal reach effect is displayed until the third specific sound output possible period elapses. When the third reach promotion effect display command is received, the reach promotion effect C is started from the timing when the third specific sound output period ends (reach effect with a push button chance).

In the reach promotion effect C, the reach effect with a push button chance is started at the timing when the third specific sound output possible period ends (24 seconds after the start of fluctuation). In the reach effect with a push button chance, the normal symbol reach is promoted to the probabilistic symbol reach when the effect button 80 is pressed and when a predetermined time has elapsed. After that, the same symbol as the probabilistic reach symbol becomes the stop symbol, and the probabilistic jackpot is confirmed.

In this way, in the reach promotion production C that is started based on the listening of the third specific sound, the normal reach production → the reach production with a push button chance changes, but the player can perform the super reach production and the premium reach production. Can't see. In addition, the reach effect with a push button chance in the reach promotion effect C is displayed more when the display result is off than when the jackpot display result is obtained, and the reach effect with the push button chance in the reach promotion effect C is a reach effect. It is possible to give the impression that the expectation of a jackpot display result is lower than that of the reach production with a push button chance in promotion A and B. In such an impression, if the jackpot display result is obtained, the player can be surprised.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the player who can hear the specific sound having a high frequency band can see the reach promotion effect which is promoted more frequently.

The reach promotion effects A to C described above correspond to the specific display effects of the invention according to (B1). Further, the first to third reach promotion effect flags in the RAM 553 of the sub control device 262 described above correspond to the specific display effect control means of the invention according to (B1).

<Action and effect of Example 2>
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the audible frequency band (first specific sound: 19 kHz, second specific sound) is set by the first to third specific sound listening flags in the RAM 553 of the sub control device 262. : 17kHz, 3rd specific sound: 15kHz), the production mode of the reach promotion effect, that is, the reach promotion effect A where all the promotion effects can be seen, and a part of the promotion effect can be seen. Which of the reach promotion effect B that cannot be done and the reach promotion effect C that can see the least number of promotion effects is different. A player who can hear a specific sound having a high frequency band can see a reach promotion effect that is promoted more frequently. Therefore, since the player tries to recognize the higher audible frequency band as much as possible according to his / her age group, the interest of the reach promotion effect started based on the detection of the pressing of the effect button 80. Can be improved.

Example 3 is an example of the invention described in (C system) described later.
The pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 43. FIG. 38 is a main part of the block portion showing the electrical configuration of the third embodiment. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the start winning process according to the third embodiment. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing a look-ahead lottery process. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing a specific sound output process according to the third embodiment. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the variation display mode setting process according to the third embodiment. FIG. 43 is a diagram for explaining the look-ahead effect.

The difference between the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment and the first and second embodiments will be described with reference to FIG. 38.

The sub-control device 262 of the present embodiment is a case where the first, second, and third specific sound output flags are winning determinations (pre-reading winning) in which the determination result of the variation display of the unexecuted portion is the specific display mode. In addition, when a plurality of unexecuted variable displays are suspended before the unexecuted variable display that is determined to be won, it is provided during a plurality of variable display periods performed after the variable unexecuted condition is released. It differs from the first, second, and third specific sound output flags of the first and second embodiments in that the control is performed to output the first, second, and third specific sounds within the specified sound effect period. Further, the sub-control device 262 sets the first and second display modes of the look-ahead notice (display that the stop symbol is the chance eye "341") based on the pre-reading winning based on the grasp of the audible frequency band. , The first, second, and third look-ahead notice flags that determine which of the third look-ahead notice effects is to be used and control the look-ahead notice to be displayed on the third symbol display device 42 in the determined effect mode. It is also different from Examples 1 and 2 in that it is provided with. In the following, the differences from the other examples will be mainly described.

<Starting prize processing>
The start winning process of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 39. The start winning process of this embodiment is the same as the starting winning process of the first embodiment in steps S701 to S704, but the look-ahead lottery process described below is performed in step S705.

The look-ahead lottery process will be described with reference to FIG. 40. In step S3401, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the number of unexecuted variable displays (hereinafter referred to as the reserved number) stored in the reserved ball storage area is four. That is, the look-ahead lottery is conditional on the unexecuted variable display being stored in all of the first reserved area, the second reserved area, the third reserved area, and the fourth reserved area. If the number of holdings is 4, the process proceeds to step S3402, otherwise the process ends. The condition for the number of reservations was four (full tank), but it may be four or more, or the number may be less than the full tank.

In step S3402, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 performs a look-ahead lottery to determine whether or not the result of the variation display of the unexecuted portion stored in the fourth holding area is a big hit. The look-ahead lottery is performed based on the value of the jackpot random number C1 in the variable display of the unexecuted portion stored in the fourth holding area.

In step S3403, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the result of the look-ahead lottery is a win. If the value of the jackpot random number C1 in the variation display of the unexecuted portion is the winning value, the result of the look-ahead lottery is won. If the result of the look-ahead lottery is a win, the process proceeds to step S3404, otherwise the process ends.

In step S3404, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets the look-ahead winning flag to "1" and ends this process. The look-ahead winning flag is provided in the RAM 503 of the main control device 261 and determines whether or not the result of the variation display for the unexecuted portion is a big hit.

The look-ahead winning flag provided in the RAM 503 of the main control device 261 described above corresponds to the unexecuted portion determination means of the invention according to (C1).

The effect button input monitoring / effect process shown in FIG. 22 and the effect execution management process shown in FIG. 23 are also referred to in this embodiment except for the step related to the one-shot notification effect. In this embodiment, the variation pattern with the specific sound effect corresponding to step S1701 is the variation pattern for the first hold when the look-ahead lottery performed by the maximum number of holds is won for the fourth hold. .. In the specific sound listening determination process shown in FIG. 24, the step of counting the number of times of specific sound listening is referred to by replacing it with the step of setting the above-mentioned first to third look-ahead warning flags to "1". The specific sound output period setting process shown in FIG. 25 is performed as follows according to this embodiment.

<Specific sound output period setting process>
The specific sound output processing in this embodiment will be described below with reference to FIG. 41.

In step S3600, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the specific sound effect start flag is “1”. The specific sound effect start flag is set to "1" when the pre-reading lottery performed by the maximum number of holds (4 pieces) is won for the fourth hold. If the specific sound effect start flag is "1", the process proceeds to step S3202 to start the specific sound effect, otherwise the process ends.

In step S3601, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 issues a specific sound effect display start command for controlling the display control device 45 to display the display necessary for starting the specific sound effect on the third symbol display device 42. set.

In step S3602, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 has a variation display to be determined based on the variation display of the unexecuted portion stored in the first hold area at the time of the look-ahead winning (hereinafter, the first hold at the time of the look-ahead winning). It is determined whether or not it is. If it is the first hold at the time of pre-reading winning, the process proceeds to step S3603, otherwise the process proceeds to step S3610.

In step S3603, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the first specific sound output timing has arrived during the variation display based on the first hold at the time of pre-reading winning. The first specific sound output timing is provided during the fluctuation display period based on the first hold. If the first specific sound output timing has arrived, the process proceeds to step S3604, otherwise the process ends.

In step S3604, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the first specific sound output flag to "1", sets the first specific sound output start command, and proceeds to step S3205. The first specific sound output end command is transmitted to the voice output control device 47.

In step S3605, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 subtracts the timer and counts the output period in which the first specific sound is output. In step S3506, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the value of the timer has become 0. If the value of the timer is not 0, the process proceeds to step S3607, and if the value of the timer becomes 0, the process proceeds to step S3609 described later.

In step S3607, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the first specific sound listening flag described above in step S2003 of FIG. 24 is “1”. If the first specific sound listening flag is "1", the process proceeds to step S3609, otherwise (if "0"), this process ends.

When the first specific sound listening flag is set to "1", the first look-ahead notice flag is also set to "1". The first look-ahead notice flag is the first change to be described later from the change display performed after the change non-execution condition is canceled based on the first hold at the time of the look-ahead winning, which is determined according to the setting of the first specific sound listening flag to "1". Control to start the look-ahead notice effect.

When the first look-ahead warning flag is "1", the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 transmits the first look-ahead notice command to the display control device 45. The display control device 45 performs the first look-ahead notice effect described later.

In step S3609, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the first specific sound output flag to "0" and sets the first specific sound output end command. The first specific sound output end command is transmitted to the voice output control device 47. This ends this process.

In step S3610, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 has a variation display to be determined based on the variation display of the unexecuted portion stored in the second hold area at the time of the look-ahead winning (hereinafter, the second hold at the time of the look-ahead winning). It is determined whether or not it is. If it is the second hold at the time of pre-reading winning, the process proceeds to step S3611, otherwise the process proceeds to step S3619.

In step S3611, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the first specific sound listening flag is “1”. If the first specific sound listening flag is "1", the pre-reading notice effect has already started, so this process is terminated. If the first specific sound listening flag is not "1", the process proceeds to step S3612.

In step S3612, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the second specific sound output timing has arrived. The second specific sound output timing is provided during the fluctuation display period based on the second hold. If the second specific sound output timing has arrived, the process proceeds to step S36113, and if not, the present process ends.

In step S3613, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the second specific sound output flag to "1", sets the second specific sound output start command, and proceeds to step S3213. The second specific sound output start command is output to the voice output control device 47.

In step S3614, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 subtracts the timer and counts the output period in which the second specific sound is output. In step S3615, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the value of the timer has become 0. If the value of the timer is not 0, the process proceeds to step S3616, and if the value of the timer becomes 0, the process proceeds to step S3618 described later.

In step S3616, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the second specific sound listening flag described above in step S2005 of FIG. 24 is “1”. If the second specific sound listening flag is "1", the process proceeds to step S3617, and if not (if "0"), this process ends.

When the second specific sound listening flag is set to "1", the second look-ahead notice flag is also set to "1". The second look-ahead notice flag is a second read-ahead notice flag, which will be described later, from the change display performed after the change non-execution condition is canceled based on the second hold at the time of the look-ahead winning, which is determined according to the setting of the second specific sound listening flag to "1". Control to start the look-ahead notice effect.

When the second look-ahead warning flag is set to "1", the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 transmits the second look-ahead notice command to the display control device 45. The display control device 45 performs a second look-ahead notice effect, which will be described later.

In step S3618, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the second specific sound output flag to "0" and sets the second specific sound output end command. The second specific sound output end command is transmitted to the voice output control device 47. This ends this process.

In step S3619, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines that the variation display to be determined is based on the variation display of the unexecuted portion stored in the third hold area 403d at the time of the look-ahead winning (hereinafter, the third hold at the time of the look-ahead winning). Determine if it is a thing. If it is the third hold at the time of pre-reading winning, the process proceeds to step S3620, otherwise the process ends.

In step S3620, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the first specific sound listening flag or the second specific sound listening flag is "1". If the first specific sound listening flag or the second specific sound listening flag is "1", the pre-reading notice has already started, so this process is terminated. If neither the first specific sound listening flag nor the second specific sound listening flag is "1", the process proceeds to step S3621.

In step S3621, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the third specific sound output timing has arrived. The third specific sound output timing is provided during the fluctuation display period based on the third hold. If the third specific sound output timing has arrived, the process proceeds to step S3622, and if not, the present process ends.

In step S3622, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the third specific sound output flag to "1", sets the third specific sound output start command, and proceeds to step S3623. The third specific sound output start command is output to the voice output control device 47.

In step S3623, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 subtracts the timer and counts the output period in which the third specific sound is output. In step S3624, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the value of the timer has become 0. If the value of the timer is not 0, the process proceeds to step S3625, and if the value of the timer becomes 0, the process proceeds to step S3627 described later.

In step S3625, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the third specific sound listening flag described above in step S2007 of FIG. 24 is “1”. If the third specific sound listening flag is "1", the process proceeds to step S3626, otherwise (if "0"), this process ends.

In step S3626, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the third specific sound listening flag to "1" and sets the third look-ahead notice flag to "1", and proceeds to step S3627.

When the third specific sound listening flag is set to "1", the third look-ahead notice flag is also set to "1". The third look-ahead notice flag is the third look-ahead notice flag, which will be described later, from the change display performed after the change non-execution condition is canceled based on the third hold at the time of the look-ahead winning, which is determined according to the setting of the third specific sound listening flag to "1". Control to start the look-ahead notice effect.

When the third look-ahead warning flag is set to "1", the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 transmits the third look-ahead notice command to the display control device 45. The display control device 45 performs a third look-ahead notice effect, which will be described later.

In step S3627, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the third specific sound output flag to "0" and sets the third specific sound output end command. The third specific sound output end command is transmitted to the voice output control device 47. This ends this process.

<Variable display mode setting process>
The variation display mode setting process according to the third embodiment will be described below with reference to FIG. 42.

As shown in FIG. 42, in step S3701, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 proceeds to step S3702 if it has received the variation pattern designation command, and proceeds to step S3705 if it has not received it.

In step S3702, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the look-ahead winning flag is "1". If the look-ahead winning flag is "1", the process proceeds to step S3703, otherwise the process proceeds to step S3704.

In step S3703, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets a display command including a specific sound effect, and ends this process. In step S3704, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets a display command that does not include the specific sound effect, and ends this process.

In step S3705, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 proceeds to step S3706 if it has received the decorative symbol designation command, and ends this process if it has not received it.

In step S3706, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the first to third look-ahead warning flags are "1". If the first to third look-ahead warning flags are "1", the process proceeds to step S3707, otherwise the process proceeds to step S3710.

In step S3707, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets a stop display command with the stop symbol of the variation display corresponding to the first to third look-ahead warning flags as a chance. The chance eye is a predetermined stop symbol such as "3", "4", "1", etc., and the degree of expectation that a big hit will occur in the fluctuation display after the fluctuation display ending at the chance eye is usually. It is a stop symbol that suggests that it is higher than the detached stop symbol.

In step S3708, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the determination target is the third hold at the time of pre-reading winning. If the determination target is the third hold at the time of pre-reading winning, the process proceeds to step S3709, otherwise the process ends.

In step S3709, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the first to third look-ahead warning flags to "0" and ends this process. The 1st to 3rd look-ahead notice flags control to give a look-ahead notice up to the change display performed after the change non-execution condition is released based on the 3rd hold at the time of winning immediately before the 4th hold at the time of winning the look-ahead. ..

In step S3710, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the stop display command that does not set the chance eye as the stop symbol because the first to third look-ahead advance notice flags are not "1" in step S3706, and ends this process. do.

When the first, second, and third look-ahead warning flags are "1", the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the first, second, and third look-ahead notice commands and transmits them to the display control device 45. do. The display control device 45 sets the stop symbols (chance eyes) of the first hold, the second hold, and the third hold at the time of the look-ahead winning in different colors (silver, gold, rainbow) based on the first, second, and third look-ahead notice commands. Color). Details will be described in the following example of the first to third look-ahead notice effects.

<Example of pre-reading notice production>
An example of the first to third look-ahead notice effects will be described with reference to FIG. 43.

In this example, four holds occur during the variable display period, and as a result of a look-ahead lottery for each hold, the result of the look-ahead lottery for the fourth hold is won. At this time, the specific sound effect period is set from the start of the variable display period based on the first hold at the time of pre-reading winning (timing Ta) to the end of the variable display period based on the third holding at the time of pre-reading winning (timing Td). .. The first specific sound output period is set during the first specific sound output possible period (timing Ta to Tb) corresponding to the fluctuation period based on the first hold at the time of pre-reading winning. The second specific sound output period is set during the second specific sound output possible period (timing Tb to Tc) corresponding to the fluctuation period based on the second hold at the time of pre-reading winning. The third specific sound output period is set during the third specific sound output possible period (timing Tc to Td) corresponding to the fluctuation period based on the third hold at the time of pre-reading winning.

When the pressing of the effect button 80 is detected at the timing t1 during the first specific sound output period, the first look-ahead advance notice effect is started. In the first pre-reading notice effect, as a result of being able to hear the first specific sound during the first specific sound validity determination period, the pre-reading notice effect is performed three times. Specifically, as a result of the variable display based on the first hold at the time of pre-reading winning, the third symbol is stopped and displayed at the chance of "3", "4", and "1" and in a state of shining in silver. Next, as a result of the variable display based on the second hold at the time of pre-reading winning, the third symbol is stopped and displayed again at the chances of "3", "4", and "1" and in a state of glowing gold. Next, as a result of the variable display based on the third hold at the time of pre-reading winning, the third symbol is stopped and displayed again at the chances of "3", "4", and "1" and in a state of shining in rainbow colors. Finally, the result of the variable display based on the fourth hold at the time of pre-reading winning is the jackpot display result.

In this way, in the first look-ahead notice effect, the player can see all of the first chance (silver) → the second chance (gold) → the third chance (rainbow). By making the third chance (rainbow color) display a big hit confirmation display, the player gradually raises the expectation that the big hit display result will be obtained in the first and second look-ahead notice productions. However, it is possible to increase the expectation that the jackpot display result will be obtained in the third variable display.

When the pressing of the effect button 80 is detected at the timing t2 during the second specific sound output period, the second look-ahead advance notice effect is started. In the second pre-reading notice effect, as a result of being able to hear the second specific sound during the second specific sound validity determination period, the pre-reading notice effect is performed twice. Specifically, the variable display based on the first hold at the time of pre-reading winning is stopped and displayed as a normal out-of-order symbol. Next, as a result of the variable display based on the second hold at the time of pre-reading winning, the third symbol is stopped and displayed at the chance of "3", "4", and "1" and in a state of shining in silver. Next, as a result of the variable display based on the third hold at the time of pre-reading winning, the third symbol is stopped and displayed again at the chances of "3", "4", and "1" and in a state of glowing gold. Finally, the result of the variable display based on the fourth hold at the time of pre-reading winning is the jackpot display result.

In this way, in the second look-ahead notice effect, the player can see the first chance (silver) → the second chance (gold). It should be noted that the second pre-reading notice effect is displayed not only when the jackpot display result is obtained, but also when the pre-reading notice effect is displayed twice. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that there are cases where the display result is obtained.

When the pressing of the effect button 80 is detected at the timing t3 during the third specific sound output period, the third look-ahead advance notice effect is started. In the third look-ahead notice effect, as a result of being able to hear the third specific sound during the third specific sound validity determination period, one look-ahead notice effect is performed. Specifically, the variable display based on the first hold at the time of pre-reading winning and the variable display based on the second holding at the time of pre-reading winning are stopped and displayed as normal out-of-order symbols. Next, as a result of the variable display based on the third hold at the time of pre-reading winning, the third symbol is stopped and displayed at the chance of "3", "4", and "1" and in a state of shining in silver. Finally, the result of the variable display based on the fourth hold at the time of pre-reading winning is the jackpot display result.

As described above, in the third look-ahead notice effect, the player may not be able to hear the first and second specific sounds when the look-ahead lottery result based on the fourth hold is won. 3 If you can hear the specific sound, you can see the pre-reading notice effect for one time. In addition, the third look-ahead notice effect is displayed more than the second look-ahead notice effect when the display result is out of order. It is possible to give the impression that the expectation of the jackpot display result is lower than that of the second look-ahead notice effect. In such an impression, the variable display based on the 4th hold at the time of the look-ahead winning after the 3rd look-ahead notice effect becomes the jackpot display result, so that the player can be surprised.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the player who can hear the specific sound having a high frequency band can see the pre-reading notice effect in which the number of pre-reading notices is large.

The first to third look-ahead notice flags in the RAM 553 of the sub-control device 262 described above correspond to the look-ahead notice control means of the invention according to (C1).

<Action and effect of Example 3>
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the audible frequency band (first specific sound: 19 kHz, second specific sound) is set by the first to third specific sound listening flags in the RAM 553 of the sub control device 262. : 17 kHz, 3rd specific sound: 15 kHz) is grasped, the production mode of the look-ahead notice effect, that is, the number of times of the first look-ahead notice effect and the number of look-ahead notices, that is, the number of times of the look-ahead notice is the largest (3 times). Is the second most common (twice) second look-ahead notice effect, and the third look-ahead notice effect with the least number of look-ahead notices (one time). A player who can hear a specific sound having a high frequency band can see a look-ahead notice effect in which the number of look-ahead notices is large. Therefore, since the player tries to recognize the higher audible frequency band as much as possible according to his / her age group, the interest of the look-ahead notice effect started based on the detection of the pressing of the effect button 80. Can be improved.

Example 4 is an embodiment of the invention described in (System D) described later.
The pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 to 47. FIG. 44 is a block diagram showing a main part of the electrical configuration of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing a variation display mode setting process by the sub control device 262 according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing a specific sound output process by the sub control device 262 according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 47 is a diagram for explaining a step-up notice effect.

The difference between the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 of Examples 1 to 3 will be described with reference to FIG. 44.

The sub-control device 262 of the present embodiment includes the first, second, and third first notification flags of the first embodiment, the first, second, and third reach promotion effect flags of the second embodiment, and the third embodiment. Instead of the first, second, and third look-ahead warning flags, the step-up notice effect of displaying the step-up image described later on the third symbol display device 42 multiple times based on the grasp of the audible frequency band is produced. A mode (number of steps) is determined, and in the determined mode, the first, second, and third step image display flags that control the step-up notice effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 42 are provided. , Different from Examples 1 to 3. In the following, the differences from the other examples will be mainly described.

The effect button input monitoring / effect process shown in FIG. 22 and the effect execution management process shown in FIG. 23 are also referred to in this embodiment except for the step related to the one-shot notification effect. In this embodiment, the variation pattern with the specific sound effect corresponding to step S1701 is the reach (premium reach) with the highest expectation that a big hit will occur, and the variation pattern determined to perform the step-up notice effect. Is. In the specific sound listening determination process shown in FIG. 24, the step of counting the number of times of specific sound listening is referred to by replacing it with the step of setting the above-mentioned first, second, and third step image display flags to "1".

<Variable display mode setting process>
The variation display mode setting process according to the fourth embodiment will be described below with reference to FIG. 45.

As shown in FIG. 45, in step S3801, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 proceeds to step S2302 if it has received the variation pattern designation command, and proceeds to step S2308 if it has not received it.

In step S3802, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the fluctuation pattern designation command is the premium reach. The premium reach is a reach effect with the highest expectation that a big hit will occur, and if the reach effect appears, the big hit will be almost confirmed. It should be noted that it may be determined whether or not the reach is a specific reach other than the premium reach. If it is a premium reach, the process proceeds to step S3803, and if it is not a premium reach, this process ends.

In step S3803, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not to perform the step-up notice effect. If the step-up notice effect is performed, the process proceeds to step S3804, and if the step-up notice effect is not performed, the process proceeds to step S3806.

In step S3804, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the step-up notice effect flag to "1". In step S3805, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets a display command for the symbol sequence variation including the step-up notice effect, and ends this process.

In step S3806, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets a display command for the symbol sequence variation that does not include the step-up notice effect, and ends this process.

In step S3807, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 proceeds to step S3808 if it has received the decorative symbol designation command, and ends this process if it has not received it.

In step S3809, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets a stop display command according to the designated stop symbol, and ends this process.

<Specific sound output period setting process>
As shown in FIG. 46, in step S3901, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the specific sound effect start flag is “1”. The specific sound effect start flag is set to "1" when it is the reach (premium reach) with the highest expectation that a big hit will occur and it is determined that the step-up notice effect is to be performed. If the specific sound effect start flag is "1", the process proceeds to step S3902 to start the specific sound effect, otherwise the process ends.

In step S3902, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 issues a specific sound effect display start command for controlling the display control device 45 to display the display necessary for starting the specific sound effect on the third symbol display device 42. set.

In step S3903, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the third specific sound output timing has arrived in the step-up notice effect. The third specific sound is a specific sound in the lowest frequency band among the three specific sounds output in the step-up notice effect. If it is the third specific sound output timing, the process proceeds to step S3904, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3912.

In step S3904, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the third specific sound output flag to "1", sets the third specific sound output start command, and proceeds to step S3905. The third specific sound output end command is transmitted to the voice output control device 47. The third specific sound output period in step S3904 corresponds to the first step period in the step-up notice effect.

In step S3905, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 subtracts the timer and counts the output period in which the third specific sound is output. In step S3906, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the value of the timer has become 0. If the value of the timer is not 0, the process proceeds to step S3908, and if the value of the timer becomes 0, the process proceeds to step S3907 described later.

In step S3907, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the third specific sound output flag to "0" and sets the first specific sound output end command. The first specific sound output end command is transmitted to the voice output control device 47. This ends this process.

In step S3908, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the third specific sound listening flag described above in step S2007 of FIG. 24 is "1". If the third specific sound listening flag is "1", the process proceeds to step S3907 described above, otherwise (if "0"), this process ends.

When the third specific sound listening flag is set to "1", the first step image display flag indicating that the first step effect in the step-up notice effect is started is also set to "1". The first step image display flag is provided in the RAM 553 of the sub control device 262.

When the first step image display flag is set to "1", the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the first step information display command. The first step information display command is transmitted to the display control device 45. The display control device 45 starts the first step effect in the step-up notice effect based on the first step information display command, and displays the first step image SU1 described later. When the first step effect period ends, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 returns the first step image display flag to "0".

Next, in step S3910, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the second specific sound output timing has arrived in the step-up notice effect. If it is the second specific sound output timing, the process proceeds to step S3911, otherwise the process proceeds to step S3919.

In step S3912, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the third specific sound listening flag is “1”. If the third specific sound listening flag is "1", the process proceeds to step S3913, otherwise the process ends.

In step S3913, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the second specific sound output flag to "1", sets the second specific sound output start command, and proceeds to step S3914. The second specific sound output start command is output to the voice output control device 47. The second specific sound output flag is a flag that raises the frequency band by one step from the third specific sound to the second specific sound and outputs the flag based on the fact that the third specific sound listening flag is set to "1". The second specific sound output period in step S3913 corresponds to the second step period in the step-up notice effect.

In step S3914, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 subtracts the timer and counts the output period of the second specific sound. In step S3915, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the value of the timer is 0. When the value of the timer becomes 0, the process proceeds to step S3916. In step S3916, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the second specific sound output flag to "0" and sets the second specific sound output end command. The second specific sound output end command is transmitted to the voice output control device 47. This ends this process.

If the value of the timer is not 0, the process proceeds to step S3917. In step S3917, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the second specific sound listening flag described above in step S2005 of FIG. 24 is "1". If the second specific sound listening flag is "1", the process proceeds to step S3916 described above, otherwise (if "0"), this process ends.

When the second specific sound listening flag is set to "1", the second step image display flag indicating that the second step effect in the step-up notice effect is started is also set to "1". The second step image display flag is provided in the RAM 553 of the sub control device 262.

When the second step image display flag is set to "1", the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the second step information display command. The second step information display command is transmitted to the display control device 45. As shown in FIG. 47, the display control device 45 starts the second step effect in the step-up notice effect based on the second step information display command, and during the second step effect period, the above-mentioned first step image SU1 Instead of, the second step image SU2, which will be described later, is displayed. When the second step effect period ends, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 returns the second step image display flag to "0".

In step S3919, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the first specific sound output timing has arrived in the step-up notice effect. If it is the first specific sound output timing, the process proceeds to step S3922. If it is not the third specific sound output timing, this process ends.

In step S3921, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the second specific sound listening flag is set to "1". If the second specific sound listening flag is "1", the process proceeds to step S3922, otherwise the process ends.

In step S3922, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the first specific sound output flag to "1", sets the first specific sound output start command, and proceeds to step S3923. The first specific sound output start command is output to the voice output control device 47. The first specific sound output flag is a flag that raises the frequency band by one step from the second specific sound to the first specific sound and outputs the flag based on the fact that the second specific sound listening flag is set to "1". The first specific sound output period in step S3922 corresponds to the third step period in the step-up notice effect.

In step S3923, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 subtracts the timer and counts the output period of the first specific sound. In step S3924, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the value of the timer is 0. When the value of the timer becomes 0, the process proceeds to step S3925. In step S3925, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the first specific sound output flag to "0" and sets the first specific sound output end command. The first specific sound output end command is transmitted to the voice output control device 47. This ends this process.

If the value of the timer is not 0, the process proceeds to step S3926. In step S3926, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the first specific sound listening flag described above in step S2003 of FIG. 24 is "1". If the first specific sound listening flag is "1", the process proceeds to step S3625 described above, otherwise (if "0"), the present process is terminated.

In step S3926, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the first specific sound listening flag to "1" and sets the third step image display flag indicating that the third step effect is started in the step-up notice effect. Set to "1". The third step image display flag is provided in the RAM 553 of the sub control device 262.

When the third step image display flag is set to "1", the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the third step information display command. The third step information display command is transmitted to the display control device 45. As shown in FIG. 47, the display control device 45 starts the third step effect in the step-up notice effect based on the third step information display command, and during the third step effect period, the above-mentioned second step image SU2 Instead of, the third step image SU3, which will be described later, is displayed. When the third step effect period ends, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 returns the third step image display flag to "0".

The CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the specific sound effect start flag to 0 at the end of this process.

<Example of step-up notice production>
An example of the step-up notice effect will be described with reference to FIG. 47.

As for the step-up notice effect, the jackpot expectation increases as the color of the image displayed in the first step image SU1, the second step image SU2, and the third step image SU3 improves (changes from silver to gold to rainbow). It is a growing production. In this example, the step-up notice effect is displayed up to three times in a row during the variable display period. The variable display period is set to 40 seconds, and the latter 2 seconds is set to the definite display period. In addition, the reach effect is started 8 seconds after the start of the fluctuation. The specific sound effect period is set during the reach effect period from 8 seconds to 32 seconds after the start of fluctuation. The third specific sound (15 kHz) output possible period is set 8 to 16 seconds after the start of fluctuation, and the second specific sound (17 kHz) output possible period is set 16 to 24 seconds after the start of fluctuation, and the first The specific sound (19 kHz) output enable period is set 24 seconds to 32 seconds after the start of fluctuation.

The third specific sound output period is set for 2 seconds of the third specific sound output possible period, that is, 10 to 12 seconds after the start of fluctuation. The second specific sound output period is set for 2 seconds of the second specific sound output possible period, that is, 20 to 22 seconds after the start of fluctuation. The first specific sound output period is set for 2 seconds of the second specific sound output possible period, that is, 28 to 30 seconds after the start of fluctuation.

When the effect button 80 is operated at the timing t1 (11 seconds after the start of fluctuation) within the third specific sound validity determination period, the first step image SU1 is displayed for 2 seconds from the timing when the third specific sound output possible period ends. Will be done. The first step image SU1 suggests that the reach effect is normal reach during the first step effect period, for example, the characters "I heard up to 15 kHz" and "You are still normal." Are silver. It is an image displayed on the third symbol display device 42. If the effect button 80 is not operated within the third specific sound validity determination period, the first step image SU1 is not displayed, and finally the jackpot display result is obtained.

It should be noted that the step-up notice effect may be displayed not only when the jackpot display result is obtained but also when the off-display result is obtained. In the case of an off-display result, the step-up notice effect may end with the first step image SU1 displayed. Then, at the time when the first step image SU1 is displayed, it is difficult for the player to predict the subsequent variation display result.

When the effect button 80 is operated at the timing t2 (21 seconds after the start of fluctuation) within the second specific sound validity determination period, the second step image SU2 is displayed for 2 seconds from the timing when the second specific sound output possible period ends. Will be done. The second step image SU2 suggests that the reach display is super reach, for example, the characters "I heard it up to 17 kHz. It's amazing!" And "You're a little more superhuman." Are in gold and the third pattern. It is an image displayed on the display device 42. If the effect button 80 is not operated within the second specific sound validity determination period, the step-up notice effect is displayed up to the first step, and finally the jackpot display result is obtained.

As described above, the second step image SU2 may be displayed when the display result is off. In that case, the step-up notice effect ends with the display of the second step image SU2. Then, when the second step image SU2 is displayed, the expectation that the jackpot display result will be increased is increased, but it is still difficult for the player to predict the subsequent fluctuation display result.

When the effect button 80 is operated at the timing t3 (29 seconds after the start of fluctuation) within the first specific sound validity determination period, the third step image SU3 is displayed for 2 seconds from the timing when the first specific sound output possible period ends. Will be done. The third step image SU3 suggests that the reach production is a premium reach, for example, characters such as "I heard it up to 19 kHz. Wow! Wow!" And "You are a superhuman." 3 It is an image displayed on a symbol display device 42. In this way, when the effect button 80 is operated within the first specific sound validity determination period, the player can see all of the first step image SU1 to the third step image SU3 in the step-up notice effect. If the effect button 80 is not operated within the first specific sound validity determination period, the step-up notice effect is displayed up to the second step, and finally the jackpot display result is obtained.

The third step image SU3 is displayed when the jackpot is confirmed or when the jackpot expectation is high, such as when the probability of the jackpot display result is about 90%. Then, when the third step image SU3 is displayed, the player's expectation that the jackpot display result will be obtained can be maximized.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the player who can hear the specific sound having a high frequency band can see the step-up notice effect having a large number of steps for a longer time.

As described above, in the step-up notice effect, if all the first specific sound to the third specific sound can be heard, all the first to third step images SU1 to SU3 are displayed. On the other hand, if the second and third specific sounds can be heard, the first and second steps S information SU1 and SU2 are displayed. If only the third specific sound can be heard, only the third step information SU1 is displayed.

The above-mentioned first to third step images SU1 to SU3 correspond to the specific step information of the invention according to (D1). The first to third step image display flags in the RAM 553 of the sub control device 262 described above correspond to the step-up effect control means of the invention according to (D1).

<Action and effect of Example 4>
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, the audible frequency band (first specific sound: 19 kHz, second specific sound) is set by the first to third specific sound listening flags in the RAM 553 of the sub control device 262. Based on the fact that the sound: 17 kHz, the third specific sound: 15 kHz) is grasped, it is possible to listen to all the first to third specific sounds in the production mode of the step-up notice effect, that is, in the first to third steps. As a result, all of the 1st to 3rd step images SU1 to SU3 can be displayed, or the 2nd and 3rd specific sounds can be heard in the 1st to 3rd steps, so that the 1st and 2nd step images SU1 and 2 can be heard. It is different whether SU2 is displayed or only the first step image SU1 is displayed because only the third specific sound can be heard in the first to third steps. A player who can hear a specific sound having a high frequency band can see a step-up notice effect with a large number of steps over a longer period of time. Therefore, since the player tries to recognize the higher audible frequency band as much as possible according to his / her age, the interest of the step-up notice effect started based on the detection of the pressing of the effect button 80. Can be improved.

Example 5 is an example of the invention described in (E system) described later.
The pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 to 50. FIG. 48 is a front view of the game board 30 of the fifth embodiment. FIG. 49 is a block diagram showing a main part of the electrical configuration of the fifth embodiment. FIG. 50 is a diagram illustrating an opening number suggestion effect and an advantageous gaming state suggestion effect.

The difference between the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment and the examples 1 to 4 will be described with reference to FIG. 48.

As shown in FIG. 48, the game board 30 is arranged below the first starting port 33a arranged at two locations on the left side and the right side below the board surface, and below the first starting port 33a on the lower left side of the board surface. It is provided with a second starting port (chucker) 33b. The second starting port 33b changes between a normal state in which the game ball B cannot enter and a specific state in which the game ball B is easier to enter than in the normal state. It is equipped with. Further, the game board 30 is provided with a third starting port (through gate) 34 through which the game ball B can pass, above the wind turbine 37.

Further, the game board 30 is provided with a winning device 200 extending in the vertical direction in the center of the game area. The winning device 200 can divide the internal space into an upper main body 200a and a lower main body 200b. The winning device 200 includes two upper entry openings 201a and 201b provided in the upper main body 200a at upper positions on both the left and right sides and capable of entering the game ball B, and blades 203a for opening and closing the upper entry openings 201a and 201b. The frame-shaped frame member is provided with 203b and a guide passage portion 202 for guiding the game ball B that has entered the upper ball entrances 201a and 201b.

Further, the winning device 200 includes a stage 203 that allows the game ball B guided by the guide passage unit 202 to stay visually, and a discharge unit 204 that discharges the game ball B guided by the stage 203 to the lower main body 200b. , A variable display device 60 that performs various variable displays and display effects is provided on the back side of the stage 203.

The winning device 200 is provided to the player by allowing the game ball B discharged from the discharge unit 204 to enter the lower body 200b into the lower body portion 205 and the game ball B. The specific winning section 210 (V zone) that triggers the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state, the normal winning section 212 that allows the game ball B to enter separately from the specific winning section 210 (V zone), and the lower entry section. The game ball B wins a prize in the specific winning unit 210 or the normal winning unit 212 in contact with the rolling surface 214 on which the game ball B entered from the unit 205 rolls and the game ball B rolling on the rolling surface 214. It is equipped with a movable drive body 216 (movable accessory) that is distributed in such a manner.

As shown in FIG. 49, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment includes a main control device 261 and a sub control device 262, similarly to the above-described first embodiment.

The main control device 261 detects that the game ball B has entered the first start port 33a and the first start port sensor 33a1 and the second start port 33b. A second start port sensor 33b3, a third start port sensor 34a for detecting that the game ball B has passed through the through gate 34, and a V detection sensor 43 for detecting that the game ball has entered the specific winning unit 210. , The detection sensor 44 that detects the game ball B that has entered the normal winning section 212, and the passing sensor 206 for detecting the number of winning balls that detects the game ball that passes through the lower entry section 205 and enters the lower body 200b. It is connected.

The main control device 261 drives the blade drive device 49 by using the detection signal from the first start port sensor 33a1 or the second start port sensor 33b3 as a trigger to open the blades 203a and 203b. The blades 203a and 203b can be opened once at the same time (open for 2 seconds → closed) and twice at the same time (open for 2 seconds → closed for 1 second → open for 2 seconds → closed). There is a pattern. The main control device 261 includes a random number for determining the number of times of opening for determining the number of times of opening by lottery.

The sub control device 262 displays on the variable display device 60 a display effect for notifying the player whether the opening pattern is the first opening pattern or the second opening pattern according to the lottery result in the main control device 261. The display control device 45 is instructed to do so. The display effect time is a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds from the ball entry detection by the first start port sensor 33a1 or the second start port sensor 33b3). That is, after the video "Bubbles boil in the sea" showing the state where the lottery of the opening pattern is being performed is displayed for 3 seconds, in the case of the first opening pattern, "open once" in the bubbles. The character image is displayed for 1 second. In the case of the second opening pattern, after the moving image of "bubbles boil in the sea" is displayed for 3 seconds, the character image of "opening twice" is displayed in the bubbles for 2 seconds.

The main control device 261 starts opening the blades 203a and 203b at a timing 4 seconds after the ball entry detection by the first start port sensor 33a1 or the second start port sensor 33b3. When the main control device 261 detects ball entry by the first start port sensor 33a1 or the second start port sensor 33b3 during the display effect on the variable display device 60, the main control device 261 detects the ball entry until the display effect ends. Hold. Up to four ball entry detection holds can be held, and the hold is displayed on the variable display device 60.

Further, the main control device 261 uses a detection signal from the third start port sensor 34a as a trigger to draw a lottery as to whether or not to open the second start port blades 33b1 and 33b2. The sub control device 262 gives an instruction to the display control device 45 to display the variable display indicating whether or not to open the second start port blades 33b1 and 33b2 on the variable display device 60 according to the lottery result. The display effect time is a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds from the passage detection by the third start port sensor 34a). That is, after the variable display of alternately displaying the symbol images of "○" and "×" indicating the state in which the lottery is being performed is performed for 3 seconds, if the lottery is won, "○" is stopped and displayed for 1 second. .. If the selection is unsuccessful, the fluctuation display of "○" and "x" is performed for 3 seconds, and then the "x" is stopped and displayed for 1 second.

The main control device 261 starts opening the second start port blades 33b1 and 33b2 at the timing when 4 seconds have elapsed from the ball entry detection by the third start port sensor 34a. When the third start port sensor 34a detects a ball entering during the variation display on the variable display device 60, the main control device 261 suspends the ball entry detection until the variation display ends. Up to four ball entry detection holds can be held, and the hold is displayed on the variable display device 60. In the normal game state, the lottery result is rarely "○", and in the time saving state described later, the lottery result is likely to be "○".

From the time when the lottery result of the opening pattern is displayed until the opening of the blades 203a and 203b is started (after the result of the variation display of "○" and "×" is displayed, the second starting port blade 33b1, The same applies until the opening of 33b2 is started) is relatively short. Therefore, when the launch of the game ball is stopped until the lottery result of the open pattern is obtained and the launch of the game ball is restarted after the lottery result of the open pattern is obtained, if it is the second open pattern, the second open pattern is being performed at the latest. It becomes easy to put the game ball into the upper entrance ball openings 201a and 201b, but if it is a one-time opening pattern, the game ball is entered into the upper entry ball openings 201a and 201b during one opening. Difficult to get. Of course, if the game ball is continuously fired even during the display effect, the problem of the opening pattern may not occur, but depending on the adjustment condition of the nails struck around the upper entrance balls 201a and 201b, the firing strength of the game ball may be increased. If it is not adjusted, it may be difficult to enter the ball into the upper ball entrances 201a and 201b. Therefore, in this embodiment, a specific sound effect period is provided in the middle of the display effect indicating the lottery of the open pattern, the first to third specific sound output periods are provided within the specific sound effect period, and the first to third specific sounds are provided. When the effect button 80 is operated within the validity determination period, the opening number suggestion effect of displaying the opening number suggestion image suggesting the lottery result of the opening pattern on the variable display device 60 is executed.

In the following, a configuration for executing the opening number suggestion effect will be described.

The CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 provides a specific sound effect period in the middle of the display effect indicating the lottery of the open pattern, provides the first to third specific sound output periods within the specific sound effect period, and sets the first to third specific sounds. When the effect button 80 is operated within the sound validity determination period, the frequency band of the specific sound heard by the player is grasped. The CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 displays the first to third specific sound listening images and the open count suggestion image on the variable display device 60 based on the fact that the frequency band of the specific sound heard by the player is grasped. The display control for the display control device 45 is performed so as to be performed.

Specifically, when the effect button 80 is operated within the first specific sound validity determination period, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the first specific sound listening flag to "1" and the result of the lottery is obtained. In the case of the first opening pattern, the once opening suggestion flag is set to "1". When the first specific sound listening flag and the one-time release suggestion flag are set to "1", the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the one-time release suggestion command and transmits it to the display control device 45. The display control device 45 receives the one-time opening suggestion command and performs display control to display the one-time opening suggestion image described later on the variable display device 60. Further, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the double open suggestion flag to "1" when the lottery result is the second open pattern, and similarly, the double open suggestion image described later is a variable display device. Display control to be displayed on 60 is performed.

Next, the jackpot state and the like will be described. When the game ball B enters (wins) the specific winning unit 210 (V zone) in the normal gaming state, the main control device 261 generates a jackpot state in which the blades 203a and 203b are opened and closed up to a predetermined round. , When a ball is entered into the normal winning section 212, a prize ball is only given to the winning ball and a big hit state is not generated. The main control device 261 includes a random number for determining the maximum round for determining the maximum number of rounds. The main control device 261 uses the detection signal from the V detection sensor 43 as a trigger to determine whether the maximum number of rounds is, for example, 2, 7, or 15 rounds, based on the random number for determining the maximum round at the time of detection. ..

In the jackpot state, the main control device 261 counts the number of winning (winning balls) of the game ball B to the lower main body 200b of the winning device 200, using the detection signal from the passing sensor 206 for detecting the number of winnings as a trigger. The main control device 261 ends one round when the number of winning balls B reaches a predetermined number (10 in this case). Further, the main control device 261 also ends one round when the blades 203a and 203b are opened and closed a predetermined number of times (18 times). That is, when the main control device 261 ends when any of the number of times the blades 203a and 203b are opened (18 times) or the number of winnings of the game ball B (10 pieces) reaches a predetermined number, one round game is played. And continue this round game up to the maximum round.

The main control device 261 returns the jackpot game state to the normal game state after performing the round game up to the maximum round, but may set the game state with a reduced working hours (time saving state). In the time saving state, the probability that the lottery result becomes "○" is increased and the variable display time is shortened until the number of times the blades 203a and 203b are opened after the jackpot state ends reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 200 times). It becomes a game state.

Here, the determination result of the maximum round is displayed on the variable display device 60, but whether or not the time is shortened after the jackpot state game is completed is not displayed on the variable display device 60. Assuming that the game is played without knowing the game state after the jackpot state ends, the player fires the game ball aiming at both the left and right first start ports 33a. Even in this case, when it is found that the lottery results of "○" and "×" are likely to be "○" (when it is found that the second starting port blades 33b1 and 33b2 are easy to open), after the jackpot state ends. The firing intensity of the game ball can be adjusted so as to aim at the left half of the game area 30a in order to aim at the second start port 33b and the through gate 34 by recognizing the game state of the game as a time-saving state. By the time it is recognized, the game ball fired at the right half of the game area 30a will be lost. Therefore, in this embodiment, during the jackpot state (specifically, during the ending effect), the time saving state suggestion effect that suggests whether or not the gaming state after the end of the jackpot state becomes the time saving state is executed. The execution of the time saving state suggestion effect is controlled by the time saving state suggestion flag provided in the RAM 553 of the sub control device 262, as in the above-mentioned opening number of times suggestion effect.

A specific example of the opening number of times suggestion effect and the time-saving state suggestion effect, which is an example of the advantageous game state suggestion effect, will be described with reference to FIG. 50.

<Example of opening number suggestion effect>
In this example, after 0 to 3 seconds after the ball entry detection at the first starting port 33a, a video showing a lottery of the opening pattern "bubbles boil in the sea" is displayed, and then the first opening pattern is used. In this case, a display effect that displays the character image of "open once"("opentwice" in the case of the second open pattern) in the bubble from 3 seconds to 4 seconds after the ball is detected (1 second). Is executed.

The specific sound effect period is set from 0 second to 3 seconds after the ball entry detection. The first specific sound output possible period is set from 0 second to 1 second after the ball entry detection, the second specific sound output possible period is set from 1 second to 2 seconds after the ball entry detection, and the third specific sound can be output. The output possible period is set from 2 seconds to 3 seconds after the ball entry detection. The first, second, and third specific sound output periods are set to the same period as the first, second, and third specific sound output possible periods. In the display effect, if the press of the effect button 80 is detected in any of the first and second specific sound validity determination periods, the specific sound is not output in the subsequent specific sound output period.

The image notifying the start of the specific sound effect may be displayed on the variable display device 60 at the same time as the ball entry detection at the first start port 33a, or may be periodically displayed during the launch of the game ball. Further, if it is predetermined that the number of times of opening is suggested by pressing the effect button 80 when the sound of keen is heard, it is not necessary to display the image notifying the start of the specific sound effect.

When the pressing of the effect button 80 is detected at the timing t1 (0.5 seconds after the ball entry detection) during the first specific sound validity determination period, the first opening is performed at the timing when the first specific sound output possible period ends. The suggestion effect is displayed on the variable display device 60. In the first opening suggestion effect, either the one-time opening suggestion image or the two-time opening suggestion image described below is displayed. The one-time opening suggestion image is an image in which a text image (first specific sound listening display image) such as "I heard up to 19 kHz. Wow! Wow!" Or "You are a superhuman." Is surrounded by a golden frame. Yes, it is displayed for 1 second. The second opening suggestion image is an image in which the first specific sound listening display image is surrounded by a silver frame, and is displayed for one second. In this way, when the pressing of the effect button 80 is detected during the first specific sound validity determination period, the player displays the one-time opening suggestion image and the two-time opening suggestion image as the number of times of opening (“1 time opening”, It can be seen 2 seconds before the character image of "open twice") is displayed.

When the pressing of the effect button 80 is detected at the timing t2 (1.5 seconds after the ball entry detection) during the second specific sound validity determination period, the second opening is performed at the timing when the second specific sound output possible period ends. The suggestion effect is displayed on the variable display device 60. In the second opening suggestion effect, either the one-time opening suggestion image or the two-time opening suggestion image described below is displayed. The one-time opening suggestion image is an image in which a character image (second specific sound listening display image) such as "I heard up to 17 kHz. It's amazing!" Or "You're a little more superhuman." Is surrounded by a golden frame. Yes, it is displayed for 1 second. The second opening suggestion image is an image in which the second specific sound listening display image is surrounded by a silver frame, and is displayed for one second. In this way, when the pressing of the effect button 80 is detected during the second specific sound validity determination period, the player displays the one-time opening suggestion image and the two-time opening suggestion image as the number of times of opening (“1 time opening”, It can be seen 1 second before the character image of "open twice") is displayed.

When the pressing of the effect button 80 is detected at the timing t2 (2.5 seconds after the ball entry detection) during the third specific sound validity determination period, the third opening is performed at the timing when the third specific sound output possible period ends. The suggestion effect is displayed on the variable display device 60. As the third opening suggestion effect, either the one-time opening suggestion image or the two-time opening suggestion image described below is displayed. The one-time opening suggestion image is an image in which a character image (third specific sound listening display image) such as "I heard up to 15 kHz." Or "You are still normal." Is surrounded by a gold frame. Displayed for a second. As the second opening suggestion image, an image in which the third specific sound listening display image is surrounded by a silver frame is displayed for one second. In this way, when the pressing of the effect button 80 is detected during the third specific sound validity determination period, the one-time opening suggestion image and the two-time opening suggestion image are displayed as the number of times of opening ("1 time opening", "2 times". Since the character image of "open") is displayed at the same time as the display timing, the merit of the opening number suggestion effect cannot be obtained unless a specific sound in a high frequency band can be heard.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the player who can hear the specific sound having a high frequency band can see the one-time opening suggestion image and the two-time opening suggestion image earlier. Therefore, even if the lottery result of the opening pattern is the first opening pattern (opening once), the game ball can be entered into the upper entrance ball openings 201a and 201b with a sufficient time.

<Example of time saving state suggestion production>
The ending effect is executed for 3 seconds after the end of the jackpot round game. The specific sound effect period is set from 0 second to 3 seconds after the start of the ending effect. The first specific sound output possible period is set 0 to 1 second after the start of the ending effect, the second specific sound output possible period is set 1 to 2 seconds after the start of the ending effect, and the third specific sound can be output. The outputable period is set 2 to 3 seconds after the start of the ending effect. The first, second, and third specific sound output periods are set to the same period as the first, second, and third specific sound output possible periods. When the pressing of the effect button 80 is detected in any of the first and second specific sound validity determination periods, the specific sound is not output in the subsequent specific sound output period.

When the pressing of the effect button 80 is detected at the timing t4 (0.5 seconds after the start of the ending effect) during the first specific sound validity determination period, the first time is shortened at the timing when the first specific sound output possible period ends. The suggestion effect is displayed on the variable display device 60. The first time saving suggestion effect is the same as the first opening suggestion effect, but the first specific sound may be output even when the time saving state is not attached. In this case, when the pressing of the effect button 80 is detected during the first specific sound validity determination period, the color of the frame surrounding the first specific sound listening image is set to black, suggesting that the image is not a time saving suggestion image. It is good to do it. The same applies to the second and third specific sounds.

When the press of the effect button 80 is detected at the timing t4 (1.5 seconds after the start of the ending effect) during the second specific sound validity determination period, the second time is shortened at the timing when the second specific sound output possible period ends. The suggestion effect is displayed on the variable display device 60.

When the pressing of the effect button 80 is detected at the timing t4 (2.5 seconds after the start of the ending effect) during the third specific sound validity determination period, the third time is shortened at the timing when the third specific sound output possible period ends. The suggestion effect is displayed on the variable display device 60.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the player who can hear the specific sound having a high frequency band can see the time saving suggestion image earlier. Therefore, it is possible to know that the time saving state is attached before the start of the time saving state or at an early stage after the time saving state starts, so that the right half of the game area 30a can be recognized before the time saving state is recognized. It is possible to reduce the loss of extra game balls that are aimed and fired.

The display of the one-time opening suggestion image, the two-time opening suggestion image, and the time-saving suggestion image described above corresponds to the notification of the transition to the specific gaming state of the invention according to (E1). The once open suggestion flag, the double open suggestion flag, and the time saving state suggestion flag described above correspond to the specific notification control means of the invention according to (E1).

<Action and effect of Example 5>
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, the audible frequency band (first specific sound: 19 kHz, second specific sound:) is set by the first to third specific sound listening flags in the RAM 553 of the sub control device 262. Based on the fact that 17 kHz, the third specific sound: 15 kHz) is grasped, the timing of notifying the opening of the blades 203a and 203b of the winning device 200, that is, the timing of 2 seconds before the display of the number of times of opening is displayed, the blade 203a. , Notify the release of 203b,
It depends on whether the blades 203a and 203b are notified at the timing one second before the number of times of opening is displayed, and whether the blades 203a and 203b are notified at the same timing as the number of times of opening is displayed. A player who can hear a specific sound having a high frequency band is notified of the opening of the blades 203a and 203b earlier. Therefore, since the player tries to recognize the higher audible frequency band as much as possible according to his / her age group, it is necessary to improve the interest of the effect of notifying the opening of the blades 203a and 203b of the winning device 200. Can be done. Further, instead of opening the blades 203a and 203b, it is possible to notify that the time saving state is attached after the jackpot round is completed.

The pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 56. The gaming system shown below can be applied to any of the pachinko machines 10 of Examples 1 to 5 described above.

FIG. 51 is an explanatory diagram showing an outline of the gaming system of the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the menu display process by the sub control device 262. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing a password input process by the sub control device 262. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing a game end code display process by the sub control device 262. FIG. 55 is a menu screen for a gaming machine-linked game. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the game machine interlocking game server processing.

As shown in FIG. 51, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the information about the game and the information about the player acquired in the game are read by the mobile communication terminal of the player via the QR code (registered trademark). When the player's mobile communication terminal accesses the URL converted from the QR code (registered trademark), this information is stored in the server operated by the gaming machine maker. The player can confirm the information stored in the server by using the mobile communication terminal. In addition, the player inputs the password issued from the server into the pachinko machine 10 to play the game, so that the information about the player acquired in the previous game is reflected in the game played this time (hereinafter referred to as “the game”). Game machine interlocking game) can be performed. Hereinafter, this gaming machine interlocking game will be described.

<Menu display processing>
A flowchart showing the menu display process by the sub-control device 262 will be described with reference to FIG. 52.

In step S5001, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the third symbol is in the variable display in the third symbol display device 42. If the third symbol is not in the variable display, the process proceeds to step S5002, and if the third symbol is in the variable display, the present process is terminated.

In step S5002, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the jackpot state is in progress. If it is not in the big hit state, the process proceeds to step S5003, and if it is in the big hit state, this process is terminated.

In step S5003, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the pressing of the effect button 80 is detected. If the pressing of the effect button 80 is detected, the process proceeds to step S5004, otherwise the process ends.

In step S5004, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 causes the third symbol display device 42 to display a menu screen for a gaming machine-linked game, which will be described later. Specifically, the display control device 45 controls to display the menu screen for the gaming machine interlocking game on the third symbol display device 42.

As shown in FIG. 55 (a), the menu screen for the game machine-linked game is provided with items such as "start the game", "end the game", "new registration", and "close the menu". The cursor with a triangle mark is located to the left of "Start the game".

In step S5005, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not "start game" is selected in the menu item. If "Start game" is selected, the process proceeds to step S5006, otherwise the process proceeds to step S5008. FIG. 55 (b) is a menu screen when the player presses the effect button 80 once while the menu screen of FIG. 55 (a) is displayed. On the menu screen of the figure (a), the item of "starting the game" is selected.

In step S5006, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 displays information necessary for starting the game as a game start code. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 55 (b), a game start code is displayed on the right side of the menu item. The game start code is a QR code (registered trademark) that can convert password information necessary for starting a game machine-linked game into a character string in URL format together with the address of a server operated by the game machine maker. The game start code is converted into character information in the URL format by being read by a mobile communication terminal having a reading function (bar code reader). When the player accesses the URL through the mobile communication terminal, the password required to start the game machine-linked game is given from the server. A close button is provided on the display screen of the game start code, and by pressing the effect button 80, the game start code display screen is closed and the menu screen is returned.

In step S5007, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs the password input process.

<Password input process>
The password input process by the sub-control device 262 will be described with reference to FIG. 53.

In step S5101, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the game start code is displayed. If the game start code is displayed, the process proceeds to step S5102, otherwise the process ends.

In step S5102, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the item "Enter password" is selected. If the item "Enter password" is selected, the process proceeds to step S5104, otherwise the process proceeds to step S5103.

In step S5103, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the item "No password is entered" is selected. If the item "Do not enter password" is selected, the process proceeds to step S5109, and if not, steps S5102 and S5103 are repeated.

In step S5104, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 displays the password input screen. On the password input screen, alphabets, numbers, a decision button, a back button, etc. are displayed, and the cursor moves by operating the selection buttons 71 to 74, and the effect button 80 is pressed at the position where the cursors overlap. Enters an alphabet or number with the cursor over it.

In step S5105, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the password has been input. Specifically, if the enter button is pressed on the password input screen, the process proceeds to step S5106, and if not, this process is repeated until the enter button or the back button is pressed.

In step S5106, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs the password authentication process and proceeds to step S5107. In step S5107, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 compares the entered password with the password stored in advance in the ROM 502, and determines whether or not the entered password is correct.

In step S5108, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs a password reflection process for reflecting the information included in the password in the game of the pachinko machine 10. The information contained in the password is information about the player stored in the server. The information about the player is information such as whether the specific sound of how high the specific sound could be heard or stored in the server in the above-described embodiment. If such information is reflected in the game of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to omit the process of re-examining how high the specific sound can be heard by the player in the game machine-linked game after the reflection. be able to.

In step S5109, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the gaming machine interlocking gaming flag to "1" and ends this process. As a result, the gaming machine interlocking game is started.

Return to FIG. 52. In step S5008, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the item "end the game" is selected on the menu screen. If "End the game" is selected, the process proceeds to step S5009, otherwise the process proceeds to step S5010.

In step S5009, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs the game end code issuance process.

<Code display processing for game end>
The game end code display process will be described with reference to FIG. 54.

In step S5201, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the game end code display screen is displayed. If "End the game" is selected and the game end code display screen is displayed, the process proceeds to step S5202, otherwise the process ends.

In step S5202, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the gaming machine interlocking gaming flag is "1". If the game machine interlocking game flag is "1", the process proceeds to step S5203, otherwise the process ends.

In step S5203, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 creates a game machine-linked game end code. The game machine-linked game end code is related to the model information, date and time information, information about the game such as the number of big hits and the big hit type, the number of fluctuations and the fluctuation type, and the player such as the pitch of the specific sound that can be heard. It is a QR code (registered trademark) in which information about a game including information is converted into a character string in a URL format together with the address of a server operated by a gaming machine maker. When the player accesses the URL by the mobile communication terminal, the information about the game stored in the server is updated, and the updated game result can be confirmed. A close button is provided on the display screen of the game machine-linked game end code, and by pressing the effect button 80, the game machine-linked game end code display screen closes and returns to the menu screen.

In step S5204, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 displays the created game machine-linked game end code and ends this process.

The information about the game and the player transmitted to the server may be changed to the pitch of the specific sound that can be heard, or other information may be transmitted together with the pitch of the specific sound that can be heard. The other information is, for example, the pitch of one notification sound (1st to 3rd) in the case of the first embodiment, and the type (A to C) of the reach promotion effect in the case of the second embodiment. In the case of the third embodiment, it is the type of the look-ahead notice effect (first to third), and in the case of the fourth embodiment, it is the number of steps of the step-up notice effect and the type of the step-up image (first to third). In the case of the fifth embodiment, it is the type (first to third) of the opening number suggestion effect and the time saving state suggestion effect. By reading out these information transmitted to the server, the gaming machine maker is interested in information specific to the player who played the game with the gaming machine (player's age group, hearing ability, attention, and specific sound production). Etc.) can be grasped.

Return to FIG. 52. In step S5010, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not "new registration" is selected on the menu screen. If "new registration" is selected, the process proceeds to step S5011, otherwise the process proceeds to step S5012.

In step S5011, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 displays the new registration code. The new registration code is a QR code (registered trademark) that can convert information indicating that it is a new registration, model information about the gaming machine 10, date and time information, etc. into a character string in URL format together with the address of the server operated by the gaming machine manufacturer. ). When the player accesses the URL by the mobile communication terminal, he / she can confirm the screen for recording the game result of the player himself / herself provided in the server. A close button is provided on the display screen of the new registration code, and by pressing the effect button 80, the display screen of the new registration code is closed and the screen returns to the menu screen.

In step S5012, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not "close menu" is selected on the menu screen. If "Close menu" is selected, the process proceeds to step S5013, otherwise the process ends.

In step S5013, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 closes the menu screen and returns the screen display to the original screen display for the game.

<Game machine interlocking game server processing>
Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the game machine-linked game server processing performed on the server operated by the game maker will be described.

In step S5301, the server determines whether or not there has been an access from the player's mobile communication terminal. If there is access, the process proceeds to step S5302, and if there is no access, this process ends.

In step S5302, the server determines whether or not there is a game start request from the player's mobile communication terminal. Specifically, the server determines that the game start request has been made when the URL is accessed using the URL converted from the game start code. If there is a game start request, the process proceeds to step S5303, otherwise the process proceeds to step S5304.

In step S5303, the server creates a password including information about the player, and sends the created password to the player's mobile communication terminal.

In step S5304, the server determines whether or not there is a game end request from the player's mobile communication terminal. Specifically, the server determines that the game end request has been made when the URL is accessed using the URL converted from the game end code. If there is a game end request, the process proceeds to step S5305, otherwise the process proceeds to step S5308.

In step S5305, the server updates the information stored in the server based on the information about the game and the information about the player transmitted by using the URL converted from the game end code.

In step S5306, the server ranks based on the updated number of jackpots and jackpot type, the number of fluctuations and fluctuation type, and the pitch of the specific sound that can be heard. One of the merits of a player playing a game machine-linked game is a privilege image obtained according to this rank.

In step S5307, the server updates the display information displayed on the player's mobile communication terminal based on the updated information. As a result, the player can confirm the game result of the day and the rank and privilege image based on the game result.

In step S5308, the server determines whether or not there is a new registration request from the player's mobile communication terminal. Specifically, the server determines that there is a new registration request when it is accessed using the URL converted from the new registration code. If there is a new registration request, the process proceeds to step S5309, otherwise the process ends.

In step S5309, the server secures an area in the server required for the gaming machine-linked game performed by the player based on the new registration request.

<Action and effect of Example 6>
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, the audible frequency band (first specific sound: 19 kHz, second) grasped by the first to third specific sound listening flags in the RAM 553 of the sub control device 262. Information about the player such as the specific sound: 17 kHz, the third specific sound: 15 kHz) and the mode of the production based on the grasp of the audible frequency band, for example, in the first embodiment, the height of the one-shot notification sound (the first). 1 to 3), the type of reach promotion effect (A to C) in Example 2, the type of look-ahead advance notice effect (1st to 3rd) in Example 3, and the number of steps of step-up advance notice effect in Example 4 (1 to 3). In the first to third) and the fifth embodiment, information about the game such as the timing of the opening number suggestion effect and the time saving state suggestion effect can be transmitted to the gaming machine maker. From the transmitted audible frequency band, etc., the gaming machine manufacturer provides information specific to the player who played the game with the pachinko machine 10 (player's age group, hearing ability, attention, interest in specific sound production, etc.). Can be investigated. Thereby, the gaming machine maker can suitably investigate the information peculiar to the player who played the game with the pachinko machine 10 without waiting for the pachinko machine 10 to be collected.

The pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 60. FIG. 57 is a front view of the gaming board 30 of the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment. FIG. 58 is a diagram illustrating a game area of the game board 30. FIG. 59 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the game ball in the first right side game area 30c1. FIG. 60 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of a game ball in the second right side game area 30c2.

The game board 30 of the seventh embodiment has a game area 30c different from the game area 30a described in the first embodiment. Specifically, the game area 30c of the seventh embodiment is configured to perform a right-handed game in which a game ball is launched by a right-handed hit during a jackpot state. Hereinafter, the gaming area 30c will be described.

As shown in FIG. 57, in the game board 30 of the seventh embodiment, the center frame 47 is arranged in the center of the game area 30c, and the right side game area 30r, the left side game area 30l, and the lower side game are arranged so as to surround the center frame 47. A region 30d is formed.

As shown in FIG. 58, the right gaming region 30r is formed on the right side of the right outer edge portion 47r including the right wall 47r of the center frame 47. The right gaming area 30r is an area surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 58. The right outer edge portion 47rr is a portion of the outer edge of the center frame 47 that touches the alternate long and short dash line. The right wall 47r is a portion of the right outer edge portion 47r that is in contact with the alternate long and short dash line.

The left game area 30l is formed on the left side of the left outer edge portion 47l including the left wall 47l of the center frame 47. The left gaming area 30l is an area surrounded by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 58. The left outer edge portion 47ll is a portion of the outer edge of the center frame 47 that is in contact with the alternate long and short dash line. The left wall 47l is a portion of the left outer edge portion 47l that is in contact with the two-dot chain line of the thick line.

Specifically, the upstream end of the right game area 30r is provided from the right side of the center line CL that bisects the width of the game area 30c, and the upstream end of the left game area 30l is provided from the left side of the center line CL. .. The downstream end of the right game area 30r is a position where the game ball flowing down from the left game area 30l cannot be reached. The downstream end of the left game area 30l is a position where the game ball flowing down from the right game area 30r cannot reach. The center frame 47 is formed to have a narrower width than the center frame 47 of the first embodiment in order to leave a wider gaming area (right side gaming area 30r) on the right side of the center frame 47 than the center frame 47 of the first embodiment.

Further, in the game area 30c, a lower game area 30d is formed below the lower edge portion 47d of the center frame 47. The lower game area 30d is provided at a position where both the game ball flowing down the right side game area 30r and the game ball flowing down the left side game area 30l can reach. The lower gaming area 30d is an area surrounded by a broken line in FIG. 58. The lower edge portion 47d is a portion of the outer edge of the center frame 47 that touches the broken line.

The right wall 47r and the left wall 47l project from the surface of the game area 30c to the same height as the nail 39, and when a game ball flowing down the right game area 30r or the left game area 30l collides, an obstacle that repels the right wall 47r and the left wall 47l. Functions as. On the other hand, the right outer edge portion 47rr excluding the right wall 47r, the left outer edge portion 47ll excluding the left wall 47l, and the lower edge portion 47d are aligned at substantially the same height as the surface of the game area 30c. Therefore, the game balls that collide with the nail 39 planted along the right outer edge portion 47rr, the left outer edge portion 47ll, and the lower edge portion 47d are left and right along the lower side of the third symbol display device 42 inside the center frame 47. It may jump into the stage 47s (rolling region) extending in the direction.

In the right game area 30r, the right game area 30r is provided with a first right area 30r1 provided along the outer rail 52 corresponding to the right outer edge of the game area 30c and the wall portions 55 and 56 formed on the inner frame 12. A branch rail 401 is provided which separates the first right side region 30r1 and the second right side region 30r2 provided between the right outer edge portion 47rr of the center frame 47. The first right-sided game area 30r1 is an area with an upward-sloping diagonal line shown in FIG. 58, and the second right-sided game area 30r2 is an area with an upward-sloping diagonal line as shown in FIG. When the launching momentum is strong, the game ball launched by right-handed flow down the first right-sided gaming area 30r1, but when the launching momentum is weaker, it flows down the second right-hand side gaming area 30r2. Thereby, the player can select whether to let the game ball flow down to the first right side game area 30r1 or to flow down the game ball to the second right side game area 30r2 by the game ball launch operation.

Further, the right side game area 30r is located below the downstream end of the branch rail 401 so that the game ball flowing down the first right side game area 301 and the game ball flowing down the second right side game area 30r2 can enter. A variable winning device 32 is arranged. Regardless of whether the game ball is launched aiming at either the first right side game area 30r1 or the second right side game area 30r2, the game ball enters the variable winning device 32. However, it takes longer for the game ball flowing down the second right side game area 30r2 to enter the variable winning device 32 than for the game ball flowing down the first right side game area 30r1. This is because the second right side area 30r2 is provided with game parts (accessories) such as a windmill 37 and a nail 39 that change the flow direction of the game ball in various ways, but the first right side game area 30r1 is provided. This is because these accessories are not arranged. As a result, the player can play the game with a sharp hit digestion time depending on whether the game is played in the first right side game area 30r1 or the second right side game area 30r2.

Since no accessory is arranged in the first right side game area 30r1, the game balls launched into the first right side game area 30r1 during the jackpot state do not enter the variable winning device 32 during the interval period. , Enter the variable winning device 32. On the other hand, the game ball launched into the second right game area 30r2 during the jackpot state is changed in the flow direction toward the lower game area 30d before a part of the ball enters the variable winning device 32. Therefore, it is difficult to enter the variable winning device 32. Therefore, in the second right game area 30r2, launching the game ball into the second right game area 30r2 is more likely to start the first round than launching the game ball into the first right game area 30r1 during the jackpot gaming state. It takes a long time to digest the jackpot from to the end of the final round. As a result, the player can play the game in the jackpot game state for a long time when playing the game aiming at the second right side game area 30r2.

Further, the second right side game area 30r2 takes longer than the first right side game area 30r1 to digest the jackpot, but a game part (feature) such as the general winning opening 31 in which the prize ball is paid out is arranged. Therefore, a profit that cannot be obtained in the first right side gaming area 30r1 can be obtained. As a result, in the jackpot gaming state, it is possible to increase the motivation of the player who tries to play the game aiming at the second right side gaming area 30r2 which takes longer than the first right side gaming area 30r1.

Next, the board surface configuration of the second right game area 30r2 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60.

The second right side gaming area 30r2 is a form in which the flow direction of some of the game balls flowing down the second right side game area 30r2 during the jackpot game state is changed to a direction in which the ball can enter the general winning opening 31. It is composed of a first flow direction changing section 403 composed of a plurality of nails 39a planted in the above, and a plurality of nails 39b and 39d planted in a shape of changing the direction in which it is difficult to enter the variable winning device 32. It is provided with a second flow direction changing unit 405a, 405c (collectively referred to as a second flow direction changing unit 405).

The direction in which it is difficult to enter the variable winning device 32 is the direction in which the ball can enter the first starting port 33a if the second flow direction changing portion 405a is composed of the nail 39b, and is composed of the nail 39d. If it is the second flow direction changing portion 405c, it is the direction in which the ball can enter the out port 36. As described above, as the number of game balls whose flow direction is changed to a direction other than the variable winning device 32 increases, it becomes more difficult to enter the variable winning device 32, so that the jackpot digestion time can be further lengthened. On the other hand, since the flow direction of the game ball is changed to the first starting port 33a by the nail 39b of the second flow direction changing portion 405a, it is possible to obtain a profit based on the entry of the ball into the first starting port 33a. can. Further, in some cases, the flow direction of the game ball may be changed to the second starting port 33b instead of the first starting port 33a. The profit based on the entry of the ball into the first starting port 33a and the second starting port 33b is to increase the payout and hold of the prize ball.

Further, in the second right game area 30r2, the flow direction of a part of the game balls that have passed the left and right sides of the general winning opening 31 is changed to the direction of the lower game area 30d by the second flow direction change unit 405. A third flow down direction changing portion 407 composed of a nail 39e planted in a shape that makes it easy to enter the ball is provided in the variable winning device 32 before being changed to. In this way, by increasing the number of game balls whose flow direction is changed in the direction of the variable winning device 32, it becomes easier to enter the variable winning device 32, so that the relationship with the jackpot digestion time in the first right game area 30r1. Therefore, the jackpot digestion time in the second right game area 30r2 can be extended to the optimum length.

Further, in the second right game area 30r2, the jackpot digestion time is long by adjusting the ease of entering the ball into the variable winning device 32 and the ease of entering the winning device other than the variable winning device 32. , It is configured to obtain the same profit (prize ball) as when playing a game in the first right side game area 30r1 during one big hit state.

Specifically, the probability of entering the variable winning device 32 (hereinafter referred to as the second winning rate) among the gaming balls flowing down the second right gaming area 30r2 during the jackpot gaming state is the first right side during the jackpot gaming state. Of the game balls flowing down the game area 30r1, the probability of entering the variable winning device 32 (hereinafter referred to as the second winning rate) is set lower. For example, the first winning rate is about 100% and the second winning rate is about 60%.

In order to compensate for this low second winning rate, in the second right game area 30r2, among the game balls flowing down the second right side game area 30r2 during the jackpot game state, the flow direction is changed by the first flow direction changing unit 403. The percentage of game balls that are changed in the direction in which the ball can enter the general winning opening 31 is set to about 13%, and the flow direction is the direction of the first starting port 33a and the out opening 36 by the second flow direction changing unit 405. The percentage of game balls that are changed to is said to be about 27%.

As a result, the game ball is launched into the second right side gaming area 30r2 from the first right side gaming area 30r1 where stable entry into the variable winning device 32 can be expected, and the game ball is launched to the general winning opening 31 or the first starting opening 31a. It is increasing the player's willingness to play to get a prize ball or hold based on the entry of the ball.

Next, the prize balls acquired by the player in the jackpot game state will be described.

Here, it is assumed that there are 15 rounds in the jackpot game state, and the number of detections (counts) of the game balls required for one round to advance to the next round is 10 counts. The number of large prize-winning prize balls paid out per count in the variable winning device 32 is 11 balls. The number of prize balls paid out per count of the ordinary winning opening 31 is three. It is assumed that 100 game balls (0.6 seconds per ball) are fired in 60 seconds. Further, it is assumed that the interval time between rounds (the time when the variable winning device 32 is closed) is sufficiently shorter than the firing interval of the game ball and is such that the loss of the game ball does not occur. ..

In the game performed in the first right side game area 30r1 in the jackpot game state, it is assumed that 150 balls are required to be launched by the end of the 15th round. In this case, the profit (difference ball) earned by the player is the number of prize-winning balls x the number of counts x the number of rounds-the number of shots, and (11 [balls / count] x 10 [count] x 15 [round]- 150 [balls]) = 1500 balls. Further, the jackpot digestion time in the first right game area 30r1 is 150 [balls] x 0.6 [seconds / ball] = 90 seconds.

On the other hand, in the game performed in the second right side game area 30r2 in the jackpot game state, it is assumed that 250 balls are required to be launched by the end of the 15th round. Of these, it is assumed that 33 balls were entered in the normal winning opening 31, but no balls were entered in the first starting opening 33a. In this case, the profit (difference ball) earned by the player is (the number of large prize-winning prize balls x the number of counts x the number of rounds-the number of shots) + (the number of normal prize-winning prize balls x the number of counts), and (11 [balls]. / Count] x 10 [count] x 15 [round] -250 [ball]) + (3 [ball / count] x 33 [count]) = 1400 balls + 99 balls = 1499 balls. Further, the jackpot digestion time in the second right game area 30r2 is 250 [balls] x 0.6 [seconds / ball] = 150 seconds.

As described above, in the jackpot game state, the jackpot digestion time is longer in the case of playing the game in the second right side gaming area 30r2 than in the case of playing the game in the first right side game area 30r1, but the first right side game area 30r1 There is no big difference in the profit (difference ball) that the player can obtain regardless of which of the second right side gaming areas 30r2 is played. Therefore, if the player wants to quickly digest the jackpot game state, he / she performs a right-handed game aiming at the first right side game area 30r1 during the jackpot game state, but if he / she wants to enjoy the jackpot game state for a long time, the jackpot game state. Even if a right-handed game is performed while aiming at the second right side game area 30r2, the same profit as that of the first right side game area 30r1 can be obtained. You can reduce the disadvantages of.

Further, when playing a game in the first right side game area 30r1, the player only visually follows the game ball flowing down during the jackpot game state up and down along the branch rail 401, but the second right side game area. When playing a game in 30r2, it is possible to visually enjoy the whereabouts of the game ball flowing down while the flow direction is changed to the left and right by the nail 39 arranged in the second right side game area 30r2.

In addition, the player can select between the game in the first right side game area 30r1 and the game in the second right side game area 30r2 simply by adjusting the right-handed firing operation, and the game ball can be selected during the jackpot game state. The firing destination may be changed from the first right side gaming area 30r1 to the second right side gaming area 30r2, or from the second right side gaming area 30r2 to the first right side gaming area 30r1. Therefore, it is possible to increase the options for right-handed games during the jackpot game state.

The above-mentioned first right game area 30r1 corresponds to the first right side area of the present invention, and the above-mentioned second right side game area 30r2 corresponds to the second right side area of the present invention. The variable winning device 32 described above corresponds to the specific ball-entry means of the present invention, and the general winning opening 31, the first starting port 33a, and the second starting port 33b described above correspond to the game value-imparting means of the present invention. The first flow direction changing unit 403 and the second flow direction changing unit 405 described above correspond to the flow direction changing means of the present invention. The above-mentioned first flow-down direction changing unit 403 corresponds to the first flow-down direction changing means of the present invention, and the above-mentioned second flow-down direction changing unit 405 corresponds to the second flow-down direction changing means of the present invention. The center frame 47 described above corresponds to the first gaming component of the present invention, and the branch rail 401 described above corresponds to the second gaming component of the present invention. Further, the above-mentioned general winning opening 31 corresponds to the winning means of the present invention, and the above-mentioned first starting opening 33a corresponds to the first starting trigger generating means.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment, the right side gaming area 30r provided on the right side of the center line CL that bisects the width of the game area 30c to the left and right is the first right side gaming area 30r1. And the second right game area 30r2. The first right side gaming area 30r1 is provided along the right outer edge of the right side gaming area 30r, and the second right side gaming area 30r2 is provided on the left side of the first right side gaming area 30r1. Therefore, the game ball launched by right-handed flow down the first right game area 30r located on the outer edge side of the right game area 30r when the firing momentum is strong, but the first when the firing momentum is weaker than this. It flows down the second right game area 30r2 located inside the right game area 30r1. The variable winning device 32, which generates a jackpot game state in which a round game is performed a predetermined number of times, is a position where a game ball flowing down the first right side game area 30r1 and a game ball flowing down the second right side game area 30r2 can enter. Therefore, regardless of whether the game ball is launched aiming at either the first right side game area 30r1 or the second right side game area 30r2, the game ball enters the variable winning device 32. Since the general prize opening 31 gives a prize ball when the game ball flowing down the second right side game area 30r2 is entered, the player obtains a profit different from the profit obtained by the variable winning device 32. Give to.

The game ball launched aiming at the second right side game area 30r2 during the jackpot game state flows down toward the variable winning device 32, but among the game balls flowing down the second right side game area 30r2 during the jackpot game state. The flow direction of some game balls is changed by the first flow direction change unit 403 to a direction in which the ball can enter or pass through the general winning opening 31. Therefore, the variable winning device 32 is more likely to be launched aiming at the second right gaming area 30r2 than to be launched aiming at the first right gaming area 30r1 in the jackpot gaming state. Since the time to reach the variable winning device 32 is lengthened by the amount that the flow direction is changed in a direction other than the above, the time until the predetermined number of round games are completed can be lengthened, and the first right side game area 30r1 It is possible to get a prize ball that cannot be obtained with. Therefore, even when the jackpot game state of right-handed hitting is executed, if the player shoots the game ball aiming at the second right side game area 30r2, the game ball is fired aiming at the first right side game area 30r1. It is possible to play a game in a jackpot game state for a longer time, and it is also possible to obtain a prize ball that cannot be obtained in the first right side game area 30r1. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the jackpot game state in the right-handed game.

In this embodiment, the second right gaming area 30r2 is provided with a through gate 34 in place of the normal winning opening 31 of the seventh embodiment, and the second right gaming area 30d is provided with a second through gate 34 at a position different from that of the seventh embodiment. A starting port 33b is provided. Hereinafter, this point will be mainly described.

A board configuration of the game board 30 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62. FIG. 61 is a front view of the gaming board 30 of the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment. FIG. 62 is a diagram illustrating a flow of a game ball in the second right side game area 30r2 of the eighth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 61, in the second right side game area 30r2, a through gate 34 through which the game ball can pass is arranged at a position as high as the right corner of the third symbol display display device 42. .. In the lower gaming area 30d, the first starting port 33a is arranged at the same position as in the seventh embodiment, but unlike the seventh embodiment, the lower right side of the first starting port 33a (lower gaming area). A second starting port having second starting port blades 33b1 and 33b2 that operate in an open state in which the game ball is easy to enter and a closed state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than in the open state) (closer to the right end of 30d). 33b is arranged.

As shown in FIG. 62, the game ball flowing down the second right side region 30r2 passes through the gate of the through gate 34 or passes to the left and right sides of the through gate 34. As will be described later, about half of the game balls flowing down the second right side region 30r2 pass through the through gate 34. A part of the game balls that have passed through the through gate 34 enters the variable winning device 32 if the variable winning device 32 is open, and the direction of the lower gaming area 30d if the variable winning device 32 is closed. Flow down to. If the second starting port 33b is in the open state, a part of the game ball whose flow has not been changed to the variable winning device 32 may enter the second starting port 33b.

On the left side of the second starting port 33b, a nail is planted so as to change the traveling direction of at least a part of the game ball flowing down the left game area 30l to a direction in which it is difficult to enter the second starting port 33b. A fourth flow-down direction changing portion 407 configured for 39h is provided. Therefore, it is difficult for the game ball launched to aim at the left game area 30l to enter the second start opening 33b, and it is often the case that the game ball enters the out opening 36. On the other hand, when the game ball is launched aiming at the second right side game area 30r2, it is easy to enter the second start opening 33b. The fourth flow-down direction changing unit 407 may not allow the game ball flowing down the left game area 30l to enter the second start port 33b at all.

Next, the relationship between the second right side gaming area 30r2 and the gaming state will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62.

Similar to the description in the first embodiment, the variation display of the first symbol (for example, a special symbol) as the identification information is the first symbol display triggered by the winning of the first starting port 33a and the second starting port 33b. In addition to being performed by the device 40, variable display of the third symbol (for example, a decorative symbol) as identification information is performed by the third symbol display device 42. When the variable display of the first symbol and the third symbol is the winning result, the variable winning device 32 opens and closes the large winning opening 32a between the open and closed states of the opening and closing door 32b a predetermined number of times (round). Number) The game shifts to the jackpot game state to be performed, and after the end of the jackpot game state, the probability that the variable display becomes the winning result shifts to the normal game state or the high probability probability change state.

Triggered by the passage of the through gate 34, the second symbol display device 41 performs variable display of the second symbol (for example, a normal symbol) as identification information. When the variation display of the second symbol stops the predetermined symbol (for example, the “◯” symbol), the second start port blades 33b1 and 33b2 operate in the open state for a predetermined time.

In the present embodiment, the through gate 34 is set with a high probability that the “◯” symbol will stop. For example, the through gate 34 in this embodiment is set so that the “◯” symbol stops with a probability of 1/100. Here, as in the case of the seventh embodiment, when playing a game in the second right side game area 30r2 during the big hit game state, it is assumed that 250 game balls need to be launched by the end of the final round. Then, since about 125 gaming balls pass through the through gate 34 during the jackpot gaming state, there is an opportunity for the "○" symbol to stop and the second starting port 33b to open at least once during the jackpot gaming state. Occur.

As shown in FIG. 62, the second right side gaming area 30r2 is a direction in which some of the game balls flowing down the second right side gaming area 30r2 in the jackpot state are likely to pass through the through gate 34. It is provided with a first flow direction changing portion 403 composed of a plurality of nails 39f planted in a shape of changing to. By the nail 39f, about half of the game balls flowing down the second right side game area 30r2 are configured to pass through the through gate 34.

Further, the second right game area 30r2 changes the flow direction of some of the game balls that have passed through the through gate 34 to a direction in which it is difficult to enter the variable winning device 32, and enters the variable winning device 32. A second flow-down direction changing portion composed of a plurality of nails 39g planted in a shape that further changes a part of the game ball changed in a direction difficult to ball into a direction in which the ball can enter the second starting port 33b. It is equipped with 405d.

As a result, the player can obtain a profit based on the entry into the second starting port 33b, which cannot be obtained in the first right side gaming area 30r1, by playing the game aiming at the second right side gaming area 30r2. .. Since the second starting port 33b is opened for a predetermined time, it is possible to allow a plurality of game balls to enter the second starting port 33b during the opening time. The profit based on the entry of the second starting port 33b is the payout of the prize ball and the increase of the hold.

Therefore, the player often launches the game ball aiming at the first right side game area 30r1 when there is not enough time to play the game, but when there is enough time to play the game, the second player In many cases, the game ball is launched aiming at the second right game area 30r2, which is expected to enter the starting port 33b.

In this way, even when the jackpot game state is performed in the same right-handed game, when aiming at the first right side game area 30r1, only aiming at the ball entering the variable winning device 32, but aiming at the second right side game area 30r2. In that case, profit can be expected to be added by stopping the variable display of the second symbol at the "○" symbol. Therefore, since the game is different between the first right side game area 30r1 and the second right side game area 30r2, it is possible to reduce that the player gets bored.

Further, the game ball launched aiming at the second right game area 30r2 does not enter the variable winning device 32, not only when the ball enters the variable winning device 32 arranged in the second right game area 30r2. Since the game ball may enter the second starting port 33b arranged in the lower game area 30d, the player's motivation can be maintained even if the ball does not enter the variable winning device 32. A game area other than the second right side game area 30r2 can also be positively utilized.

The above-mentioned second starting port blades 33b1 and 33b2 correspond to the operating members of the present invention, and the second starting port 33b corresponds to the game value adding means and the second starting trigger generating means of the present invention. The gate 34 corresponds to the game ball passage detecting means of the present invention.

In Examples 7 and 8, a general winning opening 31 and a through gate 34 corresponding to the game value-giving means were provided in the second right-side game area 30r2, but in this embodiment, the accessory corresponding to the game value-giving means is provided. Will be described as an example in which the second right game area 30r2 is not provided.

A board configuration of the game board 30 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64. FIG. 63 is a front view of the gaming board 30 of the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment. FIG. 64 is a diagram illustrating a flow of a game ball in the second right side game area 30r2.

As shown in FIG. 63, in the second right game area 30r2, a first starting port 33a in which a part of the game balls flowing down the second right game area 30r2 is arranged in the lower game area 30d. It is provided with a warp passage component 47w corresponding to the guiding means for guiding to.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 64, a part of the game balls flowing down the second right game area 30r2 can enter the right wall 47r of the center frame 47. A warp passage component 47w that guides the game ball to the first starting port 33a is provided. The warp passage component 47w is provided with a warp entrance 47wa in which a game ball can enter at a position protruding from the outer surface of the right wall 47r, and the game ball that has passed through the warp passage 47wc is discharged to the inner surface of the right wall 47r. A warp outlet 47wb is provided. The warp passage component 47w is configured so that the game ball discharged from the warp outlet 47wb can easily enter the discharge inlet 47sa after swinging the stage 47s left and right.

The stage 47s is formed by connecting a mountain portion and a valley portion in the left-right direction, and after rolling the game ball that has flowed into the center frame 47 for several seconds, it is discharged toward the front or is provided on the inner back side of the center. Let the ball enter the discharge inlet 47sa. The game ball ejected toward the front has a high probability of entering the out opening 36 unless it is ejected from directly above the first starting opening 33a. The game ball that entered the discharge entrance 47sa has mountains and valleys so that the swing stops more easily in the center of the stage 47s than the game ball that jumps into the stage 47s from the nail 39b around the stage 47s. It has been adjusted. Further, since a concave groove is formed in the center of the stage 47s toward the back side, it is easy for a game ball whose swing has stopped at the center of the stage 47s to enter the discharge inlet 47sa.

The game ball that has entered the discharge inlet 47sa passes below the stage 47s and is discharged from the discharge outlet 47sb that opens into the game area 30. Since the game ball discharged from the discharge outlet 47sb is located directly above the first starting port 33a, it is easy to enter the first starting port 33a. As described above, the warp passage component 47w is configured to first guide the game ball that has entered the warp entrance 47wa to the stage 47s and then to the first starting port 33a via the stage 47s.

The second right game area 30r2 can enter the warp entrance 47wb of the warp passage component 47w in the flow direction of some of the game balls flowing down the second right game area 30r2 during the jackpot game state. It is provided with a first flow direction changing portion 403 composed of nails 39h planted in a shape of changing the direction. A part of the game balls flowing down the second right side game area 30r2 is guided to the lower game area 30d by the warp passage component 47w, and the first start port arranged in the lower game area 30d. It is possible to enter the ball in 33a.

Therefore, it is possible to give a profit that cannot be obtained in the first right side game area 30r1 to the player who selects the second right side game area 30r2 and causes the game ball to flow down. Further, when the game ball is launched aiming at the second right side game area 30r2, the game ball is swung to the stage 47s other than the second right side game area 30r2, or the game ball is made to flow down to the lower game area 30d. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored with the jackpot game state in the right-handed game.

The lower gaming region 30d described above corresponds to the third gaming region of the present invention, and the warp passage component 47w described above corresponds to the guiding means of the present invention.

In the seventh embodiment, the second right side gaming area 30r2 is configured to obtain the same profit (prize ball) as when playing a game in the first right side gaming area 30r1 during one big hit state. As described above, the second right side gaming area 30r2 may be configured to obtain more profit (prize ball) than when playing a game in the first right side gaming area 30r1 during one big hit state.

The board surface configuration of the game board 30 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 65. FIG. 65 is a front view of the gaming board 30 of the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment.

The second right side gaming area 30r2 of the game board 30 of this embodiment is planted in a direction that makes it easier to enter the general winning opening 31 than the first flow direction changing portion of the seventh embodiment. It is provided with a first flow direction changing portion 403a composed of nails 39a. That is, in the second right-side game area 30r2 of the present embodiment, among the game balls flowing down the second right-side game area 30r2 during the jackpot game state, the flow-down direction is entered into the general winning opening 31 by the first flow-down direction changing unit 403. The ratio of the game balls changed in the direction in which the balls are possible is larger than that in the seventh embodiment.

Compared with the ease of entering the ball into the other general winning openings 31, the general winning opening 31 arranged in the second right gaming area 30r2 is larger than the general winning opening 31 arranged in the left gaming area 30l. Nail 39a is planted so that the game ball can easily enter.

As a result, in the second right side gaming area 30r2 of the present embodiment, the jackpot digestion time is longer than that of the first right side gaming area 30r1, but since the game ball can easily enter the general winning opening 31, the first one. It is possible to obtain more profits (prize balls) than when playing a game in the first right side game area 30r1 during the jackpot game state. Similarly, the profit (difference ball) that the player can obtain in the one jackpot game state is larger than the profit (difference ball) that the player can obtain in the one jackpot game state in Example 7. You can get the difference ball).

Therefore, as long as the player has sufficient time to play the game, the original profit (variable prize) that can be obtained during the jackpot game state by firing the game ball aiming at the second right side game area 30r2 during the jackpot game state. It is possible to obtain a profit (profit based on the winning of the device 12) and a profit added to it (profit based on the winning of the general winning opening 31). In addition, if the player does not have enough time to play the game, the original profit that can be obtained in the big hit game state in a short time by firing the game ball aiming at the first right side game area 30r1 during the big hit game state. (Profit based on winning the variable winning device 12) can be obtained. As a result, even if the player may or may not have sufficient time to play the game, it is possible to improve the interest of the jackpot state in the right-handed game.

In Examples 7 to 10, a configuration in which the first right side game area 30r1 and the second right side game area 30r2 are divided into the first right side game area 30r1 and the second right side game area 30r2 in the jackpot game state has been described as an example. It may be configured to be divided into 30r and 30r.

The board surface configuration of the game board 30 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 66. FIG. 66 is a front view of the gaming board 30 of the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment.

The game board 30 of the present embodiment can enter the variable winning device 32 regardless of which of the first right side game area 30r1, the second right side game area 30r2, and the left side game area 30l is fired. It is configured as follows.

Specifically, since the variable winning device 32 of this embodiment is arranged substantially in the center of the lower gaming area 33d, the first right-side gaming area 30r1, the second right-side gaming area 30r2, and the left-side gaming area 30l. It is possible for any of the game balls that have flowed down to enter the variable winning device 32. Further, in order to realize this, the first right game area 30r1 changes the flow direction of the game ball flowing down the passage formed by the branch rail 401 to a direction in which the variable winning device 32 can enter the ball. It is provided with a third flow direction changing portion 407 composed of 39 liters of nails planted in. In the second right game area 30r2, one general winning opening 31 is arranged.

In the left game area 30l, one through gate 34 and two general winning openings 31 are arranged on the downstream side thereof. Further, the left game area 30l has a fourth flow-down direction changing portion 409 composed of nails 39m planted so as to change the flow-down direction of the flow-down game ball into a direction that allows the ball to pass through the through gate 34, and through. It is composed of nails 39n planted in a shape that changes the flow direction of the game ball that has passed through the gate 34 or either side thereof to a direction that allows the ball to enter either of the two general winning openings 31. The flow direction of the fifth flow direction changing portion 411 and the game ball that has passed through the through gate 34 or either side thereof can be entered into either the first start port 33a or the second start port 33b. It is provided with a sixth flow-down direction changing portion 413 composed of nails 39o planted in a shape that changes the direction.

In the lower gaming area 33d, a first starting port 33a and a second starting port 33b are arranged directly above the variable winning device 32. The first starting port 33a can be entered by launching a game ball aiming at either the second right side game area 30r2 or the left side game area 30l. On the other hand, since the through gate 34 that triggers the opening of the second starting port 33b is arranged only in the left game area 30l, the second starting port 33b aims at the left game area 30l and is a game ball. If you do not fire, you will not enter the ball.

The profit (prize ball) obtained in one big hit game state is different between the first right side game area 30r1, the second right side game area 30r2, and the left side game area 30l. That is, when the game ball is launched aiming at the first right side game area 30r1, the prize ball based on the ball entering the variable winning device 32 is only obtained. When launching a game ball aiming at the second right game area 30r2, the prize ball based on the entry into the variable winning device 32 is added to the prize ball based on the entry into one general winning opening 31. There is also an increase in prize balls and holds based on entering the first starting port 33b. When launching a game ball aiming at the left game area 30 liters, the prize ball based on the entry into the variable winning device 32 may be added to the prize ball based on the entry into the two general winning openings 31. , The second start being opened when the result of the lottery based on the increase of prize balls and hold based on the entry into the first start port 33a and the passage to the through gate 34 is the stop of the "○" symbol. There is also an increase in prize balls and holds based on entering the mouth 33b.

As a result, when the game ball is launched aiming at the left side game area 30l, the jackpot digestion time is longer than when the game ball is launched aiming at the first right side game area 30r2 or the second right side game area 30r2. , You can get the most prize balls, and there are many opportunities to increase the number of holds. Further, when the game ball is launched aiming at the second right side game area 30r2, the jackpot digestion time is longer than when the game ball is launched aiming at the first right side game area 30r1, but from the first right side game area 30r1. You can get a lot of prize balls, and there is an opportunity to increase the number of holds. Further, when the game ball is launched aiming at the first right side game area 30r1, the additional prize ball cannot be expected, but the jackpot digestion time can be shortened to the shortest. As a result, the player can hit the first right side game area 30r1, the second right side game area 30r2, and the left side game area 30l in consideration of the time that can be spent on the game, etc., and is a big hit in the optimum state. Since the game can be executed in the state, it is possible to improve the interest in the jackpot state.

The first right side gaming area 30r1 and the second right side gaming area 30r2 described above correspond to the first area of the present invention, and the left side gaming area 30l corresponds to the second area of the present invention. The two general winning openings 31 and the through gate 34 arranged in the left gaming area 30l described above, and the first starting opening 33a and the second starting opening 33b arranged in the lower gaming area 33d are the present inventions. It corresponds to the game value adding means of the invention. The fourth flow direction changing unit 409, the fifth flow direction changing unit 411, and the sixth flow direction changing unit 413 described above correspond to the flow direction changing means of the present invention.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment, in the gaming machine provided with the gaming area 30c through which the gaming ball flows, the gaming area 30c is at least the first right side gaming area 30r1 and the first. It is composed of a second right gaming area 30r2 provided on the left side of the right gaming area 30r1 and a left gaming area 30l provided on the left side of the second right gaming area 30r2. In the game area 30c, when the result of the lottery based on the establishment of the start condition is a big hit result, the game ball flowing down the first right side game area 30r1 and the game ball flowing down the second right side game area 30r2 and the left side game area 30l. A variable winning device 32 having a large winning opening 32a provided at a position where a game ball flowing down the ball can enter is provided. The second right-side game area 30r2 includes one general winning opening 31 that gives a predetermined game value when a game ball flowing down the second right-side game area 30r2 is entered. The second right-side game area 30r2 is set in a direction in which some of the game balls flowing down the second right-side game area 30r2 during the jackpot game state can be entered into one general winning opening 31. A first flow-down direction changing unit 403 to be changed and a second flow-down direction changing unit 405 to change the direction in which the ball can enter the first starting port 33a are provided. The left game area 30l includes two general winning openings 31 and a through gate 34 that give a predetermined game value when a game ball flowing down the left game area 30l enters or passes through. The left game area 30l is a fourth flow direction changing unit 409 that changes the flow direction of some of the game balls flowing down the left game area 30l during the jackpot game state to a direction that allows the ball to pass through the through gate 34. And the fifth flow-down direction changing section 411 that changes the direction in which the ball can enter any of the two general winning openings 31, and the ball can be entered in either the first starting port 33a or the second starting port 33b. It is provided with a sixth flow-down direction changing section 413 that changes the direction.

As a result, even when the jackpot game state is executed, if the player shoots the game ball aiming at the left side game area 30l, the flow direction changing means (fourth flow direction) provided more than the second right side game area 30r2. The first right game area 30r1 and the second right side are changed by the amount that the flow direction of the game ball flowing down the left game area 30l is changed by the change unit 409, the fifth flow direction change unit 411, and the sixth flow direction change unit 413). It is possible to play a game in a jackpot game state for a longer time than when launching a game ball aiming at the game area 30r2, and a prize ball or a hold that cannot be obtained in the first right side game area 30r1 or the second right side game area 30r2. It is also possible to get an increase in. As a result, it is possible to improve the fun of the jackpot game state.

The gaming area 30c of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 67. FIG. 67 is a front view of the gaming board 30 of the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth embodiment.

The game area 30c of the game board 30 is a left side game area 30l provided on the left side of the center line that divides the width of the game area 30c into two equal parts to the left and right, and a center that divides the width of the game area 30c into two equal parts to the left and right. Of the right gaming areas 30r provided on the right side of the line, the first right gaming area 30r1 provided along the right outer edge of the right gaming area 30r and the second right side provided on the left side of the first right gaming area 30r1. It is composed of a gaming area 30r2, a left gaming area 30l, and a lower gaming area 30d provided downstream of the right gaming area 30r.

The lower gaming area 30d is provided with a first starting port 33a at a position slightly above the center and a second starting port 33b at a position slightly above the center. The first start port 33a can enter a game ball flowing down the left side game area 30l or the second right side game area 30r2. The first starting port 33a includes a detection switch for detecting the entry of a game ball. The second starting port 33b is a so-called electric chew type starting port including the second starting port blades 33b1 and 33b2. When the result of the variation display of the normal symbol by the display units 41a and 41b based on the passage detection of the game ball at the first through gate 34b or the second through gate 34c, which will be described later, is won, the start of the second start port 33b. The mouth blades 33b1 and 33b2 are opened for a predetermined time. When the start port blades 33b1 and 33b2 are opened, not only the first right side gaming area 30r1 but also the game ball flowing down the second right side gaming area 30r2 can enter the ball, as will be described later. The second starting port 33b includes a detection switch for detecting the entry of a game ball.

The first right game area 30r1 includes a first through gate 34b through which a game ball passes in the middle of a passage formed by a branch rail 401 and a right edge of the right game area 30r. The first through gate 34b includes a detection switch for detecting the passage of the game ball. As a result, the passage of the game ball flowing down the first right side game area 30r1 is completely detected by the first through gate 34b. In the branch rail 401, the time required for the game ball flowing down the first right game area 30r1 to enter the large winning opening 32a is taken, and the game ball flowing down the second right game area 30r2 enters the large winning opening 32a. In order to make it shorter than the time required for the game to be played, the game ball launched into the game area 30c flows down the first right side game area 30r1 so as to bypass the second right side game area 30r2 and flow down to the large winning opening 32a. The flow direction of the game ball to be played is changed. Further, as will be described later, in the big hit round game, the branch rail 401 is a small hit game so that the maximum number (10 balls) of game balls can be entered into the big winning opening 32a within the upper limit time (30 seconds). Is designed to change the direction in which the game balls flow down so that a plurality of game balls can enter the large winning opening 32a.

The second right game area 30r2 includes a second through gate 34c through which the game ball passes at a position from the entrance of the passage formed by the branch rail 401 and the right wall 47r of the center frame 47. The second through gate 34c includes a detection switch that detects the passage of the game ball. As a result, the passage of the game ball flowing down the second right side game area 30r2 is completely detected by the second through gate 34c. Further, the second right game area 30r2 is provided with a general winning opening 31c below the second through gate 34c. When one game ball enters the general prize opening 31c, three prize balls are awarded.

The second right-side gaming area 30r2 includes a first flow-down direction changing unit 403 and a second flow-down direction changing unit 405 composed of a plurality of nails 39. The first flow direction change unit 403 and the second flow direction change unit 405 set the time required for the game ball flowing down the second right side game area 30r2 to enter the large winning opening 32a in the first right side game area 30r1. In order to make it longer than the time it takes for the flowing game ball to enter the large winning opening 32a, the game ball flowing down the second right game area 30r2 is caused to flow down while being repeatedly flipped with a nail 39. The flow direction of the game ball flowing down the second right game area 30r2 is changed. Further, as will be described later, in the jackpot round game, the first flow down direction changing unit 403 and the second flow down direction changing unit 405 will win a large number of game balls (10 balls) within the upper limit time (30 seconds). A large number of game balls flowing down the first right side game area 30r1 are large in the small hit game so that the ball can be entered in 32a and a plurality of game balls can be entered in the general winning opening 31c. It is designed to change the direction in which the game ball flows down so that it is difficult to enter a smaller number of balls than the number of balls entering the winning opening 32a.

Below the first right side game area 30r1 and the second right side game area 30r2, a variable winning device 32 capable of entering a game ball flowing down the first right side game area 30r1 and the second right side game area 30r2 is provided. .. The variable winning device 32 has a large winning opening 32a to which a winning ball of the first prize number (11 balls) is given when the game ball enters, and the upper limit time after opening the large winning opening 32a. A big hit round game or a small hit game is performed in which the game of closing the big winning opening 32a is performed up to the maximum number of times on condition that either the above is passed or the maximum number of game balls is entered.

Below the variable winning device 32, a plurality of nails 39p are planted so as to change the flow direction of the game ball flowing down the first right game area 30r1 toward the second starting port 33b. A seventh flow direction changing section 415 is provided. As a result, the game ball flowing down the first right side game area 30r1 can enter the second start opening 33b even in a game state other than the big hit round game or the small hit game.

With the detection of the passage of the game ball at the first through gate 34b, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to open the second starting port blades 33b1 and 33b2. Further, a lottery for whether or not to open the second starting port blades 33b1 and 33b2 is performed with the passage of the game ball at the second through gate 34c as an opportunity. With the entry of the game ball at the second starting port 33b, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a big hit round game or a small hit game having a higher probability of occurring than the big hit round game.

A winning / losing lottery for determining whether or not to generate a big hit round game or a small hit game will be described with reference to FIGS. 68, 70, and 71. FIG. 68 is a diagram for explaining the hit type. FIG. 70 is a first hit type determination table for the first start port 33a. FIG. 71 is a second hit type determination table for the second starting port 33b.

A first hit type determination table and a second hit type determination table are used for the winning / failing lottery. The first hit type determination table is used for a lottery for whether or not a jackpot winning result that triggers a jackpot round game, which is performed when the ball enters the first starting port 33a, is generated. The second hit type determination table is a small hit winning result that triggers a big hit winning result or a small hit game that is more likely to occur than a big hit round game when the ball enters the second starting port 33b. It is used for a lottery to see if any of them will occur.

As shown in FIG. 68, the types of jackpot winning results include "15R probability variation jackpot", "15R normal jackpot", "6R probability variation jackpot", and "6R normal jackpot". In "15R probability variation jackpot" and "6R probability variation jackpot", the winning probability after the end of the round game is high, and the high probability continues during the support state of 150 times after the end of the round. For "15R normal jackpot" and "6R normal jackpot", the winning probability after the end of the round game is low (normal probability), and there is no support state. The types of small hit winning results include "small hit A" and "small hit B". For "small hit A" and "small hit B", the winning probability remains the same as the original winning probability (at the time of the small hit winning) even after the small hit game is completed, and the support state is attached at the time of the small hit winning. Will continue to be in the original support state even after the small hit game is over. In the support state, when the result of the lottery triggered by the passage detection of the first through gate 34b and the second through gate 34c is the winning result, the opening time of the second starting port blades 33b1 and 33b2 is longer than usual. It is a state in which a long state is generated a predetermined number of games. When the support state ends, the winning probability returns from a high probability to a low probability (normal probability). The support state may be a state in which the number of times the second starting port blades 33b1 and 33b2 are opened is larger than usual.

The lottery for whether or not the jackpot winning result is generated is performed using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2. The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is, for example, incremented by 1 in order within the range of "0" to "599", reaches the maximum value (that is, "599"), and then returns to "0". It is used for a lottery to see if a winning result will occur. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 70 and 71, the number of random numbers that are big hits at low probability is two, and the values are "150,450", and the random numbers that are big hit at high probability are The number of values is 4, and the value is "50, 150, 350, 450". That is, when the probability is low, the jackpot probability is 1/300, and when the probability is high, the jackpot probability is 1/150.

The value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 is incremented by 1 within the range of "0" to "9", reaches the maximum (that is, "9"), and then returns to "0". Used for. The jackpot type differs depending on whether the ball enters the first starting port 33a or the second starting port 33b. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 70, when the ball enters the first starting port 33a, the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 is "0", "1", "4" as the jackpot type. , "7" is "15R probability variation jackpot", "8" is "15R normal jackpot", and "2", "3", "6", "9" is "6R". It is a "probability change jackpot", and if it is "5", it is a "6R normal jackpot". That is, the distribution of the jackpot type at the first starting port 33a is 2/5 for "15R probability variation jackpot", 1/10 for "15R normal jackpot", and 2/5 for "6R probability variation jackpot". The "6R normal jackpot" is 1/10. The number of rounds is not limited to 6R and 15R, but may be 3R or the like. The number of times of the support state is not limited to 150 times, but may be 150 times or until the next big hit winning result occurs.

Further, as shown in FIG. 71, when the ball enters the second starting port 33a, the jackpot type is "15R probability variation jackpot" if the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 is "0". , "7" is "15R normal jackpot", "1", "3", "6", "8", "9" is "6R probability variation jackpot", "2", " If it is "4" or "5", it is "6R normal jackpot". That is, as for the distribution of the jackpot type at the second starting port 33b, "15R probability variation jackpot" is 1/10, "15R normal jackpot" is 1/10, and "6R probability variation jackpot" is 1/2. The "6R normal jackpot" is 3/10.

The lottery for whether or not the small hit winning result is generated and the lottery for the type of the small hit winning result are performed only when the ball enters the second starting port 33b, and the value of the big hit random number counter C1 is used. Random numbers. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 71, the value of the random number that becomes a small hit is 20, and the value is "101 to 110, 301 to 310". That is, the probability of winning a small hit is 1/30. Further, the small hit type is "small hit A" if the value of the big hit random number counter C1 is "101 to 108", and the value of the big hit random number counter C1 is "109 to 110" or "301 to 310". For example, it is "small hit B". That is, as for the distribution of the small hit type, "small hit A" is 2/5 and "small hit B" is 3/5.

Next, the opening / closing pattern of the big winning opening 32a in the big hit round game and the small hit game will be described with reference to FIG. 69. FIG. 69 is a diagram for explaining an opening / closing pattern of the large winning opening 32a.

The big hit round game and the small hit game are generated by the big winning opening opening / closing process (step S205 in FIG. 9) in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261. That is, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 performs a large winning opening opening / closing process for generating a big hit gaming state for generating a big hit gaming state and a large winning opening opening / closing process for generating a small hit gaming state for generating a small hit gaming state. ..

In the jackpot opening / closing process for generating a jackpot game state, when the result of the lottery for whether or not the jackpot winning result is generated is the jackpot winning result, the upper limit opening time (for example, 30) after opening the jackpot 32a A big hit in which the game of closing the big winning opening 32a is performed up to the upper limit opening number (6 times or 15 times) on the condition that either the second) elapses or the upper limit count number (for example, 10 counts) of the game ball enters. A round game is played. An opening / closing pattern in which the maximum winning opening 32a is opened / closed up to the maximum number of rounds with the upper limit opening time set to 30 seconds is called a jackpot opening / closing pattern. The jackpot opening / closing pattern is such that the game ball is placed in either the first right game area 30r1 or the second right game area 30r2 at a fixed time interval (for example, a firing interval of 0.6 seconds; the same applies hereinafter) during the 15R jackpot round game. Even when flowing down, it is an opening / closing pattern that allows a predetermined first number (150 [count] obtained by 10 [count] × 15 [round]) of game balls to enter the large winning opening 32a. In addition, in the jackpot opening / closing process for generating the jackpot game state, if the jackpot type by lottery as to whether or not the jackpot winning result occurs is "15R probability variation jackpot" or "6R probability variation jackpot", the jackpot round game ends. After that, it shifts to the right-handed gaming state in which the gaming ball is made to flow down to the second right gaming area 30r2 in a high probability state. The opening time and closing time of the jackpot opening / closing pattern may be changed according to the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 even if they are of the same jackpot type.

In the large winning opening opening / closing process for generating a small hit game state, when the result of the lottery for whether or not the small hit winning result is generated is the small hit winning result, the type of the small hit winning result is "small hit A". Or it depends on which one is "small hit B". If it is "small hit A", the upper limit opening time is set to 0.4 seconds from the first to the third opening, and if it is "small hit B", the upper limit opening time is set to 0.4 seconds, respectively. It is set to 0.4 seconds, and the third upper limit opening time is set to 2.0 seconds. Therefore, either the upper limit opening time (for example, 0.4 seconds) has elapsed after the large winning opening 32a is opened, or the upper limit number of balls (for example, 4 balls) of game balls is entered. A small hit game state in which the small hit game in which the game in which the 32a is closed is performed up to the upper limit opening number of times (for example, 3 times) is generated is generated.

The small hit opening / closing pattern is a small hit game in which a second number of game balls smaller than the first number is played when the game balls are allowed to flow down to the first right side game area 30r1 at regular time intervals during the right-handed game state. It is an opening / closing pattern that allows the ball to enter the large winning opening 32a in the middle, and when the game ball is made to flow down to the second right game area 30r2 at regular time intervals during the right-handed game state, the second number is used. This is an opening / closing pattern that allows a third number of game balls, which are few in number, to enter the large winning opening 32a.

The upper limit opening time of 0.4 seconds for the small hit game is shorter than the firing interval (0.6 seconds) of the game ball, and is set as a time when it is difficult to enter the big winning opening 32a. The upper limit opening time of 2.0 seconds is set as a time during which it is easy to enter the large winning opening 32a because it is longer than the firing interval of the game ball. The upper limit opening number is not limited to a plurality of times such as three times, but may be one time.

In "small hit A" and "small hit B", when the game balls are continuously fired at regular intervals, the game area in which the game balls flow down is either the first right side game area 30r1 or the second right side game area 30r2. The ease with which the game ball can enter the large winning opening 32a differs depending on whether or not the ball is entered, which will be described below.

In the "small hit A", since the upper limit opening time of the large winning opening 32a is 0.4 seconds, which is shorter than the firing interval of the game ball, the game ball can be set in either the first right side game area 30r1 or the second right side game area 30r2. It is not easy to let the game ball enter the large winning opening 32a even when the ball is made to flow down. However, in the first right game area 30r1 than in the second right game area 30r2, the time for the game ball to reach the big winning opening 32a is faster, and the number of game balls reaching the big winning opening 32a is larger. However, the number of game balls that enter the large winning opening 32a also increases.

In the "small hit B", in the first and second upper limit opening times, as in the "small hit game A", the game ball may flow down to either the first right side game area 30r1 or the second right side game area 30r2. It is not easy to put a game ball into the big winning opening 32a, but since the upper limit opening time is extended to 2.0 seconds in the third upper limit opening time, it is possible to put a game ball into the big winning opening 32a. It will be easier. However, in the first right game area 30r1 than in the second right game area 30r2, the time for the game ball to reach the big winning opening 32a is faster, and the number of game balls reaching the big winning opening 32a is larger. However, the number of game balls that enter the large winning opening 32a also increases.

The figure shows the number of prize balls that can be obtained when the game ball is continuously fired in the first right side game area 30r1 and the number of prize balls that can be obtained when the game ball is continuously fired in the second right side game area 30r2 in the jackpot game state. 72 and FIG. 73 will be described. Note that FIG. 72 is a diagram for explaining the number of prize balls that can be acquired in the first right side gaming area 30r1. FIG. 73 is a diagram for explaining the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the second right game area 30r2. In both FIGS. 72 and 73, the case where the "15R probability variation jackpot" is first won, then the "6R probability variation jackpot" is won four times in a row, and then the "15R probability variation jackpot" is won again is taken as an example. explain.

When the "15R probability variation jackpot" is won first, the maximum number of balls (10 counts) within the upper limit opening time regardless of whether the game ball is flowed down to either the first right side game area 30r1 or the second right side game area 30r2 during the 15th round. ) Can be entered into the large winning opening 32a. The first number of game balls that enter the large winning opening 32a during the 15 rounds is 150 [count] obtained by 10 [count] × 15 [round]. At the large prize opening 32a, 11 prize balls are paid out for every 1 count of the entry detection of the game ball. That is, 1650 prize balls obtained by 11 [11 balls / count] × 10 [count] × 15 [round] can be obtained. On the other hand, when the game ball is launched into the second right game area 30r2 at regular time intervals during the 15th round, the detection of the ball entering the general winning opening 31c in each round is approximately 2 counts. The game ball that enters the general winning opening 31c during the 15th round is 30 [count] obtained by 2 [count] × 15 [round] obtained by 2 [count] × 15 [round]. That is, in addition to the 1650 prize balls based on the entry into the large winning opening 32a, the prize balls based on the entry into the general winning opening 31c are obtained by 3 [balls / count] × 30 [count] 90. You can get the prize ball of the ball.

In this way, during the 15R jackpot round game, the first number of game balls that flow down the second right game area 30r2 and enter the large winning opening 32a and the game that enters the general winning opening 31c at regular time intervals. The prize balls (1740 balls, which is the total of 1650 balls and 90 balls) paid out based on the balls flow down the first right game area 30r1 at regular time intervals during the 15R jackpot round game to the big prize opening 32a. It will be more than the prize balls (1650 balls) paid out based on the first number of game balls to be entered.

After the end of the 15R jackpot round game, if the game ball is continuously fired in either the first right game area 30r1 or the second right game area 30r2 during the support state of 150 times, it is approximately 5 during the support state of 150 times. Small hits (for example, "small hit A" twice and "small hit B" three times) occur. If the game ball is continuously fired in the first right game area 30r1 during the support state of 150 times, the ball entering the large winning opening 32a based on "small hit A" is approximately 1 count, and "small hit B". It is assumed that the number of balls entered into the large winning opening 32a based on the above is approximately 4 counts. The second number of game balls that flow down the first right side game area 30r1 and enter the large winning opening 32a during the small hit game during the support state of 150 times is 1 [count] × 2. It is 14 [count] obtained by [times] + 4 [counts] × 3 [times]. That is, if the game ball is continuously fired in the first right side game area 30r1 during the support state of 150 times, the prize ball of 154 balls obtained by 11 [ball / count] × 14 [count] can be obtained.

On the other hand, if the game ball is continuously fired in the second right game area 30r2 during the support state of 150 times, the ball entering the large winning opening 32a based on the "small hit A" is 0 count, and the "small hit B". It is assumed that the number of balls entered into the large winning opening 32a based on the above is 1 count. The third number of game balls that flow down the second right game area 30r2 and enter the large winning opening 32a during the small hit game at regular time intervals during the support state of 150 times is 1 [count] × 3. It is 3 [count] calculated by the times. That is, the prize balls of 33 balls obtained by 11 [balls / count] × 3 [counts] can be obtained. In addition to this, if the game ball is continuously fired in the second right side game area 30r2 during the support state of 150 times, it is assumed that the number of balls entered into the general winning opening 31c is 20 counts. That is, 60 prize balls obtained by 3 [balls / count] × 20 [counts] can be obtained. Then, when the game ball is continuously fired to the second right side game area 30r2 during the support state of 150 times, the prize ball based on the entry into the large winning opening 32a during the small hit game and the prize ball based on the ball entering the large winning opening 32a during the small hit game and the support state of 150 times are performed. It is possible to obtain 93 prize balls required by 33 balls + 60 balls, including the prize balls based on the entry into the general prize opening 31c.

In this way, the third number of game balls and the general winning opening 31c that flow down the second right gaming area 30r2 and enter the large winning opening 32a during the small hit game during the right-handed gaming state at regular time intervals. The prize balls (93 balls) paid out based on the game balls entering the ball flow down the first right side game area 30r1 at regular time intervals during the right-handed game state, and the large prize opening 32a during the small hit game. It is less than the prize balls (154 balls) paid out based on the second number of game balls entering the ball. Therefore, in the first "15R probability variation jackpot" game state (round game and subsequent support state), the total number of prize balls that can be obtained when continuously firing the game balls in the first right side game area 30r1 is 1804 balls, and the first 2 Since the total number of prize balls that can be obtained when continuously firing a game ball in the right side game area 30r2 is 1833, it is better to continue firing the game ball in the second right side game area 30r2 than in the first right side game area 30r1. 29 balls Many prize balls can be won.

Next, when the first consecutive "6R probability variation jackpot" is won, 11 [ball / count] regardless of whether the game ball is flowed down to either the first right side game area 30r1 or the second right side game area 30r2 during the 6 rounds. You can get the 660 prize balls required by x10 [count] x6 [round]. However, when a game ball is launched into the second right game area 30r2 during 6 rounds, 3 [ball / count] x 2 [count] x 6 [round] is used as a prize ball based on the entry into the general winning opening 31c. You can get the 36 prize balls required in.

After the end of the first 6R jackpot round game in a row, if the game balls are continuously fired in the first right side game area 30r1 even during the support state of 150 times, the above-mentioned 154 prize balls can be obtained. On the other hand, when the game ball is continuously launched into the second right side game area 30r2 even during the support state of 150 times after the end of the 6R big hit round game, it is based on the entry into the big prize opening 32a in the above-mentioned small hit game. It is possible to obtain 93 prize balls, which is a total of 33 prize balls and 60 prize balls based on the entry into the general prize opening 31c. Therefore, at the end of the first consecutive "6R probability variation jackpot" game state (round game and subsequent support state), the total number of prize balls that can be obtained when continuously firing the game ball into the first right side game area 30r1 is 2618. Since it is a ball and the total number of prize balls that can be obtained when continuously firing the game ball to the second right side game area 30r2 is 2622 balls, the game ball is placed in the second right side game area 30r2 rather than the first right side game area 30r1. You can get more prize balls if you keep firing, but the difference is close to 4 balls. That is, when the game balls are continuously fired in either the first right side game area 30r1 or the second right side game area 30r2, there is almost no difference in the number of prize balls that can be obtained.

Next, when the second consecutive "6R probability variation jackpot" is won, the game ball is flowed down to either the first right side gaming area 30r1 or the second right side gaming area 30r2 during the jackpot round game, as in the first consecutive time. You can get 660 prize balls. In addition to this, when the game ball is launched into the second right side game area 30r2, 36 prize balls can be obtained based on the entry into the general prize opening 31c.

After the end of this second consecutive 6R jackpot round game, if the game ball continues to be launched into the first right side gaming area 30r1 even during the support state of 150 times, the big prize during the small hit game is the same as the first consecutive game. 154 prize balls can be obtained based on the entry into the mouth 32a. On the other hand, if the game ball is continuously launched into the second right side game area 30r2 even during the support state of 150 times after the end of the 6R jackpot round game, 33 is based on the entry into the general winning opening 31c during the above-mentioned 6 rounds. You can get 93 prize balls, including the prize balls of the balls and the prize balls of 60 balls based on the entry into the general prize opening 31c in the supported state. Therefore, at the end of the second consecutive "6R probability variation jackpot" game state (round game and subsequent support state), the total number of prize balls that can be obtained if the game ball is continuously fired in the first right side game area 30r1 is 3432. Since it is a ball and the total number of prize balls that can be obtained when continuously firing the game ball in the second right game area 30r2 is 3411 balls, contrary to the past, the first right side of the second right game area 30r2. If you keep firing the game balls in the game area 30r1, you can get 21 more prize balls.

Next, when the third consecutive "6R probability variation jackpot" is won, the first and second consecutive hits regardless of whether the game ball is flowed down to either the first right game area 30r1 or the second right game area 30r2 during the jackpot round game. You can get 660 prize balls in the same way. In addition to this, when the game ball is launched into the second right side game area 30r2, 36 prize balls can be obtained based on the entry into the general prize opening 31c. Therefore, at the end of the third consecutive "6R probability variation jackpot" game state (round game and subsequent support state), the total number of prize balls that can be obtained when continuously firing the game ball into the first right side game area 30r1 is 4246. Since it is a ball and the total number of prize balls that can be obtained when continuously firing the game ball to the second right side game area 30r2 is 4200 balls, the game ball is placed in the first right side game area 30r1 rather than the second right side game area 30r2. If you keep firing, you can get 46 more prize balls.

Similarly, at the end of the fourth consecutive "6R probability variation jackpot" game state (round game and subsequent support state), the total number of prize balls that can be obtained if the game ball is continuously fired in the first right side game area 30r1. Is 5060 balls, and the total number of prize balls that can be obtained when the game balls are continuously fired in the second right side game area 30r2 is 4989 balls. If you keep firing the balls, you can get 71 more prize balls.

If the "6R probability variation jackpot" occurs 5 times or more in a row, the first right side gaming area 30r1 becomes too advantageous over the second right side gaming area 30r2, but the support state (during probability variation) is "15R probability variation jackpot". It occurs with a probability of 1/5. Therefore, if, for example, a "15R probability variation jackpot" occurs in the support state after the end of the fourth consecutive "6R probability variation jackpot" round game, this "15R probability variation jackpot" gaming state (round game and subsequent support state) At the end, the total number of prize balls that can be obtained when continuously firing the game ball in the first right side game area 30r1 is 6864 balls, and the total prize that can be obtained when the game ball is continuously fired in the second right side game area 30r2. Since the number of balls is 6822, more prize balls can be obtained by continuously firing the game balls in the first right side game area 30r1 than in the second right side game area 30r2, but the difference is narrowed to 42 balls. ..

Therefore, when the game ball is continuously flowed down to either the first right side game area 30r1 or the second right side game area 30r2 from the first "15R probability variation jackpot" jackpot round game, the game ball is initially more than the first right side game area 30r1. Even if the second right game area 30r2 can acquire more prize balls, if the game is continued until the "6R probability variation jackpot" occurs multiple times in a row, the difference in the acquired prize balls will gradually (step by step). As a result, the first right-hand game area 30r1 can win more prize balls than the second right-hand game area 30r2. After that, if the "15R probability variation jackpot" occurs, the difference between the prize balls in the first right side gaming area 30r1 and the second right side gaming area 30r2 becomes small. As a result, even if the game ball continues to flow down to either the first right side game area 30r1 or the second right side game area 30r2 from the first jackpot round game, if the game is continued for a long time, the prize ball that the player can finally obtain. It is possible to make it difficult to make a difference in the number of.

According to the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment described above, the game area 30c is a left side game area 30l provided on the left side of the center line that bisects the width of the game area 30c to the left and right, and the game area 30c. Of the right gaming area 30r provided on the right side of the center line that bisects the width of the right side, the first right gaming area 30r1 provided along the right outer edge of the right gaming area 30r and the first right gaming area. A first starting port 33a having a second right side gaming area 30r2 provided on the left side of 30r1 and capable of entering a game ball flowing down at least the left side gaming area 30l, and a game flowing down the first right side gaming area 30r1. A second starting port 33b capable of entering a ball and a game ball flowing down the second right game area 30r2, a game ball flowing down the first right side game area 30r1, and a game ball flowing down the second right side game area 30r2. Has a large winning opening 32a to which 11 winning balls are given when the game ball enters, and the upper limit opening time elapses after opening the large winning opening 32a. A variable winning device 32 in which a big hit round game or a small hit game is performed in which the game of closing the big winning opening 32a is performed up to the maximum number of times the game is opened on condition that the game ball of the maximum number of balls enters, and the second right side. It is provided with a general winning opening 31c in which a game ball flowing down the game area 30r2 can be entered and three prize balls are given when the game ball enters. Further, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 draws a lottery as to whether or not a jackpot winning result that triggers a predetermined number of jackpot round games to be generated is generated when the ball enters the first starting port 33a. A big hit lottery function using the big hit random number counter C1 and the big hit symbol counter C2, and an opportunity to generate a small hit game that is more likely to occur than the big hit round game by entering the second starting port 33b. The result of the lottery by the small hit lottery function using the big hit random number counter C1 for performing the lottery to determine whether or not the small hit winning result is generated, and the big hit lottery function using the big hit random number counter C1 and the big hit symbol counter C2. For example, when is a "15R probability variable jackpot", a 15R jackpot round game is performed in which the jackpot 32a is opened and closed in the jackpot round game opening / closing pattern, and after the 15R jackpot round game is completed, the first right side game area 30r1 or the second "15R probability variation jackpot" that can shift to the right-handed game state in which the game ball flows down to the right game area 30r2. When the result of the lottery by the small hit lottery function using C1 is the small hit winning result, the small hit game state in which the small hit game in which the large winning opening 32a is opened and closed in the small hit opening / closing pattern is generated is generated. It is equipped with a large winning opening opening / closing processing function for generation. The jackpot opening / closing pattern is a predetermined first number (150) regardless of whether the game ball is allowed to flow down to either the first right side gaming area 30r1 or the second right side gaming area 30r2 at regular time intervals during the 15R jackpot round game. This is an opening / closing pattern that allows a game ball of (count) to enter the large winning opening 32a. The small hit opening / closing pattern is a game ball of a second number (14 counts) smaller than the first number when the game ball is made to flow down to the first right side game area 30r1 at regular time intervals during the right-handed game state. This is an opening / closing pattern that allows the ball to enter the large winning opening 32a during the small hit game, and when the game ball is allowed to flow down to the second right game area 30r2 at regular time intervals during the right-handed game state. This is an opening / closing pattern that allows a third number (3 counts) of game balls, which is smaller than the number of 2, to enter the large winning opening 32a. Based on the first number of game balls that flow down the second right game area 30r2 and enter the large prize opening 32a and the game balls that enter the general winning opening 31c at regular time intervals during the 15R jackpot round game. The prize balls (1740 balls) to be paid out are based on the first number of game balls that flow down the first right game area 30r1 and enter the big prize opening 32a at regular time intervals during the 15R jackpot round game. More than the prize balls (1650 balls) to be paid out. During the right-handed game state, the player flows down the second right-hand game area 30r2 at regular intervals and enters the large winning opening 32a during the small hit game. Enters the third number of gaming balls and the general winning opening 31c. The prize balls (93 balls) paid out based on the game balls flow down the first right side game area 30r1 at regular time intervals during the right-handed game state and enter the large winning opening 32a during the small hit game. It is less than the prize balls (154 balls) paid out based on the second number of game balls.

As a result, when the result of the lottery by the jackpot lottery function using the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot symbol counter C2 is, for example, "15R probability variation jackpot", the "15R probability variation jackpot" gaming state occurs. In the "15R probability variation jackpot" gaming state, a 15R jackpot round game in which the jackpot 32a is opened and closed in a jackpot opening / closing pattern is performed, and after the 15R jackpot round game is completed, the first right side game area 30r1 or the second right side game area 30r2 is entered. It shifts to the right-handed game state (support state) in which the game ball flows down. In the jackpot opening / closing pattern, when a gaming ball flows down to the first right gaming area 30r1 at regular time intervals during a jackpot round game, a predetermined first number (150 counts) of gaming balls is placed in the winning opening 32a. Since it is possible to enter balls, the number of prize balls (1650 balls) obtained by the first number × the number of first prize balls is paid out. Further, in the jackpot opening / closing pattern, when a game ball flows down to the second right side gaming area 30r2 at regular time intervals during a 15R jackpot round game, the number obtained by the first number × the number of first prize balls (1650 balls). The prize ball (1740 balls), which is the sum of the prize ball of the above and the prize ball (90 balls) based on the entry into the general winning opening 31c, is paid out. That is, it is paid out based on the game ball that flows down the second right side game area 30r2 and enters the large winning opening 32a and the game ball that enters the general winning opening 31c during the 15R jackpot round game. The prize balls (1740 balls) are paid out based on the game balls that flow down the first right side game area 30r1 and enter the big prize opening 32a at regular time intervals during the 15R jackpot round game. Will be more than.

Further, in the right-handed game state (support state) that occurs after the end of the 15R jackpot round game, the second start port is used regardless of whether the game ball flows down to either the first right side game area 30r1 or the second right side game area 30r2. It is possible to enter the ball in 33b. When the result of the lottery by the small hit lottery function using the big hit random number counter C1 is the small hit winning result, the small hit game state occurs. In the small hit game state, a small hit game is performed in which the large winning opening 32a is opened and closed in a small hit opening / closing pattern. In the small hit opening / closing pattern, when a game ball flows down to the first right side game area 30r1 at regular time intervals during a right-handed game state, a second number (14 counts) of game balls, which is smaller than the first number, is used. Since it is possible to enter the large winning opening 32a during the small hit game, the number of prize balls (154 balls) obtained by the second number × the first prize ball number is paid out. Further, in the small hit opening / closing pattern, when the game ball flows down to the second right side game area 30r2 at regular time intervals during the right-handed game state, the prize ball (60 balls) based on the entry into the general winning opening 31c is used. , A third number (3 counts) of game balls, which is less than the second number, can enter the large winning opening 32a during the small hit game. A prize ball (93 balls), which is the sum of the obtained number of prize balls (33 balls), is paid out. That is, a game ball that flows down the second right side game area 30r2 at regular intervals during the right-handed game state and enters the large winning opening 32a during the small hit game, and a game ball that enters the general winning opening 31c. The prize balls (93 balls) paid out based on the above are the game balls that flow down the first right side game area 30r1 at regular time intervals during the right-handed game state and enter the large winning opening 32a during the small hit game. It will be less than the prize balls (154 balls) paid out based on.

Therefore, when the "15R jackpot" is won, more prize balls can be won in the second right game area 30r2 than in the first right game area 30r1 during the 15R jackpot round game, but the 15R jackpot round game During the right-handed game state after the end of, the first right-hand game area 30r2 can win more prize balls than the second right-hand game area 30r1, so the first right-hand game during the "15R probability variation jackpot" game state. Even when the game balls are continuously flowed down to any one of the area 30r1 and the second right side game area 30r2, it is possible to reduce the difference in the number of prize balls paid out to the player.

Further, in the first right side game area 30r1, the time required for the game ball flowing down the first right side game area 30r1 to enter the large winning opening 32a is large for the game ball flowing down the second right side game area 30r2. A branch rail 401 for changing the flow direction of the game ball flowing down the first right side game area 30r1 is provided so as to be shorter than the time required to enter the winning opening 32a. In the second right game area 30r2, the time required for the game ball flowing down the second right side game area 30r2 to enter the large winning opening 32a is the time required for the game ball flowing down the first right side game area 30r1 to enter the large winning opening 32a. The first flow direction change unit 403 and the second flow direction change unit 405 that change the flow direction of the game ball flowing down the second right game area 30r2 so as to be longer than the time required to enter the 32a. Be prepared. The jackpot opening / closing pattern is the first upper limit opening time after opening the jackpot 32a when the result of the lottery by the jackpot lottery function using the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot symbol counter C2 is, for example, "15R probability variation jackpot". The first upper limit opening number (15 rounds, or 15 rounds, or , 6 rounds). The small hit opening / closing pattern is the second, which is shorter than the first upper limit opening time after opening the large winning opening 32a when the result of the lottery by the small hit lottery function using the big hit random number counter C1 is the small hit winning result. Either the upper limit opening time (0.4 seconds or 2.0 seconds) has elapsed, or a game ball with a second upper limit number of balls (4 counts) smaller than the first upper limit number of balls enters. It is an opening / closing pattern in which the game of closing the large winning opening 32a is performed up to the second upper limit opening number (3 times), which is less than the first upper limit opening number.

As a result, in the first right side game area 30r1, the time required for the game ball flowing down the first right side game area 30r1 to enter the large winning opening 32a by the branch rail 401 is the time required for the second right side game area 30r2. The time required for the flowing game ball to enter the large winning opening 32a is shorter than the time required. In the second right-side game area 30r2, the time required for the game ball flowing down the second right-side game area 30r2 to enter the large winning opening 32a by the second flow-down direction changing unit 405 is the time required for the first right-side game area 30r1. It takes longer than the time it takes for the game ball flowing down to enter the large winning opening 32a.

Further, the jackpot opening / closing pattern is the first upper limit after opening the jackpot 32a when the result of the lottery by the jackpot lottery function using the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot symbol counter C2 is, for example, "15R probability variation jackpot". The first upper limit opening number (15 rounds) of the game that closes the big winning opening 32a on condition that either the opening time (30 seconds) has elapsed or the game ball with the first upper limit number of balls (10 counts) enters. It is an opening and closing pattern that is performed up to). That is, in the big hit opening / closing pattern, the upper limit opening time is longer than the small hit opening / closing pattern, the upper limit number of balls to enter is larger, and the upper limit opening number is long. When the game ball is allowed to flow down to any of the second right side game area 30r2, a predetermined first number (150 counts) of game balls can be entered into the large winning opening 32a.

Further, the small hit opening / closing pattern is shorter than the first upper limit opening time after opening the large winning opening 32a when the result of the lottery by the small hit lottery function using the big hit random number counter C1 is the small hit winning result. Either the second upper limit opening time (0.4 seconds or 2.0 seconds) has elapsed, or a game ball with a second upper limit number of balls (4 counts) smaller than the first upper limit number of balls enters. This is an opening / closing pattern in which the game of closing the large winning opening 32a is performed up to the second upper limit opening number (3 times), which is smaller than the first upper limit opening number. That is, in the small hit opening / closing pattern, the upper limit opening time is shorter than the big hit opening / closing pattern, the upper limit number of balls to enter is smaller, and the upper limit opening number is short. In the case of letting the game ball flow down, it is possible to enter the second number (14 counts) of the game ball into the large winning opening 32a, although it is smaller than the first number, whereas the right-handed game state. When a game ball is allowed to flow down into the second right game area 30r2 at regular time intervals, only a third number (3 counts) of game balls, which is smaller than the second number, can enter the large winning opening 32a. It does not become.

55
Therefore, even if the game ball is continuously flowed down to any one of the first right side game area 30r1 and the second right side game area 30r2, the difference in the number of prize balls paid out to the player can be reduced. It can be preferably realized.

The gaming area 30d of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 74. FIG. 74 is a front view of the gaming board 30 of the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment. In the following description, the points different from those of the twelfth embodiment will be mainly described, but the contents common to the twelfth embodiment will also be referred to as appropriate.

The game area 30d is composed of a right side game area 30r, a left side game area 30l, and a lower game area 30d. The right side gaming area 30r and the left side gaming area 30l are provided with through gates 34d and 34e that trigger an open lottery for the second starting port blades 33b1 and 33b2. The left gaming area 30l is provided with one general winning opening 31d, but the right gaming area 30r is not provided with a general winning opening 31d.

In the right game area 30r, the number of nails 39 planted is smaller than that in the left game area 30l. Further, in the lower gaming area 30d, the number of nails to be planted is smaller on the side closer to the right gaming area 30r than on the side closer to the left gaming area 30l. Therefore, the time until the game ball that has flowed down to the right game area 30r enters the large winning opening 32a is longer than the time until the game ball that has flowed down to the left game area 30l enters the large winning opening 32a. short.

In this embodiment, in the jackpot round game that occurs first, the game ball may flow down to either the right side game area 30r or the left side game area 30l. For example, when the "15R jackpot change jackpot" is won, the game ball is continuously fired in the right game area 30r during the 15R jackpot round game, and the game ball is shot in the right game area 30r even during the support state generated after the end of the 15R jackpot round game. May continue to fire. In addition, when the "15R jackpot change jackpot" is won, the game ball continues to be fired in the left game area 30l during the 15R jackpot round game, and the game ball is shot in the left game area 30l even during the support state generated after the end of the 15R jackpot round game. May continue to fire. During the support state, there is a high probability that the opening lottery for the second starting port blades 33b1, 33b2, which is performed by detecting the passage through the through gates 34d and 34e, is high, and the opening time of the second starting port blades 33b1, 33b2 becomes long. Therefore, it is easy for the game ball to enter the second starting port 33b.

When the game ball is continuously fired in either the right side game area 30r or the left side area 30l, the conditions for generating the big hit game state and the small hit game state are the same as those in the twelfth embodiment.

46
Then, even in the game area 30d, when the game ball is continuously flowed down to either the right game area 30r or the left game area 30l from the big hit round game of the first "15R probability variation jackpot", initially, it is on the left side of the right game area 30r. Even if the game area 30l can win more prize balls, if the game is continued until the "6R probability variation jackpot" occurs multiple times in a row, the difference between the winning prize balls will gradually narrow (step by step), and eventually. More prize balls can be obtained in the right game area 30r than in the left game area 30l. After that, if a "15R probability variation jackpot" occurs, the difference between the prize balls in the right game area 30r and the left game area 30l becomes small. As a result, even if the game ball is continuously flowed down to either the right side game area 30r or the left side game area 30l from the first jackpot round game, if the game is continued for a long time, the number of prize balls that the player can finally obtain is different. Can be made difficult to attach.

According to the pachinko machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment described above, the gaming area 30d is at least the right gaming area 30r located on the right side when viewed from the front of the gaming machine and the left side when viewed from the front of the gaming machine with respect to the right gaming area 30r. A first starting port 33a, which is composed of a left-side game area 30l located in, and can enter at least a game ball flowing down the left-side game area 30l, and a game ball flowing down the right-side game area 30r and a left-side game area 30l. A second starting port 33b capable of entering a flowing game ball, a game ball flowing down the right game area 30r, and a game ball flowing down the left game area 30l can be inserted, and the game ball can be inserted. It has a large winning opening 32a to which a winning ball of the first prize number (11 [balls / count]) is given by the ball as an opportunity, and the upper limit time elapses or the upper limit number after opening the large winning opening 32a. A variable winning device 32 in which a big hit round game or a small hit game in which a game for closing the big winning opening 32a is performed up to a maximum number of times and a variable winning device 32 in which a small hit game is performed, and a left game area 30l flow down. A game ball can be entered, and the number of prize balls of the second prize ball (3 [balls / count]), which is smaller than the number of prize balls of the first prize ball, is given when the game ball enters. It is provided with a general winning opening 31d. Further, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 draws a lottery as to whether or not a jackpot winning result that triggers a predetermined number of jackpot round games to be generated is generated when the ball enters the first starting port 33a. The jackpot lottery function using the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot symbol counter C2, and the opportunity to generate a small hit game that is more likely to occur than the jackpot round game, triggered by entering the second starting port 33b. When the small hit lottery function using the big hit random number counter C1 for performing a lottery to determine whether or not the small hit winning result is generated and the result of the lottery by the big hit lottery function is "15R probability variation big hit", the big hit A support state (high probability) in which a 15R jackpot round game that opens and closes the big winning opening 32a in an opening / closing pattern is performed, and after the 15R jackpot round game is completed, the game ball is flowed down to either the right game area 30r or the left game area 30l. ), The big hit opening / closing processing function for generating the big hit game state that generates the "15R probability variable big hit" game state, and the small hit opening / closing pattern when the result of the lottery by the small hit lottery function is the small hit winning result. It is provided with a large winning opening opening / closing processing function for generating a small hit gaming state for generating a small hit gaming state in which a small hit game is performed to open / close the large winning opening 32a. The jackpot opening / closing pattern is a predetermined first number (150 counts) of games regardless of whether the game ball is made to flow down to either the right game area 30r or the left game area 30l at regular time intervals during the 15R jackpot round game. This is an opening / closing pattern that allows the ball to enter the large winning opening 32a. The small hit opening / closing pattern is a small hit game in which a second number (14 counts) of game balls, which is smaller than the first number, is played when the game balls are allowed to flow down to the right game area 30r at regular time intervals during the support state. It is an opening / closing pattern that allows the ball to enter the large winning opening 32a in the middle, and when the game ball is allowed to flow down to the left game area 30l at regular time intervals during the support state, the third number is smaller than the second number. This is an opening / closing pattern that allows a number of game balls (3 counts) to be entered into the large winning opening 32a during a small hit game. It is paid out based on the first number of game balls that flow down the left side game area 30 liters and enter the big prize opening 32a and the game balls that enter the general winning opening 31d during the 15R jackpot round game. The number of prize balls (1740 balls) is paid out based on the first number of game balls that flow down the right game area 30r and enter the big prize opening 32a at regular time intervals during the 15R jackpot round game. It is configured to be larger than the number of balls (1650 balls). A third number of game balls that flow down the left game area 30 liters at regular time intervals during the support state and enter the large winning opening 32a during a small hit game, and a game ball that enters the general winning opening 31d. The number of prize balls (93 balls) paid out based on this is the second number of game balls that flow down the right game area 30r at regular time intervals and enter the large winning opening 32a during the small hit game. It is configured to be less than the number of prize balls (154 balls) paid out based on.

As a result, when the result of the lottery by the jackpot lottery function performed when the ball enters the first starting port 33a is "15R probability variation jackpot", the "15R probability variation jackpot" gaming state occurs. In the "15R probability variation jackpot" game state, a 15R jackpot round game in which the jackpot 32a is opened and closed in a jackpot opening / closing pattern is performed, and after the 15R jackpot round game is completed, the game ball flows down to the right side game area 30r or the left side game area 30l. It shifts to the support state to be performed. In the jackpot opening / closing pattern, when a gaming ball flows down to the right gaming area 30r at regular time intervals during a 15R jackpot round game, a predetermined first number of gaming balls can enter the jackpot 32a. Therefore, the number of prize balls (1650 balls) obtained by the first number × the number of first prize balls is paid out. Further, in the jackpot opening / closing pattern, when a game ball flows down to the left game area 30 liters at regular time intervals during a 15R jackpot round game, a prize of the number (1650 balls) obtained by the first number × the number of first prize balls. A prize ball (1740 balls), which is the sum of the ball and the prize ball (90 prize balls) based on the entry into the general prize opening 31d, is paid out. The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the game ball that flows down the left game area 30 liters and enters the large prize opening 32a and the game ball that enters the general winning opening 31d during the 15R jackpot round game at regular time intervals. , The number of prize balls paid out based on the game balls that flow down the right side game area 30r and enter the big prize opening 32a at regular time intervals during the 15R jackpot round game.

Further, in the support state generated after the end of the jackpot round game in the "15R probability variation jackpot", when the game ball flows down to either the right side game area 30r or the left side game area 30l, the ball enters the second start port 33b. It will be possible. When the result of the lottery by the small hit lottery function performed when the ball enters the second starting port 33b is the small hit winning result, the small hit gaming state occurs. In the small hit game state, a small hit game is performed in which the large winning opening 32a is opened and closed in a small hit opening / closing pattern. In the small hit opening / closing pattern, when a game ball flows down to the right game area 30r at regular time intervals during the support state, a second number (14 counts) of game balls, which is smaller than the first number, is in the small hit game. Since it is possible to enter the large winning opening 32a, the number of prize balls (154 balls) obtained by the second number (14 counts) × the first prize ball number (11 balls / count) is paid out. Further, in the small hit opening / closing pattern, when the game ball flows down to the left game area 30l at regular time intervals during the support state, the prize ball based on the entry into the general winning opening 31d and the prize ball during the small hit round game are performed. Since a third number (3 counts) of game balls, which is less than the number of 2, can enter the large winning opening 32a, the third number (3 counts) x the first prize ball number (11 balls / count). The number of third prize balls (33 balls) that can be obtained in is paid out. That is, based on the game ball that flows down the left side game area 30l at regular time intervals during the support game state and enters the large winning opening 32a during the small hit game and the game ball that enters the general winning opening 31d. The number of prize balls to be paid out is less than the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the game balls that flow down the right game area 30r at regular time intervals during the support state and enter the large winning opening 32a during the small hit game. Become.

Therefore, when the "15R jackpot" is won, more prize balls can be won in the left game area 30l than in the right game area 30r during the 15R jackpot round game, but after the 15R jackpot round game is completed. During the support state, more prize balls can be obtained in the right side game area 30r than in the left side game area 30l. Even if the flow is continued, it is possible to reduce the difference in the number of prize balls paid out to the player.

The gaming area 30e of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 to 82. FIG. 75 is a front view of the game board 30 of the pachinko machine 10 of the fourteenth embodiment. FIG. 76 is a perspective view of the variable winning device 32, FIG. 76 (a) shows a state in which the main body case 400 is attached, and FIG. 76 (b) shows a state in which the plate portion 402 is removed from the main body case 400. 77 is a front view of the variable winning device 32, FIG. 77 (a) shows a state in which the main body case 400 is attached, and FIG. 77 (b) shows a state in which the plate portion 402 is removed from the main body case 400. 78 is a sectional view taken along line AA of the variable winning device 32 shown in FIG. 77 (a), FIG. 78 (a) shows a closed state of the variable winning device 32, and FIG. 78 (b) shows a variable winning device. The open state of the apparatus 32 is shown. FIG. 79 is a perspective view of the opening / closing door 410 and the drive unit 430. FIG. 80 is a sectional view taken along line BB of the variable winning device 32 shown in FIG. 77 (a), and is particularly a diagram showing a stop portion 450. FIG. 81 is an exploded perspective view of the variable winning device 32 as seen from the front side of the gaming machine. FIG. 82 is an exploded perspective view of the variable winning device 32 as seen from the rear side of the gaming machine.

First, the positional relationship of the variable winning device 32 within the game area 30a will be described.

In the game area 30a, the third symbol display device 42 is arranged at a position slightly above the central portion, and the left side game area 30l narrower than the width of the third symbol display device 42 on the left side of the third symbol display device 42. Is formed, and a right game area 30r is formed on the right side of the third symbol display device 42. In the right game area 30r, a branch rail 401a that divides the right game area 30r into left and right is arranged. In the right side game area 30r, the first right side game area 30r3 is formed on the right side of the branch rail 401a, and the second right side game area 30r4 is formed on the left side of the branch rail 401a. A variable winning device 32 is arranged downstream of the first right side gaming area 30r3 and the second right side gaming area 30r4. A lower gaming region 30d is formed downstream of the variable winning device 32. In the lower gaming region 30d, a first starting port 33a is arranged above the center, and a second starting port 33b is arranged diagonally downward to the right of the first starting port 33a. On the upstream side of the first right side game area 30r3, a through gate 34b for detecting the passage of a game ball flowing down the first right side game area 30r3 while being changed in the flow direction by a nail 39 is arranged. On the upstream side of the second right side gaming area 30r4, a through gate 34c for detecting the passage of a game ball flowing down the second right side gaming area 30r4 along the branch rail 401a is arranged.

In a normal gaming state, the player launches a gaming ball into the left gaming area 30l to enter the first starting port 33a. If the result of the lottery based on the entry into the first starting port 33a is the jackpot winning result, the game shifts to the jackpot round game. During the jackpot round game, a right-handed game is performed in which a game ball is launched into the right side game area 30r to enter the variable winning device 32. During the right-handed game, the game ball may flow down to either the first right-hand game area 30r3 or the second right-hand game area 30r4. After the jackpot round ends, a support state (at high probability) occurs as in Examples 12 and 13. During the support state, a right-handed game is performed in which a game ball is launched into the right game area 30r to enter the second starting port 33b. Even during the right-handed game in the support state, the game ball may flow down to either the first right side game area 30r3 or the second right side game area 30r4. The game ball launched during the right-handed game in the supported state passes through the inside of the variable winning device 32 and flows down toward the second starting port 33b. A big hit lottery and a small hit lottery are performed based on the ball entering the second starting port 33b. During the support state, small hits are more likely to occur than big hits. In the small hit game based on the small hit winning, the opening time of the large winning opening 32A of the variable winning device 32 is shorter (0.4 seconds or 2.0 seconds) than the upper limit opening time (30 seconds) during the big hit round game. ) Is set.

In the first right side game area 30r3, many accessories such as nails 39 are arranged, but in the second right side game area 30r4, obstacles such as nails 39 are hardly arranged, so that the first right side is arranged. The game ball flows down more smoothly than the game area 30r3. Therefore, the time required to flow down the first right side gaming area 30r3 and enter the variable winning device 32 is longer than the time required to flow down the second right side gaming area 30r4 and enter the variable winning device 32. It takes a long time. In the jackpot round game, the variable winning device 32 has an upper limit number of game balls entering the big winning opening 32A within the upper limit time for any of the game balls flowing down either the first right side game area 30r3 or the second right side game area 30r4. Almost all the game balls flowing down the first right side game area 30r3 and the second right side game area 30r4 once enter the variable winning device 32. However, as will be described later, the variable winning device 32 has a function of stopping the entered game ball inside while the large winning opening 32A is closed, but the game ball that flows down the first right game area 30r3 and enters the ball. Rather, the game ball that flows down and enters the second right side game area 30r4 is quickly discharged to the outside. Therefore, in the second right side gaming area 30r4, waste balls are more likely to occur than in the first right side gaming area 30r3. That is, in one jackpot round game, the number of game balls to be fired tends to be larger when aiming at the second right side game area 30r4 than when aiming at the first right side game area 30r3. It should be noted that even in the first right side game area 30r3, waste balls may be generated during the jackpot round game, but the number is smaller than the number of waste balls generated in the second right side game area 30r4 during the same jackpot round game. As a result, at the time when one big hit round game is completed, the player acquires the game ball in the first right side game area 30r3 rather than the game ball in the second right side game area 30r4. The profits that can be made tend to increase.

When the game ball is allowed to flow down to the first right side game area 30r3, it takes a long time to enter the variable winning device 32, so that it is difficult to allow the game ball to enter the large winning opening 32A during the small hit game. When the game ball is allowed to flow down to the second right side game area 30r4, it takes a short time to enter the variable winning device 32, so that it is easy for the small hit game ball to enter the large winning opening 32A. Therefore, in the small hit game or the like, the variable winning device 32 enters a larger number of game balls into the large winning opening 32A in the second right side game area 30r4 than in the first right side game area 30r3 in the small hit game or the like. Can be made to. As a result, when the big hit round game and the small hit game occur a plurality of times as in Examples 12 and 13, the first prize ball and the waste ball based on the ball entering the big prize opening 32A are taken into consideration. It is possible to reduce the difference in profits that the player can obtain between the case where the game ball is continuously fired aiming at the right side game area 30r3 and the case where the game ball is continuously fired aiming at the second right side game area 30r4.

Next, the configuration of the variable winning device 32 will be described. The variable winning device 32 is configured to separately enter the game ball flowing down the first right side game area 30r3 and the game ball flowing down the second right side game area 30r4. The variable winning device 32 is roughly divided into a main body case 400 in which the large winning opening switches 223a, 223b and the like are housed, a back surface side member 420 attached so as to close the back surface side of the main body case 400, and a large winning opening 32A. It is composed of an opening / closing door 410 that opens / closes, and a drive unit 430 that drives the opening / closing door 410 into an open state and a closed state.

The main body case 400 has a plate portion 402 formed of a transparent resin material located on the frontmost side of the variable winning device 32, a frame-shaped member 403 protruding from the plate portion 402 toward the back surface side, and a frame shape. It is a case member provided with a covering portion 404 protruding toward the back surface side at a distance slightly wider than at least one game ball above the member 403.

The frame-shaped member 403 has a first ball inflow portion 406a and a first ball inflow portion 406a that form an opening through which a game ball flowing down the first right side game region 30r3 can flow in by closing the back surface side thereof with the back surface side member 420. A first ball inflow area 412a forming an opening through which a game ball flowing into the inflow section 406a can enter, and a second ball inflow section forming an opening in which a game ball flowing down the second right side game area 30r4 can enter. A guide passage that guides the game ball that has entered the first ball inflow area 412a and the second ball entry area 412b that forms an opening through which the game ball that has flowed into the second ball inflow portion 406b can enter. The first front guide passage portion 422a forming the guide passage portion 422a forming a guide passage for guiding the game ball entering the second entry area 412b downward, and the first entry area 412a, A ball outflow portion 407 that forms an opening for allowing a game ball that has not entered the second entry area 412b to flow out to the game area 30a is provided. Further, the frame-shaped member 403 contains the first storage portions 424a and 223b in which the large winning opening switches 223a and 223b for detecting the game ball passing through the first front guide passage portion 422a and the second front guide passage portion 422b are housed. 2 The storage portion 424b is formed. The above-mentioned first ball entry area 412a and the second ball entry area 412b constitute the large winning opening 32A. Note that FIGS. 76 and 77 show a state in which the large winning opening 32A is closed by the opening / closing door 410.

The back surface side member 420 has a back surface side plate portion 421 attached to the game board 30. There is a gap slightly wider than one game ball between the back side plate portion 421 and the plate portion 402 of the main body case 400 described above. The back side plate portion 421 has a switch insertion hole h1 for inserting the large winning opening switches 223a and 223b, and a ball passage hole h2 for passing a game ball on the first front guide passage portion 422a and the second front guide passage portion 422b. Further, a stop ball passage hole h3 for passing a game ball stopped in the stop portion 450, which will be described later, and a door insertion hole h4 into which the opening / closing door 410 is inserted are formed. Further, the back surface side plate portion 421 includes a first rear guide passage portion 423a, a second rear guide passage portion 423b, and the like connected to the first front guide passage portion 422a and the second front guide passage portion 422b of the main body case 400. It is provided so as to protrude toward the back surface side. Further, the back surface side plate portion 421 is provided with a passage forming portion i1 forming a stop passage 451 for passing a game ball stopped at the stop portion 450 on the front side and the rear side of the stop ball passage hole h3.

The stop passage 451 guides the game ball from the first entry area 412a to the second entry area 412b while changing the traveling direction of the game ball stopped at the stop portion 450 toward the downstream side. Is. The stop passage 451 includes backward guide portions 451a and 451c (also referred to as passage portions 451a and 451c) that guide the game ball that has flowed into the stop portion 450 from the front side to the back side of the board surface of the game board 30 and the backward guide portion. The front-facing guide portions 451b and 451d (also referred to as passage portions 451b and 451d) that guide the game balls guided by the 451a and 451c from the back side to the front side of the board surface of the game board 30 are alternately connected. be. That is, the stop passage 451 is a passage having a shape like connecting two U-shaped passages. By configuring the stop portion 450 with the stop passage 451 it is possible to set a long stop time of the game ball in the limited space of the stop portion 450. Further, the staying time of the game ball is determined by changing the inclination angle of each of the passage portions 451a to 451d constituting the stop passage 451, the entire inclination angle of the stop passage 451 and the bending angle of the passage portions 451a to 451d. Can be decided at the time of. Once the stop time of the game ball is determined, the interval time between each round during the jackpot round game can be determined by the length corresponding to the stop time. Specifically, the interval time is determined to be the same as or slightly longer than the dwell time. For example, in this embodiment, the stop time when the game ball is passed through the stop passage 451 with the first variable ball entry device 32a placed horizontally is 5 seconds, so that the interval time is the stop time. It is determined to be shorter than 3 seconds. In small hit games and the like, the interval time is set to a shorter time regardless of the dwell time.

The opening / closing door 410 is in a closed state in which the first entry area 412a and the second entry area 412b of the large winning opening 32A of the main body case 400 are closed at least to the extent that the game ball cannot enter, and the game ball enters. It opens and closes in the open state where the ball can be opened. Specifically, the opening / closing door 410 is retracted to the back side of the door insertion hole h4 to open the large winning opening 32A, and is advanced to the front side of the door insertion hole h4 to close the large winning opening 32A. Will be.

The opening / closing door 410 is a horizontally long plate-shaped member extending from the upper part of the first ball entry area 412a to the upper part of the second ball entry area 412b in front view, and is a horizontally long plate-shaped member extending from the first ball entry area 412a side to the second ball entry area 412b. It is formed so as to descend to the left toward the side. Further, the opening / closing door 410 is formed so that the first ball entry region 412a side is substantially the same height as the first ball inflow portion 406a and the second ball entry region 412b side is substantially the same height as the ball outflow portion 407. It is formed. As a result, the game ball that has flowed in from the first ball inflow section 406a is likely to flow into the stop passage 451 from the opening / closing door 410, and the game ball that has passed through the stop passage 451 is likely to flow out from the ball outflow section 407. .. Further, the opening / closing door 410 is connected to the drive unit 430 on the rear end side.

The drive unit 430 has a large winning opening solenoid 432 that applies power for operating the opening / closing door 410, and a conversion mechanism 440 that converts the power applied by the large winning opening solenoid 432 into a force that moves the opening / closing door 410 back and forth. And have.

The large winning opening solenoid 432 is a movable piece 434 that is displaced to the first position P1 shown in FIG. 78 (a) and the second position P2 shown in FIG. 78 (b) retracted to the back side of the first position P1. Equipped with.

On the back surface side of the above-mentioned back surface side member 420, a guide frame 439 having a solenoid accommodating portion 437 accommodating the rear side of the large winning opening solenoid 432 and a door accommodating portion 438 accommodating the opening / closing door 410, and a guide frame 439. A termination frame 470 located at the rear end of the variable winning device 32 in the back direction is attached to the rear side. The large winning opening solenoid 432 housed in the solenoid accommodating portion 437 is attached to the back surface side member 420 with the front end fixed by the fixing plate 436.

The conversion mechanism 440 is provided on a rotating main body portion 444 that rotates as a rotating shaft 442 in a direction orthogonal to the advancing / retreating direction of the movable piece 434 in a substantially horizontal direction, and on the base end side of the rotating main body portion 444. , The opening / closing door 410 in a state of being locked to the locking portion 446 locked to the movable piece 434 and the locking hole formed at the rear portion of the opening / closing door 410 provided at the tip of the rotating main body portion 444. It is provided with an extrusion portion 448 that pushes forward and backward.

The drive unit 430 retracts the movable piece 434 from the first position P1 to the second position P2, so that the rotation main body unit 444 rotates backward. At this time, the extruded portion 448 of the rotating main body portion 444 pushes the opening / closing door 410 backward, so that the opening / closing door 410 retracts to the back side and becomes an open state, making it difficult for the game ball to stop. On the contrary, the drive unit 430 advances the movable piece 434 from the second position P2 to the first position P1, so that the rotation main body unit 444 is rotated forward. At this time, the extruded portion 448 of the rotating main body portion 444 pushes the opening / closing door 410 forward, so that the opening / closing door 410 advances toward the front side and becomes a closed state, so that the game ball can be stopped.

Next, the large winning opening opening / closing process will be described with reference to FIG. 83. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing a large winning opening opening / closing process.

As described above with reference to FIG. 9, the large winning opening opening / closing process corresponds to the large winning opening opening / closing process (step S205) in the normal processing performed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261.

In step S1501, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the jackpot random number counter C1 has won the jackpot. If the jackpot is won, the process proceeds to step S1503, and if the jackpot is not won, the process proceeds to step S1503.

In step S1502, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the big hit random number counter C1 has won the small hit. If the small hit is won, the process proceeds to step S1503, and if the small hit is not won, the game is lost, and this process is terminated.

In step S1503, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 controls the drive unit 430 so as to open the large winning opening 32A of the variable winning device 32, and opens according to the big hit round game or the small hit game by the timer function. Start timing the time. By opening the big winning opening 32A, the opening of one round of the big hit round game or one of the small hit games is started.

If there is a ball entering the first entry area 412a constituting the large winning opening 32A between step S1503 and step S1504, the game ball is detected by the first large winning opening switch 223a and is large. When there is a ball entering the second entry area 412b constituting the winning opening 32A, the game ball is detected by the first large winning opening switch 223b.

In step S1504, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 has an upper limit number of balls (for example, a jackpot round) corresponding to one round of the jackpot round game (or one opening of the small hit game) to the big winning opening 32A of the variable winning device 32. It detects whether or not a game ball has won a prize of 10 counts for a game and 4 counts for a small hit game, and also uses a timer function to detect the upper limit opening time according to a big hit round game or a small hit game (for example, a big hit). It detects whether or not 30 seconds have passed for a round game, 0.4 seconds for a small hit game, and the like). If there is a prize for a game ball with an upper limit number of balls in the large winning opening 32A of the variable winning device 32, or if the time counting by the timer function has passed the upper limit opening time, the process proceeds to step S1505, and the large winning device 32 If the winning opening 32A has not yet won a prize for the game ball having the maximum number of balls, or if the time counting by the timer function has not passed the upper limit opening time, step S1504 is repeated.

In step S1505, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 controls the drive unit 430 so as to close the large winning opening 32A of the variable winning device 32, stops the time counting by the timer function, and proceeds to step S1507. One round ends by closing the large winning opening 32A.

In step S1506, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 closes the big winning opening 32A between each round (in this embodiment, 3 seconds for a big hit round game, 3 seconds for a small hit game, etc.). 0.6 seconds), the drive unit 430 is controlled so as to keep the large winning opening 32A closed.

In step S1507, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the game of, for example, 15 rounds set as the big hit round game has been completed, and ends the final round of the big hit round game (the final opening of the small hit game). If this is done, this process will end. If the game of the final round (final opening) has not been completed, the process returns to step S1503, and steps S503 to S1507 are repeated.

Next, the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing door 410 in the variable winning device 32 will be described.

First, in the big hit round game, the support state, and the small hit game, a case where the game ball is made to flow down to the first right side game area 30r3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 and 85. FIG. 84 is a perspective view illustrating the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing door 410, and FIG. 84A shows a closed state before the jackpot state and a game ball flowing down the first right side game area 30r3, and FIG. 84 (a) shows. b) shows the open state of the first round in the jackpot state and the game ball flowing down the first right side game area 30r3. FIG. 85 is a perspective view illustrating the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing door 410 following FIG. 84, and FIG. 85A shows a closed state after the first round and a game ball flowing down the first right side gaming area 30r3. , FIG. 85B shows the open state after the second round and the game ball flowing down the first right side game area 30r3. It should be noted that FIGS. 84 and 85 are views obtained by removing the plate portion 402 from the main body case 400, as in FIG. 76 (b).

When the result of the lottery based on the entry into the first starting port 33a is the big hit winning result, the large winning opening solenoid 432 is in the operating state, and the opening / closing door 410 is the first entry area 412a and the first ball entry area 412a of the large winning opening 32A. 2 The ball entry area 412b is opened. When the game ball is allowed to flow down to the first right side game area 30r3, in the first round of the jackpot state, the game ball is not normally stopped at the stop portion 450, so that the game ball flowing in from the first ball inflow portion 406a is , Only the first ball entry area 412a is entered. The game ball that has entered the first entry area 412a is detected by the first large winning opening switch 223a deployed immediately below the game ball. When the ball entry detection by the first large winning opening switch 223a reaches the upper limit number of balls or the upper limit opening time elapses, the open / close door 410 is returned to the closed state. During the time when the opening / closing door 410 is closed (3 seconds in the jackpot round game in this embodiment), the game ball flowing in from the first ball inflow portion 406a passes over the opening / closing door 410 and stops at the stop portion 450. Will be done. That is, the game ball that has passed over the opening / closing door 410 flows into the stop passage 451 and is stopped at the stop portion 450 for a period until it finishes passing through the passage portions 451a to 451d constituting the stop passage 451. In this way, when the number of game balls stopped at the stop portion 450 increases, the opening / closing door 410 becomes the large winning opening 32A of the variable winning device 32 during the period when the opening / closing door 410 changes between the open state and the closed state by the amount of the reduced waste balls. The number of game balls that can be entered increases. In addition, as the number of wasted balls is reduced, the number of game balls fired during the jackpot round game is reduced, so that the profit that the player can obtain increases.

The game ball that has flowed into the stop passage 451 is first guided in the order of the back facing guide portion 451a, the front facing guide portion 451b, the back facing guide portion 451c, and the front facing guide portion 451d. While the game ball that first flows into the stop passage 451 passes through the stop passage 451, the open / close door 410 is kept closed. Then, after the game ball that first flows into the stop passage 451 finishes passing through the stop passage 451, the opening / closing door 410 is returned to the open state again. The timing at which the opening / closing door 410 is returned to the open state is at least the timing until the game ball that first flows into the stop passage 451 finishes passing through the stop passage 451 and enters the second entry area 412b. It is preferable in design that the game ball that has flowed into the stop passage 451 is returned to the open state immediately before the game ball has passed through the stop passage 451. Since the passing mode of the game ball entering and exiting the front and back of the game board 30 is visually recognized by the player via the transparent plate portion 402, it is necessary to add fun to the game in the jackpot state. Can be done.

While the opening / closing door 410 is in the open state, it is detected that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls have been won in the large winning opening 32A, or the maximum opening time (for example, 30 seconds) is detected by the timer function. ) Has passed, the process proceeds to the second round.

In the second round, the game ball that has passed through the stop passage 451 can enter the second ball entry area 412b while the opening / closing door 410 is in the open state. Further, since the first ball entry area 412a is opened at the same time as the opening of the second ball entry area 412b, the game ball flowing in from the ball inflow section 406 can enter the first ball entry area 412a. In this way, after the second round, when the opening / closing door 410 is opened, the game ball that has been stopped at the stop portion 450 and the ball that has newly flowed into the variable winning device 32 are the large winning openings 32A. It is possible to enter the ball at different points at the same time. Therefore, it is possible to increase the number of game balls that enter the large winning opening 32A of the variable winning device 32 during the period when the opening / closing door 410 changes between the open state and the closed state.

In addition, the variable winning device 32 is provided with a stop 450 so that the inflowing game ball can be entered at different points of the big winning opening 32A, so that the big winning round can be won in each round during the big hit round game. It is possible to shorten the time required for each round when the game ball that has entered the mouth 32A moves to the next round when 10 balls are counted. This point will be described with reference to FIG. 86. FIG. 86 is a timing chart showing the opening / closing timing of the opening / closing door 410 and the detection timing of the game ball.

In this description, the time required from the time when the game ball flowing down the game area 30a flows into the first ball inflow portion 406a of the variable winning device 32 to the time when it is detected by the first large winning opening switch 223a is 1 second. Further, it is assumed that the game ball enters the ball inflow portion 406 of the variable winning device 32 at 1-second intervals immediately after the start of each round in which the opening / closing door 410 is opened.

In the first round, the entry of 10 balls is detected only by the first large winning opening switch 223a. This is because, in the first round, there is usually no game ball stopped at the stop portion 450, so even if the large winning opening 32A is in the open state, there is no game ball that enters the second entry area 412b. Is. After the first big winning opening switch 223a detects the entry of the tenth ball, the big winning opening 32A is closed and the first round ends. Therefore, the time required for the first round is 1 second x 10 balls = 10 seconds.

Immediately after the first round is completed and the large winning opening 32A is closed, the game ball is stopped at the stopping portion 450, and the large winning opening 32A is closed (3 seconds in this embodiment). It is assumed that three game balls are stopped at intervals of one second. After the closing time of the large winning opening 32A has elapsed, the large winning opening 32A is opened again and the second round is started.

In the second round, since the game ball is stopped at the stop portion 450, the game ball can enter the second ball entry area 412b at the same time as the first ball entry area 412a. However, in this embodiment, since the stop time is longer than the interval time, the stop ball is actually entered into the second entry area 412b from the timing after the opening of the second entry area 412b. Become. About 2 seconds after the start of the second round, three game balls enter the second entry area 412b at intervals of 1 second. The first large winning opening switch 223b detects three game balls that have entered the second entry area 412b. Immediately after the opening of the large winning opening 32A, the game balls that have flowed into the ball inflow portion 406 enter the first ball entry area 412a at intervals of 1 second. The first large winning opening switch 223a detects seven game balls that have entered the first entry area 412a. After the first big winning opening switch 223a finishes detecting the seventh game ball, the big winning opening 32A is closed again, and the second round ends. Therefore, the time required for the second round is 1 second x 7 balls = 7 seconds. This is because the number of game balls to be detected by the first special winning opening switch 223a is reduced by three balls detected by the first large winning opening switch 223b, that is, by the number of stationary balls.

Immediately after the second round is completed and the large winning opening 32A is closed, the game ball is stopped at the stopping portion 450, and the large winning opening 32A is closed (3 seconds in this embodiment). It is assumed that four game balls are stopped at intervals of one second. After the closing time of the large winning opening 32A has elapsed, the large winning opening 32A is opened again and the third round is started.

Even in the third round, since the game ball is stopped at the stop portion 450, the game ball can enter the second ball entry area 412b at the same time as the first ball entry area 412a. About 2 seconds after the start of the third round, the game balls stopped at the stop portion 450 are continuously entered into the second entry area 412b by four game balls. The first large winning opening switch 223b detects four game balls that have entered the second entry area 412b. Immediately after the opening of the large winning opening 32A, the game balls that have flowed into the ball inflow portion 406 enter the first ball entry area 412a with six game balls at 1-second intervals. The first large winning opening switch 223a detects six game balls that have entered the first entry area 412a. After the first big winning opening switch 223a finishes detecting the sixth game ball, the big winning opening 32A is closed again, and the third round ends. Therefore, the time required for the third round is 1 second x 6 balls = 6 seconds. This is because the number of game balls to be detected by the first large winning opening switch 223a is smaller than that in the second round because the number of game balls stopped at the stop portion 450 has increased.

After that, if there is a game ball stopped at the stop portion 450 until the end of the 15th round, the round can be completed in a shorter time than the time required for the first round without stopping. Further, when the game balls stopped at the stop portion 450 enter the big winning opening 32A, the number of game balls to be fired during the big hit round game is reduced by the amount of the waste balls generated in the conventional interval time. Therefore, when the game ball is made to flow down to the first right side game area 30r3 during the big hit round game, the waste balls can be reduced and the profit that the player can obtain can be increased.

When the support state occurs after the jackpot round game is completed, the big winning opening solenoid 432 is in the non-operating state, and the opening / closing door 410 is the first entry area 412a and the second entry area of the big winning opening 32A. It is in a state where the 412b is closed. In this state, the game ball flowing down the first right side game area 30r3 can flow into the variable winning device 32 from the first ball inflow section 406a, but the game ball flowing down from the first ball inflow section 406a is large. Do not win the prize opening 32A. That is, the game ball that has flowed in from the first ball inflow portion 406a passes over the opening / closing door 410 and enters the stop passage 451. The game ball that has passed through the stop passage 451 passes over the opening / closing door 410. It is discharged from the ball outflow portion 407 toward the lower gaming area 30d located outside the variable winning device 32.

If there is a ball entering the second starting port 33b during the support state and the result of the lottery based on the ball entering the second starting port 33b is a small hit, the game that has flowed in from the first ball inflow section 406a. The ball can enter the first ball entry area 412a during the opening of the opening / closing door 410 including the first opening and the subsequent opening, and the ball is stopped at the stop portion 450 immediately before the small hit game occurs. If there is, it becomes possible to enter the first ball entry area 412a and the second ball entry area 412b. The opening time of the opening / closing door 410 during the small hit game is shorter (0.4 seconds or 2.0 seconds) than the opening time of the big hit round game. Since many accessories such as nails 39 are arranged in the first right side game area 30r3, it takes a long time for the game ball to reach the variable winning device 32. Therefore, in the small hit game, when the game ball is made to flow down to the first right side game area 30r3, it is difficult to make the ball enter the large winning opening 32A.

Next, in the big hit round game, the support state, and the small hit game, a case where the game ball is made to flow down to the second right side game area 30r4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. FIG. 87 is a perspective view illustrating the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing door 410, and FIG. 87 (a) shows a closed state before the jackpot state and a game ball flowing down the second right game area 30r4. 87 (b) shows the open state of the first round in the jackpot state and the game ball flowing down the second right side game area 30r4. FIG. 88 is a perspective view illustrating the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing door 410 following FIG. 87, and FIG. 88A shows a closed state after the first round and a game ball flowing down the second right game area 30r4. 88 (b) shows the open state after the second round and the game ball flowing down the second right game area 30r4.

When the result of the lottery based on the entry into the second starting port 33b is a big hit, the game ball flowing in from the second ball inflow portion 406b opens the opening / closing door 410 including the first round and the subsequent rounds. In the middle, only the second ball entry area 412b can be hit. The game ball that has entered the second entry area 412b is detected by the second large winning opening switch 223b deployed immediately below the game ball. When the ball entry detection by the second large winning opening switch 223b reaches the upper limit number of balls or the upper limit opening time elapses, the open / close door 410 is returned to the closed state. While the opening / closing door 410 is in the closed state, the game ball flowing in from the second ball inflow portion 406b is stopped at the stop portion 450, but the game ball flowing in from the second ball inflow portion 406b is stopped at the stop portion 450. Since it can be stopped only at the passage portions 451c and 451d constituting the above, the number of game balls to be stopped is smaller than that of the game balls flowing in from the first ball inflow portion 406a. Therefore, during the jackpot round game, when the game ball is made to flow down to the second right side game area 30r4, waste balls are more likely to occur than when the game ball is made to flow down to the first right side game area 30r3.

When a support state occurs after the end of the jackpot round game, the game ball flowing down the second right game area 30r4 in the support state can flow into the variable winning device 32 from the second ball inflow unit 406b. Since the opening / closing door 410 is closed during the support state, the game ball flowing in from the second ball inflow portion 406b does not win the large winning opening 32A (second entry area 412b). That is, the game ball that has flowed in from the second ball inflow portion 406b falls into the passage portion 451c and enters the stop passage 451. It passes over the 410 and is discharged from the ball outflow portion 407 to the outside of the variable winning device 32. Some of the game balls discharged from the ball outflow portion 407 enter the second starting port 33b.

If there is a ball entering the second starting port 33b during the support state and the result of the lottery based on the ball entering the second starting port 33b is a small hit, the game that has flowed in from the second ball inflow section 406b. The ball can enter only the second entry area 412b during the opening of the opening / closing door 410 including the first opening and the subsequent opening. The opening time of the opening / closing door 410 during the small hit game is shorter (0.4 seconds or 2.0 seconds) than the opening time of the big hit round game, but the second right side game area 30r4 is the first right side game. Since the game ball reaches the variable winning device 32 earlier than the area 30r3, when the game ball is made to flow down to the second right side game area 30r4, it is more than when the game ball is made to flow down to the first right side game area 30r3. It is easy for a game ball to enter the large winning opening 32A. Therefore, during the small hit game, when the game ball is flowed down to the second right side game area 30r4, the prize ball is based on the entry into the large winning opening 32A, rather than when the game ball is flowed down to the first right side game area 30r3. It is easy to acquire a lot.

As described above, when the game ball is continuously fired in the first right side game area 30r3 during the jackpot round game, almost no wasted ball is generated during the jackpot round game or the game ball is continuously fired in the second right side game area 30r4. There are less wasted balls than in the case. Therefore, the profit that the player can obtain during the jackpot round game is larger when the game ball is continuously fired in the first right side game area 30r3 than when the game ball is continuously fired in the second right side game area 30r4. .. On the other hand, during the small hit game that occurs during the support state, there are more cases where the game ball is flowed down to the second right side game area 30r4 than when the game ball is flowed down to the first right side game area 30r3. The ball can be entered into 32A. That is, in the support state, when the game ball is continuously fired in the second right side game area 30r4, the prize ball for the amount of the ball entered into the large prize opening 32A can be increased every time the small hit game occurs. As a result, when the game ball is continuously fired in either the first right side game area 30r3 or the second right side game area 30r4 from the start of the jackpot round game to the support state, the game is lengthened as in the examples 12 and 13. If you continue, you can make it difficult for the player to make a difference in the profits that can be earned.

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and may be another configuration having the same effect, and can be modified and implemented as follows, for example.

<1> In the above-described first embodiment, the specific sounds output within the specific sound effect period are three types of the first to third specific sounds, but the first specific sound, the second specific sound, and the first specific sound are used. There may be two types, such as a specific sound and a third specific sound.

<2> In the specific sound effect of the first embodiment described above, the first to third specific sound listening images are displayed based on the fact that the pressing of the effect button 80 is detected within the first to third specific sound validity determination periods. However, the first to third specific sound listening images do not correspond to the pitch of the specific sound that the player could hear, but simply within the first to third specific sound validity determination period. It may be based on the fact that the pressing of the effect button 80 is detected. For example, the 1st to 3rd specific sound listening images include a player such as "I heard well!" Based on the fact that the pressing of the effect button 80 is detected within the 1st to 3rd specific sound validity determination period. It may be a complimenting message image. Further, along with the message image, a privilege image that the player may want to see next time may be displayed. The privilege image may be an image suggesting the degree of expectation that a jackpot state will occur, or an image suggesting a gaming state after the end of the jackpot state. By displaying the message image, it is possible to improve the player's motivation (willingness to participate in the specific sound production) to listen firmly even in the next specific sound production.

Further, a message image that scolds the player, such as "Listen firmly!", May be displayed based on the fact that the pressing of the effect button 80 is detected outside the first to third specific sound validity determination periods. When the pressing of the effect button 80 is detected outside the first to third specific sound validity determination periods, the mode, average value, and approximate value of the audible frequency band may be set to be low. In this way, the accuracy of the mode, mean, and approximation of the audible frequency band can be improved.

<3> In the above-described first embodiment, the specific sound effect period is provided during the variable display of the third symbol of the 30 × n (n: integer) game, but other periods, for example, during the jackpot round game. It may be provided in such a place.

<4> In the above-described first embodiment, the specific sound effect is performed on the condition of the 30 × n (n: integer) game time from the power-on of the pachinko machine 10, but other conditions, for example, a predetermined variation display effect, are used. It may be performed on condition that it is performed (for example, a reach effect of a predetermined length required for a specific sound effect is performed).

<5> In Example 1 described above, the pitch of the one-shot notification sound is determined based on the height of the mode of the audible frequency band grasped a predetermined number of times, but is audible that is grasped a predetermined number of times. It may be determined based on the average value or the median value of the frequency band.

<6> In the above-described first embodiment, the timing for starting the output of the first to third specific sounds is a fixed timing, but the timing for starting the output of the first to third specific sounds is not constant. You may. Hereinafter, embodiments in which the timing at which the output of the first to third specific sounds is started is not constant will be described. The specific sound output control means sets the output start timing for starting the output of at least one of the high frequency band specific sound, the low frequency band specific sound, and the intermediate frequency band specific sound during the previous specific sound production period. It is different from the output start timing in. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the inaccurate age group of the player from being grasped based on the fact that the operating means is operated without hitting within the specific sound effect period.

<7> In the above-described first embodiment, based on the fact that the audible frequency band is grasped, the information corresponding to the audible frequency band is only displayed on the display means, but based on the fact that the audible frequency band is grasped, other information is displayed. May be processed. Hereinafter, an embodiment in which other processing is performed based on the grasp of the audible frequency band will be described. The voice output control means includes an estimation means for estimating the age group of the player based on the audible frequency band grasped by the grasping means. When the estimated age group is an age group for which it is legally prohibited to play games in the amusement park, the prohibition notification means notifies that a player in the age group is playing a game. Therefore, if the operating means can be operated within the valid period, the player in the age group who is legally prohibited from playing the game while giving the player the fun of being able to see the information according to the audible frequency band on the display means. It is possible to preferably notify that the game is being performed.

<8> In the second embodiment described above, when the variable display result has a predetermined specific display mode, the higher the height of the audible frequency band grasped by the grasping means, the higher the expectation of reach effect. The number of times it was promoted to directing was increased, but it may be other than that. Hereinafter, embodiments other than the reach promotion effect will be described.

For example, the specific display effect is a notice effect that suggests to the player the degree of expectation of the specific display mode. When the variable display result has a predetermined specific display mode, the display control means changes the advance notice effect into a notice effect with a higher expectation as the height of the audible frequency band grasped by the grasping means is higher. To increase. Therefore, when it is decided that the variable display result will be in a predetermined specific display mode, there are many notice effects with high expectations so that the specific sound having a high frequency band can be heard. You can see the notice effect that changes the number of times.

Further, for example, the specific display effect is operated by the operating means or another operating means during the period in which the first specific display effect (for example, the normal reach effect) in which the expectation level of the specific display mode is a predetermined height is displayed. By doing so, when the start condition for starting the second specific display effect (super reach effect), which has a higher expectation than the first specific display effect (for example, the condition of clearing the game) is satisfied, the first specific is specified. It is a game effect that ends the display effect and executes the second specific display effect, and makes it easier to satisfy the start condition according to the height of the audible frequency band grasped by the grasping means (makes it easier to clear the game). .. Therefore, the more the specific sound having a high frequency band can be heard, the higher the expectation that the start condition of the second specific display effect can be easily satisfied.

<9> In the reach promotion effect of the second embodiment described above, the reach promotion effect is started based on the player listening to any of the first to third specific sounds, but the output mode of the specific sound. And the method of determining the start time of the reach promotion effect may be another method. For example, if the third specific sound → the first specific sound → the second specific sound can be output in this order during the specific sound production period, and all the specific sounds can be heard during the all specific sound output period (of the specific sound). If you answer the output order quiz correctly), the reach promotion production will start. If the correct answer is not given to the output order quiz of the specific sound during the period, a new output order quiz of the specific sound is performed, and if the correct answer is given to the new output order quiz of the specific sound, the reach promotion effect is started. As a result, it is possible to determine the start time point of the reach promotion effect based on the correct answer of the grasped height of the audible frequency band and the output order.

<10> In the step-up notice effect of the fourth embodiment described above, the frequency band is gradually increased in the order of the third specific sound (17 kHz) → the second specific sound (15 kHz) → the first specific sound (15 kHz). However, it is not limited to this, and the first, second, and third specific sounds are output randomly (interwoven), and the first, second, and third specific sounds are output along a certain rhythm. It may be output (interwoven), or a specific sound in the same frequency band may be output multiple times. If the first, second, and third specific sounds are randomly output, it is difficult for the player to predict the specific sound to be output next. If the first, second, and third specific sounds are output along a certain rhythm, it is difficult for the player to predict the specific sound to be output next, rather than simply raising or lowering the specific sound. If the specific sound of the frequency band of the same height is output a plurality of times, it becomes easy for the player who can hear the specific sound of the frequency band of the height. When the frequency band of the specific sound that the player can hear is grasped, the height of the frequency band of the specific sound thereafter may be constant.

<11> In Examples 1 to 5 described above, the pitch of one notification sound (1st to 3rd) is determined (Example 1), the type of reach promotion effect (A to C) is determined, and (implementation). Example 2), determination of the type of look-ahead advance notice effect (1st to 3rd) (Example 3), determination of the number of steps of step-up advance notice effect (Example 4), opening number suggestion effect, and time saving state suggestion effect. In determining the timing (Example 5) and investigating the age group (Example 6), three specific sounds, the first specific sound (19 kHz), the second specific sound (17 kHz), and the third specific sound (15 kHz). Has been used, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pitch of one specific sound may be continuously lowered from 19 kHz to 15 kHz, or the pitch of the specific sound may be increased or decreased. The pitch of each specific sound may be changed. This makes it possible to subdivide the age groups to be decided and surveyed.

<12> In Examples 1 to 5 described above, specific sounds are used in the above-mentioned decisions and investigations, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the auditory sense that the player can recognize audibly, visually, tactilely, or olfactoryly. It may be information, visual information, tactile information or olfactory information. Examples of auditory information include sounds having different volumes in addition to sounds having different frequency bands as in Examples 1 to 5. The lower the age group of the player, the easier it is to hear even a low volume voice, and the higher the age group of the player, the harder it is to hear the low volume. If such a tendency is used in the same manner as in Examples 1 to 5, the above-mentioned determination and investigation can be performed.

<13> An example of visual information is to make the size of the object visually recognized by the player different. The lower the player's age group, the easier it is to see even small-level objects, and the higher the player's age group, the harder it is to see small-level objects. Therefore, for example, instead of the specific sound effect, the player can visually recognize the quiz effect in the visual acuity test format by displaying the quiz effect in the visual acuity test format on the third symbol display device 42 (variable display device 60 in the fifth embodiment). It is possible to grasp the size and fineness (level) of the object. Instead of changing the size and fineness of the object, the speed at which the object operates may be changed. The target may be a game part (a part having a movable part such as a model or a chucker) arranged on the game board 30, for example, other than the image. If such a tendency is used in the same manner as in Examples 1 to 5, the above-mentioned determination and investigation can be performed.

<14> An example of tactile information is to make the magnitude of vibration that the player feels tactilely different. The lower the player's age group, the easier it is to feel a small level of vibration, and the higher the player's age group, the less likely it is to feel a small level of vibration. Therefore, for example, by mounting a vibrator inside the game ball launch handle 18 and vibrating the game ball launch handle 18, it is possible to grasp the magnitude (level) of vibration that the player can tactilely recognize. can. The vibrator may be mounted in a place other than the game ball launching handle 18, for example, a part of the front frame set 14. In that case, in the production, the player puts his / her hand on the place where the vibrator is mounted and feels the magnitude of the vibration. The tactile information may be information other than vibration, such as the sensation of a protrusion hitting the hand or the sensation of the wind hitting the player's body. If such a tendency is used in the same manner as in Examples 1 to 5, the above-mentioned determination and investigation can be performed.

<15> An example of the sense of smell information is to make the intensity of the scent perceived by the player different. The lower the age group of the player, the easier it is to feel the weak level of scent, and the higher the age group of the player, the harder it is to feel the weak level of scent. Therefore, for example, by mounting a scent emitting device such as an aroma diffuser on the front frame set 14 and making the amount (level) of the scent emitted from the scent emitting device different, the player can recognize it olfactoryly. It is possible to grasp the intensity (level) of a possible scent. Specifically, the amount of scent can be made different by adjusting the temperature of the heater that heats the perfume oil. If such a tendency is used in the same manner as in Examples 1 to 5, the above-mentioned determination and investigation can be performed.

<16> In Examples 1 to 5 described above, the second and third specific sounds having a high frequency band such as 15 kHz and 15 kHz and the ultra-high range such as 19 kHz are used as the specific sound or the one notification sound. Although the first specific sound having the frequency band of 1 has been described as an example, the first, second, and third specific sounds may be a specific sound composed of a high frequency band from 1 kHz to 10 kHz. good. Further, the first, second, and third specific sounds may be specific sounds composed of a frequency band in the midrange from 100 kHz to 1 kHz. Further, the first, second, and third specific sounds may be specific sounds composed of a low frequency band such as 10 Hz to 100 Hz. Further, the first, second, and third specific sounds may be specific sounds composed of frequency bands in the high range, the middle range, and the low range.

<17> In Examples 1 to 5 described above, the first, second, and third specific sounds have been described as sounds having a certain frequency height, but are constant such as "pee" and "keen". It is not limited to the sound of, but may be a sound or voice such as "Lalala", "Kyun Kyun", or "I did it". In this case, immediately before the start of the specific sound production, an operation explanation such as "Please press the button when you hear the sound" Lalala "" is displayed, and the player is directed at the timing when the sound "Lalala" is heard. Press the button 80. "Lalala" should be easy to hear by changing the pitch of the sound.

Further, the specific sound effect is an effect of checking whether or not a specific sound can be heard, but it may be an effect of applying a specific sound. For example, just before the start of a specific sound production, "Lalala" played in a certain range of the piano is output first, and an operation explanation such as "Press the button when you hear the same sound as the current sound" is displayed. .. In each specific sound production, was it possible to output "Lalala" played in the same range, "Lalala" played in different ranges, "Lalalalala" with different contents, etc., and operate the directing button 80 with the correct "Lalala"? Depending on whether or not it is, the difference in the sound sensation of the player may be grasped. In this case, a player with a high accuracy rate may be given a one-shot notification sound.

Further, the specific sound effect is not limited to grasping the age group of the player from the frequency band that the player can hear, and may grasp the preference of the player. For example, in the specific sound production, the members of the idol group take turns calling out to the player for each specific sound production (for example, "Do you support me?"), And the player calls out the favorite member. It may be an effect of responding by pressing the effect button 80 (response of "I support you"). In this case, if the results of the specific sound production are collected, the player can grasp which member is preferred. As a result, in the one-shot notification sound, the player's interest in the one-shot notification effect can be improved by outputting the one-shot notification message "I did it" in the voice of the player's favorite member. Further, in the game machine-linked game, the player can be further encouraged to participate in the specific sound production by giving a privilege according to the number of times the player responds to the call of the member. Further, in the game machine-linked game, even when a player plays a game on a different game machine (or a different hall), the player's favorite member grasped in advance can be grasped by the game machine and reflected in the production. ..

<18> In the above-described first embodiment, the one-shot notification timing at which the one-shot notification sound is output is set as a predetermined timing, but the one-shot notification timing may be changed according to the player. For example, when the upper limit of the first notification sound is determined to be the first notification sound and the first notification sound is output, the first notification sound is usually a sound that is difficult to hear, and the player concerned also has the sound. Since there is a risk of overhearing, one notification timing may be set multiple times during the reach production period. On the other hand, the upper limit of the first notification sound is determined to be the first notification sound, but when the second and third first notification sounds are actually output, the second and third notification sounds are output for the player. Since the third notification sound is an easy-to-hear sound, the one notification timing may be set only once during the reach period.

<19> In the first embodiment described above, the specific sound effect is performed during the first reach effect after the 30 × nth variation, but it may be performed during the 30 × nth variation. In this case, it is necessary to ensure that the 30 × nth fluctuation time is longer than the specific sound effect period. Therefore, when the specific sound effect is performed during the 30 × nth variation, it is necessary to predetermine that the 30 × nth variation pattern for performing the specific sound effect is performed for a longer time than the specific sound effect period. .. Specifically, such a specific sound effect is performed 20 × n times (n = 1 to 10) during a predetermined number of times (for example, 200 times) after the end of the jackpot round, which occurs when a jackpot with a time reduction is won. ) Can be realized by storing a fluctuation pattern table in which the fluctuation time is longer than the specific sound production time.

<20> In Examples 1 to 5 described above, in order to grasp the age group of the player, a specific sound for testing the hearing of the player (with different frequency heights) is output, but the sense of the player (the sense of the player (different frequency height)). In order to grasp hobbies, interests, and preferences other than the five senses), information that draws out the hobbies, interests, and preferences of the player may be output. For example, in order to grasp the tastes of the players, multiple groups of idol groups are made to appear one by one for each specific production, and the player is made to select the member who has the most favorable impression among the idol groups of each group. Then, in the one-shot announcement production, the selected members who gathered the members who have the most favorable impressions in each group are displayed. Specifically, the member who has the most favorable impression is selected by the selection buttons 71 to 74 and determined by the effect button 80. Thereby, the preference of the player can be suitably investigated. In addition, by assembling the subsequent productions (one-shot notification production, non-variable normal game, variable, reach, background image during jackpot round, music) centered on the members who gathered the most favorable impressions, these productions It is possible to improve the interest of the player regarding. The above-mentioned images of each set of idle groups correspond to the "reaction promotion information" of the following invention.

Further, in order to grasp the hobby and interest of the player, information that draws out the hobby and interest of the player may be output. For example, in order to grasp the interests and hobbies of the player, multiple quizzes of one genre selected from multiple genres such as sports, music, fashion, and games are asked for each specific production, and the genre with a high accuracy rate is selected. Understand that the genre is close to the player's interests and hobbies. Specifically, the answer to the quiz is selected by the selection buttons 71 to 74 and determined by the effect button 80. This makes it possible to suitably investigate the hobbies and seasonings of the player. In addition, by assembling the subsequent production centering on the player's interests and hobbies, the subsequent production can be made closer to the player's interests and hobbies. The images related to the above-mentioned quizzes of each set correspond to the "reaction promotion information" of the following invention.

<21> In Examples 1 to 5 described above, in order to grasp the age group of the player, a specific sound for testing the hearing of the player (with a different frequency height) is output, but other methods are used. You may know the age group of the player. For example, the age group of the player may be grasped by giving a quiz in which the correct answer rate tends to differ depending on the age group of the player. Specifically, for each age group of players such as those in their 20s, 30s, 40s, etc., a generational intro quiz consisting of hit songs familiar to players in each age group is provided for each specific sound production. You can grasp the age group of the player from the generation of the intro quiz that answered correctly. Even by such a method, the age group of the player can be preferably grasped.

<22> In the above-mentioned Examples 1 to 5, a voice output unit 24b for outputting a specific sound or a one-shot notification sound is provided in addition to the voice output unit 24a for outputting normal voice, but one voice output unit is provided. You may output a normal voice, a specific sound, and a one-shot notification sound only.

<23> In the above-described embodiment, the case where the machine is used in a pachinko machine is described, but it may be used in other types of gaming machines such as slot machines.

For example, the present invention may be carried out on various types of gaming machines (for example, first-class, third-class, etc.), or on pachinko machines of a type different from the above-mentioned examples. For example, once a big hit is made, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item or a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the big hit until multiple (for example, two or three times) big hits occur. It may be carried out as.). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine may be in a specific gaming state on condition that the ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that is in a specific gaming state when the ball enters a predetermined winning opening. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various gaming machines such as an arrange ball type pachinko, a sparrow ball, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine fused with each other.

As a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a variable display means for variablely displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball can be used. Some are not prepared. In this case, after the predetermined amount of the game ball is thrown in based on the predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol change is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or the predetermined amount. With the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a jackpot state advantageous to the player is generated on condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a lower saucer. A large amount of balls are paid out.

<24> In Examples 7 to 10 and 12, an example will be described in which the game board 30 includes a game component (branch rail 401) that divides the right side game area 30r into a first right side game area 30r1 and a second right side game area 30r2. However, as shown in FIG. 89, a member other than the game board 30 (for example, the inner frame 12) may have a function corresponding to the branch rail 401. FIG. 89 is a diagram illustrating a board surface configuration of the game board 30 in a state of being attached to the inner frame 12 according to the modified example.

That is, as shown in FIG. 89, the inner frame 12 has a passage forming portion 12b that divides the right side game area 30r into a first right side game area 30r1 and a second right side game area 30r2 in a state where the game board 30 is attached. I have. For example, in the passage forming portion 12b, the wall portions 55 and 56 formed in the inner frame 12 shown in the cross section in FIG. It is formed so as to be recessed toward it. The passage forming portion 12b may be integrally formed with the resin base 12a forming the inner frame, or may be composed of another component fixed to the resin base 12a. In any configuration, the passage forming portion 12b can be stronger than the plate-shaped branch rail 401. Further, by forming the passage forming portion 12b with a resin having transparency, the game ball flowing down the first game area can be visually recognized from the front of the game board 30.

<25> In Examples 7 to 10 and 12, a rail-shaped gaming member such as the branch rail 401 divides the right side gaming area 30r into a first right side gaming area 30r1 and a second right side gaming area 30r2. It may be a game part other than the rail 401. Further, the first right side gaming area 30r1 and the second right side gaming area 30r2 may be formed by not planting the nail 39 in place of the branch rail 401.

<26> In Examples 7 to 10 and 12, game parts such as nails 39 that affect the flow of the game ball are not arranged in the first right side game area 30r1, but the second right side game area 30r2 is aimed at. A game component that affects the flow of the game ball may be arranged in the first right side game area 30r1 within a range in which the jackpot digestion time is shorter than that of launching the game ball.

<27> In Examples 7 to 10 and 12, the ratio of the game ball flowing down the second right side game area 30r2 to the variable winning device 32 during the big hit game state is set to the ratio of the first right side game area during the big hit game state. Although the rate at which the game ball flowing down 30r1 is lower than the rate of entering the variable winning device 32, it cannot be obtained in the first right side game area 30r2 due to the game ball flowing down the second right side game area 30r2 during the jackpot game state. If a profit (prize ball, hold) is obtained, the ratio of the game ball flowing down the second right side game area 30r2 to the variable winning device 32 during the big hit game state is set to the ratio of the first right side game during the big hit game state. The ratio of the game balls flowing down the region 30r1 to the variable winning device 32 may be approximated.

<28> In Examples 7 to 10 and 12, the player acquires the game in the first right side game area 30r1 and the case where the game is played in the second right side game area 30r2 in one big hit game state. Although the profit (difference ball) made was approximated, the profit (difference ball) acquired by the player may be different. For example, in Examples 7 and 8, the game ball flowing down the second right side game area 30r2 may enter the first start port 33a. Therefore, there is a possibility that more profit can be obtained when the game is played in the second right side game area 30r2 than when the game is played in the first right side game area 30r1. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player who plays the game in the second right side game area 30r2.

<29> In Examples 7 to 10 and 12, the player selects the first right-hand game area 30r1 and the second right-hand game area 30r2 according to his / her own striking. When the game area in which the player is recommended to play the game is determined, the third symbol display device 42 may notify the game area as shown in FIG. 90. In addition, FIGS.

For example, in the eighth embodiment, when the winning result is obtained during the normal gaming state, the third symbol display device 42 is informed of the start timing of the jackpot state or during the jackpot state, as shown in FIG. 90 (a). "Aim at the first right game area" or, as shown in FIG. 90 (b), turn the launch handle to the A position (the position where the ball can enter the first right game area 30r1). Please display like "Please". Further, even if the winning result is obtained during the probability change state, similarly, as shown in FIG. 90 (c), "Aim at the second right game area" may be displayed on the third symbol display device 42. As shown in FIG. 90 (d), it may be displayed as "Turn the launch handle to the B position (the position where the ball can enter the second right game area 30r2)". As a result, the player can accurately understand the operation of the right-handed game.

Further, in the eighth embodiment, when shifting to the probable change state after the end of the jackpot game state, it is instructed to aim at the second right side game area 30r2 at the start of the probable change state as shown in FIGS. 90 (c) and 90 (d). It may be displayed. Further, when the jackpot game state is a game in the first right side game area 30r1 and the game is continued in the first right side game area 30r1 even after the transition to the probabilistic state, the above-mentioned second is performed. A display may be made to be careful to aim at the right game area 30r2.

<30> The positions of the general winning opening 31, the variable winning device 32, the first starting opening 33a, the second starting opening 33b, and the third starting opening 33 in Examples 7 to 10 and 12 are described in the drawings. The position may be changed within the scope of the present invention without being limited to the above position.

<31> In Examples 7 to 10, the game ball flowing down the second right game area 30r2 pays out the prize ball based on the entry into the general winning opening 31, the first starting opening 33b, and the second starting opening 33a. By receiving, the profit that cannot be obtained in the first right side gaming area 30r1 is configured, but the profit that cannot be obtained in the first right side gaming area 30r1 is the general winning opening 31, the first starting opening. It is not limited to the prize ball based on the entry into 33b and the second starting port 33a. That is, the profit that cannot be obtained in the first right side gaming area 30r1 may be the profit that the hold increases based on the entry into the first starting port 33b and the second starting port 33a. As described above, when the general winning opening 31 is not arranged in the second right game area 30r2, or when there is no winning ball based on the winning ball, the first starting opening 33b and the second starting opening 33a are used. The first starting port 33b and the second starting port 33a having a function of increasing the hold are the game value-imparting means of the present invention.

<32> In Examples 11 and 12, a configuration in which the left side gaming area 30l, the first right side gaming area 30r1 and the second right side gaming area 30r2 can be divided into three patterns in the jackpot gaming state has been described as an example. , The configuration may be such that the left side gaming area 30l and the first right side gaming area 30r1 can be divided into two patterns, or the left side gaming area 30l and the second right side gaming area 30r2 can be divided into two patterns. .. In the case of two patterns of striking, the right side gaming area 30r may be composed of only one of the first right side gaming area 30r1 and the second right side gaming area 30r2.

<33> In the twelfth embodiment, the general winning opening 31c is provided in the second right side gaming area 30r2, but the general winning opening 31c may not be provided in the second right side gaming area 30r2. The game ball flowing down the second right side game area 30r2 can enter the first starting port 33a, and the prize ball is paid out based on the entry into the first starting port 33a, so that the prize ball is paid out during the jackpot round game. 2 When the game ball is continuously fired in the right game area 30r2, the prize ball based on the entry into the large winning opening 32a and the prize ball based on the entry into the first starting opening 33a are paid out. Therefore, even if the second right side game area 30r2 is not provided with the general winning opening 31c, if the game ball is continuously fired into the second right side game area 30r2 during the big hit round game, the first right side is used for the big hit round game. More prize balls can be obtained than when the game balls are continuously fired in the game area 30r1.

<34> In Example 13, the right side gaming area 30r corresponds to the right side area described in (G0), and the left side gaming area 30l corresponds to the left side area described in (G0). The right side region described in is also corresponding to the first right side gaming area 30r1 of Example 12, and the left side region described in (G0) is also corresponding to the second right side gaming area 30r2 of Example 12.

The present specification also discloses the following inventions relating to gaming machines.
In the following, after each invention-specific item, the configuration of an example thereof is described.

<First task>
Conventionally, typical examples of gaming machines include pachinko machines and slot machines.

A gaming machine manufacturer that designs this type of gaming machine may conduct a questionnaire to the players and collect the answers (see, for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-242529 (pages 1 to 2)). ).

However, in the case of the conventional example having such a configuration, there are the following problems.
That is, in a conventional gaming machine, even if a questionnaire is given to a player, the player may not answer the questionnaire, and even if the questionnaire is answered, there is no guarantee that the player will answer accurately, and the gaming machine manufacturer. However, there is a problem that it is difficult to investigate information about a player who plays a game on a pachinko machine (for example, the age group of the player).

The following invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately searching for information on a player who plays a game with the gaming machine.

<Strain A: Survey of age group, one announcement>
(A0) A gaming machine that variablely displays identification information due to the establishment of a start condition, and shifts to a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player when the variable display result becomes a predetermined specific display mode. In
Information output means (sound output unit 24) that outputs auditory, visual, tactile, or olfactory information that can be recognized audibly, visually, tactilely, or olfactoryly according to the progress of the game.
Information output control means (sub control device 262) that controls the output of information by the information output means, and
Equipped with an operation means (effect button 80) that receives the operation of the player,
The information output control means is
Based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (30 × n game times (n: integer)), a specific information having a plurality of levels at different time points that can be first recognized by the player within the specific information production period during the variable display of the identification information. Specific information output control means (first and third specific sound output flags) that controls the output of auditory information, specific visual information, specific tactile information, or specific odor information (first specific sound: 19 kHz, third specific sound: 15 kHz). When,
A setting means (specification) for setting an effective period during which the operation of the operating means is valid during the output of the specific auditory information, the specific visual information, the specific tactile information, or the specific odor information within the specific information effect period. Steps S2002, 2006) in the sound listening determination process and
A grasping means for grasping the level of the specific auditory information, the specific visual information, the specific tactile information, or the specific odor information that the player could recognize based on the operation of the operating means during the valid period. And (1st and 3rd specific sound listening flags),
Based on the grasp of the level, specific information according to the level (1st and 3rd specific sound listening images: "It seems that I heard up to 19 kHz. Wow! Wow!", "I think I heard up to 15 kHz." A gaming machine characterized by comprising specific information display control means (first and third specific sound listening display flags) for displaying a character image) on a display means (third symbol display device 42).

According to the gaming machine according to the above (A0), the specific information output control means can first recognize a time point by the player within the specific information effect period during the variable display of the identification information based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. It controls the output of specific auditory information, specific visual information, specific tactile information, or specific odor information having multiple different levels. The setting means sets a valid period during which the operation of the operating means is valid during the output of the specific auditory information, the specific visual information, the specific tactile information, or the specific odor information within the specific information effect period. The grasping means grasps the level of the specific auditory information, the specific visual information, the specific tactile information, or the specific odor information that the player can hear based on the operation of the operating means during the valid period. Since the level of the specific auditory information, the specific visual information, the specific tactile information, or the specific odor information that the player can recognize differs depending on the age group of the player, the player recognized by the gaming machine maker as a grasping means. By reading out the level of the created specific auditory information, specific visual information, specific tactile information, or specific odor information, it is possible to investigate the age group of the player who played the game with the game machine. Further, the specific information display control means causes the display means to display specific information according to the level based on the grasp of the level. As a result, if the operating means can be operated within the valid period, the display means displays the specific information according to the level of the specific auditory information, the specific visual information, the specific tactile information, or the specific odor information, which attracts the player's interest. be able to. If the gaming machine maker reads out the level of the grasped specific auditory information, specific visual information, specific tactile information, or specific odor information, it is possible to grasp information about the player playing the game with the gaming machine such as the age group of the player. Therefore, it is possible to acquire information about a player who plays a game with a gaming machine, such as the age group of the player, while the game is in progress, while giving the player the fun of being able to see specific information. As a result, it is possible to suitably investigate information about a player who plays a game on a gaming machine.

(A00) A gaming machine that variablely displays identification information due to the establishment of a start condition, and shifts to a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player when the variable display result becomes a predetermined specific display mode. In
An operating means (effect button 80) that receives the operation of the player,
Information output means that output information according to the progress of the game,
An information output control means (sub control device 262) for controlling the output of information by the information output means is provided.
The information output control means is
Reaction promotion information output control means for controlling the output of reaction promotion information that urges the player to perform a predetermined reaction accompanied by the operation of the operation means within the specific effect period during the variable display of the identification information based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. When,
Within the specific effect period, during the output of the reaction promotion information information, a setting means for setting an effective period for validating the operation of the operation means, and a setting means.
A grasping means for grasping the reaction of the player to the reaction promoting information based on the operation of the operating means during the valid period.
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a specific information output control means for causing the information output means to output specific information according to the reaction based on the grasp of the reaction.

As a result, if the operating means can be operated within the valid period, the information output means outputs specific information according to the player's reaction to the reaction promoting information. Can be of interest to others. If the gaming machine maker reads out the grasped reaction of the player, the information about the player playing the game on the gaming machine (information such as interests, hobbies, tastes, etc., regardless of age group) can be grasped. Therefore, it is possible to acquire information such as the player's interests, hobbies, and tastes while the game is in progress, while giving the player the fun of being able to see specific information. As a result, it is possible to suitably investigate information about a player who plays a game on a gaming machine.

(A1) A gaming machine that variablely displays identification information due to the establishment of a start condition, and shifts to a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player when the variable display result becomes a predetermined specific display mode. In
Audio output means (audio output unit 24) that outputs audio according to the progress of the game, and
A voice output control means (sub control device 262) that controls the output of voice by the voice output means, and
Equipped with an operation means (effect button 80) that receives the operation of the player,
The audio output control means is
Based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (30 × n game times (n: integer)), a frequency band having a predetermined height that can be heard only by some players within the specific sound effect period during the variable display of the identification information. A high frequency band specific sound (first specific sound: 19 kHz) having a high frequency band and a low frequency band specific sound (third specific sound: 15 kHz) having a lower frequency band are output to the audio output means. Specific sound output control means (1st and 3rd specific sound output flags) for control, and
During the specific sound effect period, if the high frequency band specific sound is output, the operation of the operation means is effective during the output, and if the low frequency band specific sound is output, the operation of the operation means is effective. Setting means for setting the valid period (steps S2002 and 2006 in the specific sound listening determination process) and
A grasping means (first and third specific sound listening flags) for grasping the audible frequency band that the player could hear based on the operation of the operating means during the valid period, and
Based on the grasp of the audible frequency band, specific information according to the audible frequency band (first and third specific sound listening images: "It seems that I heard up to 19 kHz. Wow! Wow!", "I heard up to 15 kHz. A gaming machine characterized by being provided with specific information display control means (first and third specific sound listening display flags) for displaying a character image) "like" on a display means (third symbol display device 42).

According to the gaming machine described in (A1) above, the specific sound output control means can be heard only by a part of the players within the specific sound effect period during the variable display of the identification information based on the establishment of the predetermined conditions. Control is performed to output a high frequency band specific sound having a frequency band having a predetermined height and a low frequency band specific sound having a frequency band having a lower frequency band to the audio output means. During the specific sound production period, the setting means enables the operation of the operating means during the output when the high frequency band specific sound is output, and during the output when the low frequency band specific sound is output. Set the validity period. The grasping means grasps the audible frequency band that the player could hear based on the operation of the operating means during this valid period. The lower the age group of the player, the higher the audible frequency band, and the higher the age group of the player, the lower the audible frequency band. It is possible to investigate the age group of the players who went. Further, the specific information display control means causes the display means to display specific information according to the audible frequency band based on the grasp of the audible frequency band. As a result, if the operating means can be operated within the valid period, specific information corresponding to the audible frequency band is displayed on the display means, which can attract the interest of the player. If the gaming machine maker reads out the grasped audible frequency band, it is possible to grasp information about the player playing the game with the gaming machine such as the age group of the player. Therefore, while giving the player the fun of being able to see specific information according to the audible frequency band in the display means, the information about the player who plays the game with the game machine such as the age group of the player during the progress of the game is provided. Can be obtained. As a result, it is possible to suitably investigate information about a player who plays a game on a gaming machine.

The high frequency band specific sound and the low frequency band specific sound include a plurality of levels included in the auditory information described in (A0) that can be first heard by the player at different time points. It is the specific auditory information that it has. Further, the specific visual information, the specific tactile information, and the specific olfactory information described in (A0) can also be classified like the high frequency band specific sound and the low frequency band specific sound in the specific auditory information. Therefore, the inventions according to (A1a) to (A7) described later can be applied to the invention according to (A0).

(A1a) A gaming machine that variablely displays identification information due to the establishment of a start condition, and shifts to a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player when the variable display result becomes a predetermined specific display mode. In
Audio output means (audio output unit 24) that outputs audio according to the progress of the game, and
A voice output control means (sub control device 262) that controls the output of voice by the voice output means, and
Equipped with an operation means (effect button 80) that receives the operation of the player,
The audio output control means is
Based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, the high frequency band specific sound (first specific sound) having a frequency band of a predetermined height that can be heard only by some players within the specific sound effect period during the variable display of the identification information. : 19 kHz) and a low frequency band specific sound (third specific sound: 15 kHz) having a lower frequency band are controlled to be output to the voice output means (first, first). 3rd specific sound output flag) and
During the specific sound effect period, if the high frequency band specific sound is output, the operation of the operation means is effective during the output, and if the low frequency band specific sound is output, the operation of the operation means is effective. Setting means for setting the valid period (steps S2002 and 2006 in the specific sound listening determination process) and
Based on the operation of the operation means during the valid period, specific information according to the operation mode (first and third specific sound listening images: "You are a superhuman.", "You are still normal." A gaming machine characterized by comprising a specific information display control means (first and third specific sound listening display flags) for displaying a character image) on the display means (third symbol display device 42).

According to the invention described in (A1a) above, a grasping means for grasping an audible frequency band that the player could hear based on the operation of the operating means during the valid period as in (A1) is provided. Even if it is not, since the display means displays the specific information according to the operation mode based on the operation of the operation means during the valid period, the specific information according to the operation mode is stored in a predetermined storage of the gaming machine main body. If stored in the means, the gaming machine maker can read out the specific information to investigate the age group of the players who played the game with the gaming machine. For example, if the specific sound is output while gradually lowering from the high frequency band specific sound to the low frequency band specific sound, and the player can hear the high frequency band specific sound, "You are a superhuman. The text image (specific information) "Don't you think?" Is displayed, and if you can hear the low frequency band specific sound, the text image (specific information) "You are still normal." Is output. If the specific information read by the game machine manufacturer corresponds to the character image "You are a superhuman", the player who displayed the specific information can hear the high frequency band specific sound. It can be grasped that it is a player of the layer. In this way, the age group of the player who played the game with the gaming machine can be grasped from the read specific information.

(A1b) A gaming machine that variablely displays identification information due to the establishment of a start condition, and shifts to a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player when the variable display result becomes a predetermined specific display mode. In
Audio output means (audio output unit 24) that outputs audio according to the progress of the game, and
A voice output control means (sub control device 262) that controls the output of voice by the voice output means, and
Equipped with an operation means (effect button 80) that receives the operation of the player,
The audio output control means is
Based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, the high frequency band specific sound (first specific sound) having a frequency band of a predetermined height that can be heard only by some players within the specific sound effect period during the variable display of the identification information. : 19 kHz) and a low frequency band specific sound (third specific sound: 17 kHz) having a lower frequency band are controlled to be output to the voice output means (first, first). 3rd specific sound output flag) and
During the specific sound effect period, if the high frequency band specific sound is output, the operation of the operation means is effective during the output, and if the low frequency band specific sound is output, the operation of the operation means is effective. Setting means for setting the valid period (steps S2002 and 2006 in the specific sound listening determination process) and
It is characterized by comprising grasping means (first and third specific sound listening flags) for grasping the audible frequency band that the player could hear based on the operation of the operating means during the valid period. A gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine described in (A1b), the specific information display control for displaying the specific information according to the operation mode on the display means based on the operation of the operation means during the valid period as in (A1). Even if the means is not provided, only the grasping means for grasping the audible frequency band that the player could hear based on the operation of the operating means during the valid period may be provided. Even in such a gaming machine, information peculiar to the player (audible frequency band) can be grasped without giving the player a sense of discomfort during the specific sound production period, so that the gaming machine manufacturer can grasp it by the grasping means. By reading out the audible frequency band, it is possible to suitably investigate the age group of the player who played the game with the gaming machine.

(A2) In the gaming machines according to the above (A1) to (A1b).
The specific sound output control means outputs an intermediate frequency band specific sound (second specific sound: 17 kHz) having a frequency band having a high frequency band between the high frequency band specific sound and the low frequency band specific sound.
The setting means is a gaming machine characterized in that an effective period during which the operation of the operating means is valid is set during the output of the intermediate frequency band specific sound.

According to the gaming machine according to the above (A2), the specific sound output control means outputs an intermediate frequency band specific sound having a frequency band having a height between the high frequency band specific sound and the low frequency band specific sound. .. The setting means sets an effective period during which the operation of the operating means is valid during the output of the intermediate frequency band specific sound. Therefore, it is possible to acquire information for grasping the age group of the player in more detail during the progress of the game.

(A3) In the gaming machine according to (A1), (A1a) or (A2) above.
The specific sound output control means either continuously or stepwise lowers the high frequency band specific sound toward the low frequency band specific sound, or outputs the low frequency band specific sound to the high frequency band specific sound. Performs an increasing trend output that increases continuously or gradually toward a frequency band specific sound,
The specific information display control means has specific information (first, second, third, and third specific sound listening images: "It seems to have been heard up to 19 kHz. Wow! Wow!" Character images that change like "I heard up to 17 kHz. It's amazing!", "I heard up to 15 kHz." Or "You are superhuman.", "You are a little more superhuman. , "You are still normal." A game machine characterized by displaying a changing character image).

According to the gaming machine according to the above (A3), the specific sound output control means either continuously or gradually lowers the downward trend output from the high frequency band specific sound to the low frequency band specific sound. , The increasing tendency output that increases continuously or stepwise from the low frequency band specific sound to the high frequency band specific sound is performed. The specific information display control means displays specific information that is different in stages according to the downward trend output or the upward trend output. Therefore, while giving the player the fun of being able to see the information corresponding to the audible frequency band that is gradually different according to the decreasing tendency output or the increasing tendency output in the display means, the player's age in the progress of the game. Information for grasping the layer can be acquired.

(A4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (A1) to (A3) above.
The specific sound output control means provides a period during which at least neither the high frequency band specific sound nor the low frequency band specific sound is output within the specific sound effect period.
The setting means is a gaming machine characterized in that an invalid period for invalidating the operation of the operating means is set according to a period during which the high frequency band specific sound and the low frequency band specific sound are not output.

According to the gaming machine according to the above (A4), the specific sound output control means provides a period during which at least neither the high frequency band specific sound nor the low frequency band specific sound is output within the specific sound effect period. The setting means sets an invalid period for invalidating the operation of the operating means according to the period during which the high frequency band specific sound and the low frequency band specific sound are not output. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the inaccurate age group of the player is grasped based on the fact that the operating means is operated without hitting within the specific sound effect period.

(A5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (A1) to (A4) above.
If the output start timing for starting the output of at least one of the high frequency band specific sound or the low frequency band specific sound is different from the output start timing in the previous specific sound effect period, the specific sound output control means A game machine characterized by being able to play.

According to the gaming machine according to the above (A5), the specific sound output control means sets the output start timing of at least one of the high frequency band specific sound and the low frequency band specific sound to the previous output start timing. It is different from the output start timing in the specific sound production period. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the inaccurate age group of the player from being grasped based on the fact that the operating means is operated without hitting within the specific sound effect period.

(A6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (A1), (A1b) to (A5).
When the variation display result is in the specific display mode, a specific notification sound (first to third first notification sound) having a height corresponding to the height of the audible frequency band grasped by the grasping means is output. A gaming machine characterized by being provided with specific sound notification means (first to third notification sound flags).

According to the gaming machine according to the above (A6), the specific sound notification means has a height corresponding to the height of the audible frequency band grasped by the grasping means when the variation display result is the specific display mode. Outputs a specific notification sound. As a result, it is possible to notify that the variable display result is in the specific display mode with the specific notification sound of different height according to the information peculiar to the player grasped by the grasping means. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately grasping information peculiar to a player who plays a game with the gaming machine and appropriately reflecting the information in the game.

(A7) In the gaming machine according to (A6) above,
When the audible frequency band is grasped a predetermined number of times, the voice output control means has the specific notification based on the height of the average value, the median value, or the mode of the audible frequency band grasped a predetermined number of times. Equipped with a specific notification sound determination means (one-shot notification sound determination table) that determines the pitch of the sound.
The specific sound notification means is a gaming machine characterized by outputting a specific notification sound having a height determined by the specific notification sound determining means.

According to the gaming machine according to the above (A7), the specific sound output control means includes the specific notification sound determination means, and the specific notification sound determination means has the predetermined number when the audible frequency band is grasped a predetermined number of times. The pitch of the specific notification sound is determined based on the height of the average value, the median value, or the mode value of the audible frequency band grasped once. The specific sound notification means outputs a specific notification sound having a height determined by the specific notification sound determination means. Therefore, rather than outputting the notification sound of the height corresponding to the height of the audible frequency band grasped at one time, the specific notification sound of a different height according to the information peculiar to the player grasped accurately. It is possible to notify that the variable display result is in a specific display mode.

(A8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (A1) to (A7) above.
An estimation means for estimating the age group of the player based on the audible frequency band grasped by the grasping means, and an estimation means.
It is provided with a prohibition notification means for notifying that a player in the estimated age group is playing a game when the estimated age group is an age group in which playing a game in a game field is legally prohibited. A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine according to the above (A8), the estimation means estimates the age group of the player based on the audible frequency band grasped by the grasping means. When the estimated age group is an age group for which it is legally prohibited to play games in the amusement park, the prohibition notification means notifies that a player in the age group is playing a game. Therefore, it is possible to preferably notify that a player in an age group whose game is prohibited by law is playing a game.

<Second issue>
Conventionally, typical examples of gaming machines include pachinko machines and slot machines. In this type of gaming machine, a suggestion image suggesting that the detection of an operation of an operation means such as an operation button is effective is displayed while a predetermined display effect is being displayed, and the suggestion image is displayed. Some of them perform a new display effect based on the detection that the operation of the operating means is effective (see, for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-81588, pp. 1 to 2). ..

However, in the case of the conventional example having such a configuration, there are the following problems.
That is, in the conventional gaming machine, the suggestion image suggesting that the detection of the operation of the operating means is effective is displayed in a uniform manner regardless of the difference between the players playing the game on the gaming machine. For the player who operates the operating means in response to the suggestion image, it is difficult to make a difference in the mode of the new display effect after that. Therefore, there is a problem that the interest of the display effect, which is started based on the detection of the operation of the operating means, cannot be further improved.

The following invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and provides a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a display effect that is started based on the detection of an operation of an operating means. The purpose is.

<System B: Promotion production (reach, notice, etc.)>
(B0) A gaming machine that variablely displays identification information due to the establishment of a start condition, and shifts to a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player when the variable display result becomes a predetermined specific display mode. In
Information output means (sound output unit 24) that outputs auditory, visual, tactile, or olfactory information that can be recognized audibly, visually, tactilely, or olfactoryly according to the progress of the game.
Information output control means (sub control device 262) that controls the output of information by the information output means, and
Equipped with an operation means (effect button 80) that receives the operation of the player,
The information output control means is
Based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (the variation pattern command includes the reach promotion effect), the identification having a plurality of levels at different time points that can be first recognized by the player within the specific information effect period during the variation display of the identification information. Specific information output control means (first to third) that controls the output of auditory information, specific visual information, specific tactile information, or specific olfactory information (first specific sound: 19 kHz, second specific sound: 17 kHz, third specific sound: 15 kHz). 3 Specific sound output flag) and
A setting means (specification) for setting an effective period during which the operation of the operating means is valid during the output of the specific auditory information, the specific visual information, the specific tactile information, or the specific olfactory information within the specific information effect period. Steps S2002, 2004, 2006) in the sound listening determination process, and
A grasping means (first) for grasping the level of the specific auditory information, the specific visual information, the specific tactile information, or the specific olfactory information that the player can recognize based on the operation of the operating means during the valid period. ~ Third specific sound listening flag) and
Based on the grasp of the level, the effect mode (types A to C) of the specific display effect (reach promotion effect) executed during the variable display of the identification information is determined, and the determined effect mode is used. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a specific display effect control means (first to third reach promotion effect flags) for controlling the specific display effect to be displayed on the display means.

According to the gaming machine according to the above (B0), the information output means is auditory information, visual information, tactile information or olfactory information that can be audibly, visually, tactilely or olfactoryly recognizable according to the progress of the game. Is output. The specific information output control means has a plurality of levels of specific auditory information and specific visual information at different time points that can be first recognized by the player within the specific information production period during the variable display of the identification information based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. , Controls the output of specific tactile information or specific olfactory information. The setting means sets a valid period during which the operation of the operating means is valid during the output of the specific auditory information, the specific visual information, the specific tactile information, or the specific olfactory information within the specific information production period. The grasping means grasps the level of the specific auditory information, the specific visual information, the specific tactile information, or the specific olfactory information that the player can recognize based on the operation of the operating means during the valid period. Since the level of the specific auditory information, the specific visual information, the specific tactile information, or the specific olfactory information recognized by the player varies depending on the age group of the player, it is information peculiar to the player playing the game with the gaming machine. .. If the grasping means is used, it is possible to suitably grasp such information peculiar to the player. Further, the specific display effect control means determines the effect mode (types A to C) of the specific display effect (reach promotion effect) executed during the variable display of the identification information based on the grasp of the level. In the determined effect mode, the specific display effect is controlled to be displayed on the display means. That is, based on the fact that the level of the specific auditory information, the specific visual information, the specific tactile information, or the specific olfactory information is grasped, the production mode of the specific display effect is different. Therefore, since the player tries to better recognize the specific auditory information, the specific visual information, the specific tactile information, or the specific olfactory information, the interest of the display effect started based on the detection of the operation of the operating means is achieved. Can be improved.

(B1) A gaming machine that variablely displays identification information due to the establishment of a start condition, and shifts to a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player when the variable display result becomes a predetermined specific display mode. In
Audio output means (sound output unit 24) that outputs audio according to the progress of the game, and
A voice output control means (sub control device 262) that controls the output of voice to the voice output means, and
Equipped with an operation means (effect button 80) that receives the operation of the player,
The audio output control means is
Based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (the fluctuation pattern command includes a reach promotion effect), a frequency band having a predetermined height that can be heard only by some players within the specific sound effect period during the variation display of the identification information. High frequency band specific sound (first specific sound: 19 kHz) and low frequency band specific sound (second specific sound: 17 kHz, third specific sound: 15 kHz) having a lower frequency band. Specific sound output control means (first to third specific sound output flags) that control output by the voice output means, and
During the specific sound effect period, when the high frequency band specific sound is output, the operation of the operation means is effective during the output, and when the low frequency band specific sound is output, the operation of the operation means is effective. Setting means for setting the valid period (steps S2002, 2004, 2006 in the specific sound listening determination process) and
A grasping means (first to third specific sound listening flags) for grasping the audible frequency band that the player could hear based on the operation of the operating means during the valid period, and
Based on the grasp of the audible frequency band, the effect mode (types A to C) of the specific display effect (reach promotion effect) executed during the variable display of the identification information is determined, and the determined effect mode is determined. The gaming machine is characterized by comprising specific display effect control means (first to third reach promotion effect flags) for controlling the specific display effect to be displayed on the display means.

According to the invention described in (B1) above, the specific sound output control means can be heard only by a part of the players within the specific sound effect period during the variable display of the identification information based on the establishment of the predetermined conditions. The audio output means controls to output a high frequency band specific sound having a frequency band having a predetermined height and a low frequency band specific sound having a frequency band having a lower frequency band. The setting means is effective in operating the operating means during the output of the high frequency band specific sound when the high frequency band specific sound is output, and during the output of the low frequency band specific sound during the specific sound production period. Set the validity period. The grasping means grasps the audible frequency band that the player could hear based on the operation of the operating means during the valid period. The audible frequency band is higher as the age group of the player is lower, and lower as the age group of the player is higher. Therefore, the information is peculiar to the player who plays the game with the gaming machine. If the grasping means is used, it is possible to suitably grasp such information peculiar to the player. Further, the specific display effect control means determines the effect mode of the specific display effect executed during the variable display of the identification information based on the grasp of the audible frequency band, and the specific display effect mode is the determined effect mode. The effect is controlled to be displayed on the display means. That is, based on the fact that the audible frequency band is grasped, the production mode of the specific display effect is different. Therefore, the player tries to recognize the audible frequency band as best as possible according to his / her age group, and thus improves the interest of the display effect that is started based on the detection of the operation of the operating means. Can be made to.

The high frequency band specific sound and the low frequency band specific sound include a plurality of levels included in the auditory information described in (B0) that can be first heard by the player at different time points. It is the specific auditory information that it has. Further, the specific visual information, the specific tactile information, and the specific olfactory information described in (B0) can also be classified like the high frequency band specific sound and the low frequency band specific sound in the specific auditory information. Therefore, the inventions according to (B2) to (B4) described later can be applied to the invention according to (B0).

(B2) In the gaming machine described in (B1) above,
The specific sound output control means outputs from the high frequency band specific sound to the low frequency band specific sound while continuously or stepwise lowering the output.
The specific display effect control means determines the start time point of the specific display effect according to the height of the audible frequency band grasped by the grasping means, and from the determined start point point to the predetermined end point point. A gaming machine characterized by displaying a specific display effect on a display means.

According to the invention described in (B2) above, the specific sound output control means outputs from the high frequency band specific sound to the low frequency band specific sound while continuously or stepwise lowering the output. The specific display effect control means determines the start time of the specific display effect according to the height of the audible frequency band grasped by the grasping means, and performs the specific display effect from the determined start point to the predetermined end point. Display on the display means. That is, the time from the start to the end of the specific display effect differs depending on the height of the audible frequency band grasped by the grasping means. Therefore, since the player can see the long specific display effect so that he / she can hear the specific sound having a high frequency band, the interest of the display effect started based on the detection of the operation of the operation means. It is possible to improve the sex.

(B3) In the gaming machine according to (B1) or (B2) above.
The specific display effect is an effect of promoting a reach effect that suggests the expectation level of the specific display mode to the player to a reach effect having a higher expectation level than the reach effect, and is grasped by the grasping means. A gaming machine characterized in that the higher the audible frequency band is, the more times the reach effect is promoted to the higher expected reach effect.

According to the gaming machine described in (B3), the specific display effect promotes the reach effect that suggests the expectation level of the specific display mode to the player to the reach effect having a higher degree of expectation than the reach effect. Therefore, the higher the height of the audible frequency band grasped by the grasping means, the more times the reach production is promoted to the reach production with high expectation, which is the reach promotion production. Therefore, the player can see the reach effect that is promoted many times until the reach effect has a high expectation so that the player can hear the specific sound having a high frequency band, so that the operation of the operating means is detected. It is possible to improve the fun of the display production that is started based on the fact that it is done.

(B4) In the gaming machine according to (B1) or (B2) above.
The specific display effect is an effect of changing the advance notice effect that suggests the expectation degree of the specific display mode to the player to the advance notice effect having a high expectation degree, and is an audible effect grasped by the grasping means. A gaming machine characterized in that the higher the frequency band is, the more times the advance notice effect is changed to the advance notice effect having a high expectation.

According to the gaming machine described in (B4), the specific display effect is an effect of changing the advance notice effect that suggests the expectation degree of the specific display mode to the player to the advance notice effect of the high expectation degree. Therefore, the higher the height of the audible frequency band grasped by the grasping means, the more the number of times the notice effect is changed to the advance notice effect with high expectation. Therefore, the player can see the advance notice effect that changes many times until the advance notice effect has a high expectation so that he / she can hear the specific sound having a high frequency band, so that the operation of the operating means is detected. It is possible to improve the fun of the display production that is started based on the fact that it is done.

<C system: pre-reading notice>
(C0) A gaming machine that variablely displays identification information due to the establishment of a start condition, and shifts to a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player when the variable display result becomes a predetermined specific display mode. In
Information output means (sound output unit 24) that outputs auditory, visual, tactile, or olfactory information that can be recognized audibly, visually, tactilely, or olfactoryly according to the progress of the game.
Information output control means (sub control device 262) that controls the output of information by the information output means, and
Equipped with an operation means (effect button 80) that receives the operation of the player,
The information output control means is
When the determination result of the variation display of the unexecuted portion is the winning determination in the specific display mode, and the variation display of a plurality of unexecuted portions is prior to the variation display of the unexecuted portion which is the winning determination. Is suspended, and within the specific information effect period provided during the plurality of variation display periods performed after the cancellation of the variation non-execution condition, the identification having a plurality of levels at different time points that can be first recognized by the player. Specific information output control means (first to third) that controls the output of auditory information, specific visual information, specific tactile information, or specific olfactory information (first specific sound: 19 kHz, second specific sound: 17 kHz, third specific sound: 15 kHz). 3rd specific sound output flag) and
A setting means (specification) for setting an effective period during which the operation of the operating means is valid during the output of the specific auditory information, the specific visual information, the specific tactile information, or the specific olfactory information within the specific information effect period. Steps S2002, 2004, 2006) in the sound listening determination process, and
A grasping means (first) for grasping the level of the specific auditory information, the specific visual information, the specific tactile information, or the specific olfactory information that the player can recognize based on the operation of the operating means during the valid period. ~ Third specific sound listening flag) and
Based on the grasp of the level, the pre-reading notice (display in which the stop symbol is the chance eye "341") based on the winning determination is determined, and the pre-reading is performed in the determined pre-reading mode. A gaming machine including a look-ahead notice control means (first to third look-ahead notice flags) for controlling the notice to be displayed on the display means.

According to the invention described in (C0) above, the information output means obtains auditory information, visual information, tactile information or olfactory information that can be audibly, visually, tactilely or olfactoryly recognizable according to the progress of the game. Output. The specific information output control means is a case where the determination result of the variation display of the unexecuted portion is a winning determination in the specific display mode, and a plurality of unexecuted before the variation display of the unexecuted portion which is the winning determination. When the variation display for the execution is suspended, the player can first recognize a plurality of different time points within the specific information production period provided during the plurality of variation display periods performed after the variation non-execution condition is canceled. Controls the output of specific auditory information, specific visual information, specific tactile information, or specific olfactory information with a level. The setting means sets a valid period during which the operation of the operating means is valid during the output of the specific auditory information, the specific visual information, the specific tactile information, or the specific olfactory information within the specific information production period. The grasping means grasps the level of the specific auditory information, the specific visual information, the specific tactile information, or the specific olfactory information that the player can recognize based on the operation of the operating means during the valid period. Since the level of the specific auditory information, the specific visual information, the specific tactile information, or the specific olfactory information recognized by the player varies depending on the age group of the player, it is information peculiar to the player playing the game with the gaming machine. .. If the grasping means is used, it is possible to suitably grasp such information peculiar to the player. Further, the look-ahead notice control means determines the look-ahead notice effect mode based on the winning determination based on the grasp of the level, and displays the look-ahead notice on the display means in the determined effect mode. To control. That is, based on the fact that the level of the specific auditory information, the specific visual information, the specific tactile information, or the specific olfactory information is grasped, the production mode of the look-ahead notice effect is different. Therefore, since the player tries to better recognize the specific auditory information, the specific visual information, the specific tactile information, or the specific olfactory information, the interest of the display effect started based on the detection of the operation of the operating means is achieved. Can be improved.

(C1) A gaming machine that variablely displays identification information due to the establishment of a start condition, and shifts to a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player when the variable display result becomes a predetermined specific display mode. In
When the variable non-execution condition for not executing the variable display of the identification information is satisfied, the holding means (holding ball storage area) for holding the variable display as the unexecuted portion, and
The unexecuted portion determination means (look-ahead winning flag) for determining whether or not the result of the variation display of the unexecuted portion is in the specific display mode, and
Audio output means (sound output unit 24) that outputs audio according to the progress of the game, and
A voice output control means (sub control device 262) that controls the output of voice to the voice output means, and
Equipped with an operation means (effect button 80) that receives the operation of the player,
The audio output control means is
When the determination result of the variation display of the unexecuted portion is the winning determination in the specific display mode, and the variation display of a plurality of unexecuted portions is prior to the variation display of the unexecuted portion which is the winning determination. Is held, a frequency band having a predetermined height that can be heard only by some players within the specific sound effect period provided during the plurality of fluctuation display periods performed after the cancellation of the fluctuation non-execution condition is performed. The voice output means outputs a high frequency band specific sound (first specific sound: 19 kHz) having a high frequency band and a low frequency band specific sound (third specific sound: 15 kHz) having a lower frequency band. Specific sound output control means (1st to 3rd specific sound output flags) for control, and
During the specific sound effect period, when the high frequency band specific sound is output, the operation of the operation means is effective during the output, and when the low frequency band specific sound is output, the operation of the operation means is effective. Setting means for setting the valid period (steps S2002, 2004, 2006 in the specific sound listening determination process) and
A grasping means (first to third specific sound listening flags) for grasping the audible frequency band that the player could hear based on the operation of the operating means during the valid period, and
Based on the fact that the audible frequency band was grasped by the grasping means, the effect mode of the look-ahead notice (display with the stop symbol as the chance eye "341") based on the winning determination was determined, and the determination was made. A gaming machine characterized by comprising pre-reading notice control means (first to third pre-reading notice flags) for controlling the pre-reading notice to be displayed on the display means in an effect mode.

According to the invention described in (C1) above, the specific sound output control means is a case where the determination result of the variation display of the unexecuted portion is the winning determination in the specific display mode, and the winning determination is not made. When a plurality of unexecuted variable displays are held before the executed variable display, within the specific sound effect period provided during the plurality of variable display periods performed after the variable non-execution condition is released, The audio output means outputs a high frequency band specific sound having a frequency band having a predetermined height that can be heard only by some players and a low frequency band specific sound having a frequency band having a lower frequency band. Take control. The setting means is effective in operating the operating means during the output of the high frequency band specific sound when the high frequency band specific sound is output, and during the output of the low frequency band specific sound during the specific sound production period. Set the validity period. The grasping means grasps the audible frequency band that the player could hear based on the operation of the operating means during the valid period. The audible frequency band is higher as the age group of the player is lower, and lower as the age group of the player is higher. Therefore, the information is peculiar to the player who plays the game with the gaming machine. If the grasping means is used, it is possible to suitably grasp such information peculiar to the player. Further, the look-ahead notice control means determines a look-ahead notice effect mode based on the winning determination based on the fact that the audible frequency band is grasped by the grasping means, and displays the look-ahead notice in the determined effect mode. Control to display on the means. That is, based on the fact that the audible frequency band is grasped, the production mode of the look-ahead notice effect is different. Therefore, the player tries to recognize the audible frequency band as best as possible according to his / her age group, and thus improves the interest of the display effect that is started based on the detection of the operation of the operating means. Can be made to.

The high frequency band specific sound and the low frequency band specific sound include a plurality of levels included in the auditory information described in (C0) that can be first heard by the player at different time points. It is the specific auditory information that it has. Further, the specific visual information, the specific tactile information, and the specific olfactory information described in (C0) can also be classified like the high frequency band specific sound and the low frequency band specific sound in the specific auditory information. Therefore, the inventions according to (A1a) to (A7) described later can be applied to the invention according to (C0).

(C2) In the gaming machine according to (C1) above,
The specific sound output control means outputs from the high frequency band specific sound to the low frequency band specific sound while continuously or stepwise lowering the output.
The look-ahead notice control means is a variation display of the unexecuted portion that has been determined to be elected from the variation display performed after the variation non-execution condition is released, which is determined according to the height of the audible frequency band grasped by the grasping means. A gaming machine characterized in that the pre-reading notice is executed up to the fluctuation display performed after the cancellation of the fluctuation non-execution condition.

According to the invention described in (C2) above, the specific sound output control means outputs from the high frequency band specific sound to the low frequency band specific sound while continuously or stepwise lowering the output. The look-ahead notice control means is a change non-execution condition of the variation display of the unexecuted portion that has been determined to be elected from the variation display performed after the change non-execution condition is canceled, which is determined according to the height of the audible frequency band grasped by the grasp means. The look-ahead notice is executed until the fluctuation display is performed after the cancellation. Therefore, since the player can see the look-ahead notice over many variable displays for a long period of time so that he / she can hear the specific sound having a high frequency band, it is based on the fact that the operation of the operating means is detected. It is possible to improve the fun of the display production to be started.

<D system: step up>
(D0) A gaming machine that variablely displays identification information due to the establishment of a start condition, and shifts to a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player when the variable display result becomes a predetermined specific display mode. In
Information output means (sound output unit 24) that outputs auditory, visual, tactile, or olfactory information that can be recognized audibly, visually, tactilely, or olfactoryly according to the progress of the game.
Information output control means (sub control device 262) that controls the output of information by the information output means, and
Equipped with an operation means (effect button 80) that receives the operation of the player,
The information output control means is
Based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, the specific auditory information, the specific visual information, the specific tactile information or the specific having a plurality of levels at different time points that can be first recognized by the player within the specific information production period during the variable display of the identification information. Specific information output control means (first to third specific sound output flags) that control the output of odor information (first specific sound: 19 kHz, second specific sound: 17 kHz, third specific sound: 15 kHz), and
A setting means (specification) for setting an effective period during which the operation of the operating means is valid during the output of the specific auditory information, the specific visual information, the specific tactile information, or the specific odor information within the specific information effect period. Steps S2002, 2004, 2006) in the sound listening determination process, and
A grasping means (first) for grasping the level of the specific auditory information, the specific visual information, the specific tactile information, or the specific odor information that the player can recognize based on the operation of the operating means during the valid period. ~ Third specific sound listening flag) and
Based on the grasp of the level, the effect mode of the step-up effect of displaying the specific step information (first to third step images SU1 to SU3) on the display means a plurality of times is determined, and the determined mode is used. , A gaming machine comprising:, a step-up effect control means (first to third step image display flags) for controlling the step-up effect to be displayed on the display means.

According to the gaming machine described in (D0), the time point at which the specific information output control means can be first recognized by the player within the specific information effect period during the variable display of the identification information based on the establishment of the predetermined condition is It controls the output of specific auditory information, specific visual information, specific tactile information, or specific odor information having multiple different levels. The setting means sets a valid period during which the operation of the operating means is valid during the output of the specific auditory information, the specific visual information, the specific tactile information, or the specific odor information within the specific information effect period. The grasping means grasps the level of the specific auditory information, the specific visual information, the specific tactile information, or the specific odor information that the player can recognize based on the operation of the operating means during the valid period. Since the level of the specific auditory information, the specific visual information, the specific tactile information, or the specific odor information recognized by the player varies depending on the age group of the player, it is information peculiar to the player playing the game with the gaming machine. .. If the grasping means is used, it is possible to suitably grasp such information peculiar to the player. The step-up effect control means determines the effect mode of the step-up effect for displaying the specific step information on the display means a plurality of times based on the grasped level, and displays the step-up effect in the determined mode. Control to display on the means. That is, based on the fact that the level of the specific auditory information, the specific visual information, the specific tactile information, or the specific odor information that the player can recognize is grasped, the production mode of the step-up effect is different. Therefore, since the player tries to better recognize the specific auditory information, the specific visual information, the specific tactile information, or the specific odor information, the interest of the display effect started based on the detection of the operation of the operating means is achieved. Can be improved.

(D1) A gaming machine that variablely displays identification information due to the establishment of a start condition, and shifts to a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player when the variable display result becomes a predetermined specific display mode. In
Audio output means (sound output unit 24) that outputs audio according to the progress of the game, and
A voice output control means (sub control device 262) that controls the output of voice to the voice output means, and
Equipped with an operation means (effect button 80) that receives the operation of the player,
The audio output control means is
Based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, the high frequency band specific sound (first specific sound) having a frequency band of a predetermined height that can be heard only by some players within the specific sound effect period during the variable display of the identification information. : 19 kHz) and a low frequency band specific sound (third specific sound: 15 kHz) having a lower frequency band are controlled to be output by the voice output means (first to first). 3rd specific sound output flag) and
During the specific sound effect period, when the high frequency band specific sound is output, the operation of the operation means is effective during the output, and when the low frequency band specific sound is output, the operation of the operation means is effective. Setting means for setting the valid period (steps S2002, 2004, 2006 in the specific sound listening determination process) and
A grasping means (first to third specific sound listening flags) for grasping the audible frequency band that the player could hear based on the operation of the operating means during the valid period, and
Based on the grasp of the audible frequency band, the effect mode of the step-up effect of displaying the specific step information (first to third step images SU1 to SU3) on the display means a plurality of times was determined, and the determination was made. A gaming machine comprising:, in an embodiment, a step-up effect control means (first to third step image display flags) for controlling the step-up effect to be displayed on the display means.

According to the gaming machine described in (D1), the specific sound output control means can be heard only by a part of the players within the specific sound effect period during the variable display of the identification information based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. The audio output means controls to output a high frequency band specific sound having a frequency band having a predetermined height and a low frequency band specific sound having a frequency band having a lower frequency band. The setting means is effective in operating the operating means during the output of the high frequency band specific sound when the high frequency band specific sound is output, and during the output of the low frequency band specific sound during the specific sound production period. Set the validity period. The grasping means grasps the audible frequency band that the player could hear based on the operation of the operating means during the valid period. The audible frequency band is higher as the age group of the player is lower, and lower as the age group of the player is higher. Therefore, the information is peculiar to the player who plays the game with the gaming machine. If the grasping means is used, it is possible to suitably grasp such information peculiar to the player. Further, based on the grasp of the audible frequency band, the effect mode of the step-up effect for displaying the specific step information on the display means a plurality of times is determined, and the step-up effect is displayed on the display means in the determined mode. Control to do. That is, the production mode of the step-up effect is different based on the grasp of the audible frequency band. Therefore, the player tries to recognize the audible frequency band as best as possible according to his / her age group, and thus improves the interest of the display effect that is started based on the detection of the operation of the operating means. Can be made to.

The high frequency band specific sound and the low frequency band specific sound include a plurality of levels included in the auditory information described in (D0) that can be first heard by the player at different time points. It is the specific auditory information that it has. Further, the specific visual information, the specific tactile information, and the specific olfactory information described in (D0) can also be classified like the high frequency band specific sound and the low frequency band specific sound in the specific auditory information. Therefore, the invention according to (D2) described later can be applied to the invention according to (D0).

(D2) In the gaming machine according to (D1) above,
Each time the audible frequency band is grasped, the specific sound output control means outputs from the low frequency band specific sound to the high frequency band specific sound while continuously or stepwise increasing the frequency band.
The step-up effect control means is a gaming machine characterized in that the specific step information is stepped up a number of times determined according to the height of the audible frequency band grasped by the grasping means.

According to the gaming machine described in (D2), the specific sound output control means continuously or stepwise frequency from the low frequency band specific sound to the high frequency band specific sound each time the audible frequency band is grasped. Output while raising the band. The step-up effect control means steps up the specific step information a number of times determined according to the height of the audible frequency band grasped by the grasping means. Therefore, the player can see the specific step information that steps up many times for a long time so that the specific sound having a high frequency band can be heard.

<Third task>
Conventionally, typical examples of gaming machines include pachinko machines and slot machines. Some pachinko machines are provided in a game board, and a game ball wins a prize at a winning opening, so that the pachinko machine is in a specific gaming state which is advantageous for the player.

Some gaming machines of this type notify the transition to a specific gaming state by voice or image (see, for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-90765, pages 1 and 2).

However, in the case of the conventional example having such a configuration, there are the following problems.
That is, in the conventional gaming machine, the effect of notifying the transition to the specific gaming state is performed in a uniform manner regardless of the difference between the players. There is a problem that it is difficult to improve.

The following invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a production for notifying a transition to a specific gaming state.

<E system: Notification of specific game status>
(E0) When a predetermined transition condition (detection of ball entry at the first starting port 33a or detection of ball entry at the V winning opening) is satisfied, a specific gaming state (blades 203a, 203b) advantageous to the player is satisfied. In a gaming machine that shifts to one-time opening, two-time opening, or a time saving state after the end of a big hit round game)
Information output means (sound output unit 24) that outputs auditory, visual, tactile, or olfactory information that can be recognized audibly, visually, tactilely, or olfactoryly according to the progress of the game.
Information output control means (sub control device 262) that controls the output of information by the information output means, and
Equipped with an operation means (effect button 80) that receives the operation of the player,
The information output control means is
Specific auditory information having a plurality of levels at different time points that can be first recognized by the player within the specific information production period provided before the transition to the specific gaming state based on the establishment of the predetermined transition condition. , Specific visual information, specific tactile information or specific odor information (first specific sound: 19 kHz, second specific sound: 17 kHz, third specific sound: 15 kHz) specific information output control means (first to third). Specific sound output flag) and
A setting means (specification) for setting an effective period during which the operation of the operating means is valid during the output of the specific auditory information, the specific visual information, the specific tactile information, or the specific odor information within the specific information effect period. Steps S2002, 2004, 2006) in the sound listening determination process, and
A grasping means (first) for grasping the level of the specific auditory information, the specific visual information, the specific tactile information, or the specific odor information that the player can recognize based on the operation of the operating means during the valid period. ~ Third specific sound listening flag) and
Based on the grasp of the level, the timing for notifying the transition to the specific gaming state is determined, and at the determined timing, the specific notification control means (once,) for notifying the transition to the specific gaming state. A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with a double opening suggestion flag or a time saving state suggestion flag).

According to the gaming machine described in (E0), the specific information output control means is based on the fact that a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, and within the specific information production period provided before the transition to the specific gaming state. It controls the output of specific auditory information, specific visual information, specific tactile information, or specific odor information having a plurality of levels at different time points that can be first recognized by the player. The setting means sets a valid period during which the operation of the operating means is valid during the output of the specific auditory information, the specific visual information, the specific tactile information, or the specific odor information within the specific information effect period. The grasping means grasps the level of the specific auditory information, the specific visual information, the specific tactile information, or the specific odor information that the player can recognize based on the operation of the operating means during the valid period. Since the level of the specific auditory information, the specific visual information, the specific tactile information, or the specific odor information recognized by the player varies depending on the age group of the player, it is information peculiar to the player playing the game with the gaming machine. .. If the grasping means is used, it is possible to suitably grasp such information peculiar to the player. The specific notification control means determines the timing for notifying the transition to the specific gaming state based on the grasp of the level, and notifies the transition to the specific gaming state at the determined timing. That is, based on the fact that the level of the specific auditory information, the specific visual information, the specific tactile information, or the specific odor information is grasped, the timing of notifying the transition to the specific gaming state is different. Therefore, since the player tries to better recognize the specific auditory information, the specific visual information, the specific tactile information, or the specific odor information, it is possible to improve the interest of the effect of notifying the transition to the specific gaming state.

(E1) When a predetermined transition condition (detection of ball entry at the first starting port 33a or detection of ball entry at the V winning opening) is satisfied, a specific gaming state (blades 203a, 203b) advantageous to the player is satisfied. In a gaming machine that shifts to one-time opening, two-time opening, or a time saving state after the end of a big hit round game)
Audio output means (sound output unit 24) that outputs audio according to the progress of the game, and
A voice output control means (sub control device 262) that controls the output of voice to the voice output means, and
Equipped with an operation means (effect button 80) that receives the operation of the player,
The audio output control means is
Based on the establishment of the predetermined transition condition, the frequency band has a predetermined height that can be heard only by some players within the specific information effect period provided before the transition to the specific gaming state. The high frequency band specific sound (first specific sound: 19 kHz) and the low frequency band specific sound (second specific sound: 17 kHz, third specific sound: 15 kHz) having a lower frequency band are described above. Specific sound output control means (first to third specific sound output flags) that control the output means to be able to output, and
A setting means for setting an effective period during which the operation of the operating means is valid, in the output of the high frequency band specific sound when the high frequency band specific sound is output, and in the output of the low frequency band specific sound when the low frequency band specific sound is output. (Steps S2002, 2004, 2006 in the specific sound listening determination process) and
A grasping means (first to third specific sound listening flags) for grasping the audible frequency band that the player could hear based on the operation of the operating means during the valid period, and
Based on the grasp of the audible frequency band, the timing for notifying the transition to the specific gaming state is determined, and at the determined timing, the specific notification control means (1) for notifying the transition to the specific gaming state. A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with a time saving suggestion flag or a time saving state suggestion flag).

According to the gaming machine described in (E1), the specific sound output control means is based on the fact that a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, and within the specific information production period provided before the transition to the specific gaming state. It is possible for the audio output means to output a high frequency band specific sound having a frequency band having a predetermined height that can be heard only by some players and a low frequency band specific sound having a frequency band lower than that. Control the frequency. The setting means sets an effective period during which the operation of the operating means is valid during the output of the high frequency band specific sound when it is output, and during the output of the low frequency band specific sound when it is output. The grasping means grasps the audible frequency band that the player could hear based on the operation of the operating means during the valid period. The audible frequency band is higher as the age group of the player is lower, and lower as the age group of the player is higher. Therefore, the information is peculiar to the player who plays the game with the gaming machine. If the grasping means is used, it is possible to suitably grasp such information peculiar to the player. The specific notification control means determines the timing for notifying the transition to the specific gaming state based on the grasp of the audible frequency band, and notifies the transition to the specific gaming state at the determined timing. That is, the timing of notifying the transition to the specific gaming state is different based on the grasp of the audible frequency band. Therefore, since the player tries to recognize the audible frequency band as better as possible according to his / her age group, it is possible to improve the interest of the effect of notifying the transition to the specific gaming state.

The high frequency band specific sound and the low frequency band specific sound include a plurality of levels included in the auditory information described in (E0) that can be first heard by the player at different time points. It is the specific auditory information that it has. Further, the specific visual information, the specific tactile information, and the specific olfactory information described in (E0) can also be classified like the high frequency band specific sound and the low frequency band specific sound in the specific auditory information.

(E2) In the gaming machine according to any one of (A0) to (E1) above.
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine.

According to the gaming machine described in (E2) above, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine capable of improving the enjoyment of a game using an operating means. The basic configuration of the pachinko machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball as a game medium is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. The identification information (design, etc.) dynamically displayed on the display device is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time, provided that the winning (or passing through the operating gate) is won in the operating port. Further, when a specific gaming state occurs, the variable winning means (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable the ball to be won, and the value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

(E3) In the gaming machine according to any one of (A0) to (E1) above.
The gaming machine is a gaming machine characterized by being a slot machine.

According to the gaming machine described in (E3), it is possible to provide a slot machine capable of improving the enjoyment of a game using an operating means. The basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped. A gaming machine provided with a specific gaming state generating means for generating a specific gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information at the time is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the gaming medium.

<Fourth task>
Conventionally, there is, for example, a pachinko machine as a typical example of a gaming machine. Some pachinko machines are provided in a game board and are provided in a specific gaming state, which is advantageous for the player, due to the fact that the game ball wins a prize at the starting winning opening.

In this type of gaming machine, there is a gaming machine in which a gaming ball is allowed to flow down into a gaming area to win a prize in a large winning opening during a specific gaming state (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-33792). See FIG. 5).

However, in the case of the conventional example having such a configuration, there are the following problems.
That is, in the conventional gaming machine, the game in the specific gaming state tends to be monotonous, so that there is a problem that the player cannot fully enjoy the specific gaming state.

The following invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a specific gaming state.

<F system: composition of the game board>
(F0) In a gaming machine equipped with a gaming area in which a gaming ball flows down,
The gaming area is
It is composed of at least a first area and a second area provided on the left side of the first area when viewed from the front of the gaming machine.
When the result of the lottery based on the establishment of the starting condition is a specific result, the specific entry ball provided at a position where the game ball flowing down the first region and the game ball flowing down the second region can enter. A specific game in which a player has a mouth and closes the specific ball slot a predetermined number of times on condition that either a predetermined time has passed since the specific ball slot is opened or a predetermined number of game balls enter the ball. Specific entry means that generate a game state and
A game value-giving means for giving a predetermined game value when a game ball flowing down the game area is entered or passed.
A flow direction changing means for changing the flow direction of some of the game balls flowing down the second region during the specific game state to a direction in which the ball can enter or pass through the game value-adding means.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the gaming machine described in (F0), even when the specific gaming state is executed, if the player shoots the gaming ball aiming at the second region, the gaming ball flows down the second region by the flow direction changing means. As the flow direction of the gaming ball is changed, the game can be played in a specific gaming state for a longer time than when the gaming ball is launched aiming at the first region, and a predetermined value that cannot be obtained in the first region. It is also possible to obtain game value. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the specific gaming state.

(F0A) In the gaming machine described in (F0) above,
The first region is a first right region provided on the right side of the center line that bisects the width of the game region to the left and right.
The gaming machine characterized in that the second region is a second right region provided on the left side of the first right region.

According to the gaming machine described in (F0A), a first right-hand region provided on the right side of the center line that bisects the width of the gaming region to the left and right, and a second right-hand region provided on the left side of the first right-hand region. The invention according to (F0) can also be suitably applied to a gaming machine provided with a gaming board having a right region.

(F0B) In the gaming machine described in (F0) above,
The first area is a left side area provided on the left side of the center line that bisects the width of the game area to the left and right.
The second region is a gaming machine characterized in that it is a right region provided on the right side of the center line.

According to the gaming machine described in (F0B), the gaming machine has a left side region provided on the left side of the center line that bisects the width of the gaming area to the left and right, and a right side region provided on the right side of the center line. The invention according to (F0) can also be suitably applied to a gaming machine provided with a gaming board.

In addition to the following inventions, the present invention can also solve the following problems. Conventionally, there is, for example, a pachinko machine as a typical example of a gaming machine. Some pachinko machines are provided in a game board and are provided in a specific gaming state, which is advantageous for the player, due to the fact that the game ball wins a prize at the starting winning opening.
In this type of gaming machine, during a specific gaming state, a right-handed game is performed in which a gaming ball is allowed to flow down to a right-hand region provided on the right side of the gaming area to win a prize in a large winning opening (for example, patent documents). 1: See FIG. 5 of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-33792).
However, in the case of the conventional example having such a configuration, there are the following problems.
That is, in the conventional gaming machine, in the specific gaming state performed in the right-handed gaming, the time until the specific gaming state ends tends to be short, and the game in the specific gaming state tends to be monotonous. There is a problem that the player cannot fully enjoy the specific gaming state of.
The following invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a specific gaming state in a right-handed gaming game.

(F1) In a gaming machine equipped with a gaming area in which a gaming ball flows down,
The gaming area is
The right side region provided on the right side of the center line that bisects the width of the game area to the left and right is the first right side region provided along the right outer edge of the right side region and the left side side of the first right side region. It is composed of the second right area provided.
When the result of the lottery based on the establishment of the starting condition is a specific result, the specific result is provided at a position where the game ball flowing down the first right side region and the game ball flowing down the second right side region can enter. One round from opening the specific entrance to closing the specific entrance on condition that either a predetermined time has passed or a predetermined number of game balls have entered. A specific ball entry means that generates a specific game state in which a round game is performed a predetermined number of times, and
A game value-giving means for giving a predetermined game value when a game ball flowing down the game area is entered or passed.
A flow direction changing means for changing the flow direction of some of the game balls flowing down the second right region during the specific game state to a direction in which the ball can enter or pass through the game value-adding means.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the gaming machine described in (F1), the right side region provided on the right side of the center line that bisects the width of the gaming region to the left and right is composed of a first right side region and a second right side region. There is. The first right side region is provided along the right outer edge of the right side region, and the second right side region is provided on the left side of the first right side region. Therefore, the game ball launched by right-handed flow down the first right area located on the outer porch of the game area when the launch momentum is strong, but if it is weaker than this launch momentum, it is lower than the first right area. It flows down the second right area located inside. Since the specific ball entry means in which the specific game state in which the round game is performed a predetermined number of times is generated is provided at a position where the game ball flowing down the first right side area and the game ball flowing down the second right side area can enter. , Regardless of whether the game ball is launched aiming at either the first right side area or the second right side area, the game ball enters the specific ball entry means. The game value-giving means gives a predetermined game value when a game ball flowing down the game area enters or passes through, so that the player obtains a profit different from the profit obtained by the specific ball-entry means. Give to.

The game ball launched aiming at the second right area during the specific game state flows down toward the specific entry means, but some of the game balls that flow down the second right area during the specific game state. The flow direction of the ball is changed to a direction in which the ball can enter or pass through the game value-adding means by the flow direction changing means. Therefore, in the specific game state, when the game ball is launched aiming at the second right area, the game ball is launched aiming at the second right area in a direction other than the specific entry means. Since the time to reach the specific ball entry means is lengthened by the amount that the flow direction is changed, the time until the predetermined number of round games are completed can be lengthened, and a predetermined value that cannot be obtained in the first right side region can be obtained. It is possible to obtain game value. Therefore, even when a specific game state is executed by hitting right, if the player shoots the game ball aiming at the second right area, the time is longer than when the game ball is shot aiming at the first right area. It is possible to play a game in a specific game state, and it is also possible to obtain a predetermined game value that cannot be obtained in the first right side region. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the specific game state in the right-handed game.

(F2) In the gaming machine described in (F1) above,
A game board having the game area is provided.
The game board
At least the first gaming component arranged in a state where the right side region is left on the right side of the center line in the gaming area.
The right side region is divided into the first right side region provided along the right outer edge of the right side region and the second right side region provided between the first right side region and the right outer edge of the first gaming component. The second game part to be divided and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the gaming machine described in (F2), the gaming board is composed of a first gaming component and a first gaming component, which are arranged with a right-side area left on the right side of the center line at least in the gaming area. Also includes a second gaming component disposed on the right side, the right region includes a first right region, a first right region and a first gaming component provided by the second gaming component along the right outer edge of the right region. Since it is divided into a second right side region provided between the right outer edge of the machine, it can be clearly shown to the player that the right side area of the gaming board is divided into a first right side area and a second right side area.

(F3) In the gaming machine according to (F1) or (F2) above.
The flow direction changing means is
A first flow direction change that changes the flow direction of some of the game balls that flow down the second right region during the specific game state to a direction that allows the ball to enter or pass through the game value-adding means. A gaming machine comprising: a means and a second flow-down direction changing means for changing a direction in which it is difficult to enter the specific ball entering means.

According to the gaming machine described in (F3), the flowing direction of some of the gaming balls flowing down in the second right side region during the specific gaming state is given the game value by the first flowing down direction changing means. Not only is the ball changed in a direction that allows the ball to enter the means, but it is also changed in a direction that makes it difficult to enter the specific ball entering means by the second flow-down direction changing means. Therefore, as the number of game balls whose flow direction is changed to a direction other than the specific ball entry means increases, it becomes more difficult to enter the specific ball entry means, so that the time until the predetermined number of round games are completed is further extended. can do.

(F4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (F1) to (F3).
The first right side region is not provided with a game nail that affects the flow direction of the game ball flowing down the first right side region, but the second right side region is a game that flows down the second right side region. A gaming machine characterized in that the flow direction is not changed, in which game nails that affect the flow direction of the ball are arranged.

According to the gaming machine described in (F4) above, the flowing direction of the gaming ball flowing down the first right region is not changed during the specific gaming state. Therefore, when launching the gaming ball aiming at the first right region, the gaming ball is launched. The time until the predetermined number of round games is completed is shorter than when the game ball is launched aiming at the second right area. Therefore, it is possible to add a sharpness to the time until the predetermined number of round games is completed in the case where the game is played in the first right side area and the case where the game is played in the second right side area during the specific game state.

(F5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (F1) to (F4) above.
The second flow-down direction changing means determines the ratio of the game balls that enter the specific ball-entry means among the game balls that flow down the second right-hand area during the specific game state. (1) A gaming machine characterized in that the ratio of the gaming balls flowing down the right side region to the proportion of the gaming balls entering the specific entry means is approximated.

In the gaming machine according to (F5), the ratio of the gaming balls that enter the specific entering means among the gaming balls that flow down in the second right region during the specific gaming state is specified by the second flowing down direction changing means. Since it is approximated to the ratio of the game balls that enter the specific entry means among the game balls that flow down the first right area during the game state, the player can aim at either the first right area or the second right area. Can be less likely to cause an unexpected disadvantage.

(F6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (F1) to (F4) above.
The second flow-down direction changing means determines the ratio of the game balls that enter the specific ball-entry means among the game balls that flow down the second right-hand area during the specific game state. (1) A gaming machine characterized in that the ratio of the gaming balls flowing down the right side region is lower than the ratio of the gaming balls entering the specific entry means.

In the gaming machine described in (F6), the ratio of the gaming balls that enter the specific entry means among the gaming balls that flow down the second right region during the specific gaming state is specified by the second flow down direction changing means. Since the ratio of the game balls flowing down the first right area during the game state is lower than the ratio of the game balls entering the specific entry means, the first right area where stable entry into the specific entry means can be expected. Rather, it is possible to increase the player's willingness to play by launching a game ball into the second game area and obtaining a predetermined game value by entering or passing the ball to the game value-adding means.

(F7) In the gaming machine described in (F6) above,
The game value is a prize ball paid out by the player in one specific game state.
The first profit ball number obtained by subtracting the number of game balls fired by the game ball from the number of prize balls paid out by the player when the game ball is continuously fired in the first right side region in one specific game state. , The second profit ball number obtained by subtracting the number of game balls fired by the game ball from the number of prize balls paid out by the player when the game ball continues to be fired in the second right area is an approximate value. A game machine characterized by becoming.

According to the gaming machine described in (F7), the game launched by the gaming ball from the number of prize balls to be paid out when the gaming ball is continuously launched to the first right region in one specific gaming state. The number of game balls fired by the game ball is subtracted from the number of first profit balls obtained by subtracting the number of balls and the number of prize balls paid out by the player when the game ball is continuously fired in the second right area. Since the number of profit balls is an approximate value, the number of profit balls that the player can obtain regardless of whether the player fires the game ball in either the first right side region or the second right side region in one specific gaming state. It becomes difficult to make a difference. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the player from suffering an unexpected disadvantage.

(F8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (F1) to (F7) above.
The gaming machine characterized in that the game value adding means is arranged in the second right side region.

According to the gaming machine described in (F8), since the game value adding means is arranged in the second right side game, the motivation of the player to aim at the second right side area can be increased.

(F9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (F1) to (F7) above.
The game value-adding means is a gaming machine characterized in that a gaming ball discharged from the second right-hand region and not entering the specific gaming state is arranged at a position where the ball can be entered.

According to the gaming machine described in (F9) above, the game value adding means is arranged at a position where a gaming ball discharged from the second right side region and not entering the specific entry means can enter. Therefore, even if the game ball launched aiming at the second right area does not enter the specific ball entry means, the motivation of the player can be maintained.

(F10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (F1) to (F7) above.
The game value-adding means is arranged in a third game area other than the second right side area.
A gaming machine comprising a guiding means for guiding a gaming ball flowing down a second right region to the third gaming region.

According to the gaming machine described in (F10), the gaming ball flowing down the second right side region is guided by the guiding means to the third gaming region where the game value-adding means is arranged, so that the second right side. When aiming at an area, it is possible to positively utilize the game area other than the second right area.

(F11) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (10) above.
The game value-giving means is a game machine characterized in that a player can receive a predetermined number of prize balls to be paid out when the game balls are entered.

According to the gaming machine described in (F11), if a gaming ball enters the winning means as a game value-adding means, the number of prize balls to be paid out by the player during the specific gaming state increases. 2 It is possible to increase the motivation to launch a game ball aiming at the right side area.

(F12) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (10) above.
The game value-adding means is a first start trigger generation means that generates an opportunity to draw a lottery as to whether or not to generate the specific result, with the entry of the game ball as the establishment of the start condition. Game machine.

According to the gaming machine described in (F12), if a gaming ball enters the first start trigger generating means as a game value-adding means, an opportunity to draw a lottery as to whether or not to generate a specific result occurs. Therefore, it is possible to increase the motivation to launch the game ball aiming at the second right area.

(F13) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (10) above.
It has an operating member that operates in an open state in which the game ball is easy to enter and a closed state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than in the open state. A second start trigger generation means is provided to generate an opportunity to perform a lottery as to whether or not to generate.
The game value-adding means is characterized in that it is a game ball passage detecting means in which a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the operating member operates in the open state and the closed state, triggered by the detection of the passage of the game ball. A game machine to play.

According to the gaming machine described in (F13), whether or not the operating member operates in the open state and the closed state when the gaming ball enters the second start trigger generating means as the game value-adding means. Since the lottery is performed, it is possible to increase the motivation to launch the game ball aiming at the second right area.

<Fifth task>
Conventionally, there is, for example, a pachinko machine as a typical example of a gaming machine. The pachinko machine is provided with, for example, a game board having a game area in which the game ball flows down, and the game ball is provided in the game board and the game ball wins a prize at the start winning opening, so that the pachinko machine becomes a specific game state advantageous to the player. There is something.

In this type of gaming machine, a specific game or the like in which a game ball is made to flow down into a game area to win a prize in a large winning opening is performed during a specific game state, and a plurality of routes (areas) that can be used during the specific game state are performed. Is provided in the gaming area (for example, see FIG. 4 of Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-132448).

However, in the case of the conventional example having such a configuration, there are the following problems.
That is, in a conventional gaming machine, when a gaming ball is continuously flowed down to any one of a plurality of regions during a specific gaming state, the number of prize balls paid out to the player may differ. There's a problem.

The following invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and is paid out to the player even when the game ball is continuously flowed down to any one of a plurality of areas during a specific gaming state. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing a difference in the number of prize balls.

<G system: composition of the game board>
(G0) In a gaming machine equipped with a gaming area in which a gaming ball flows down,
The game area is
It is composed of at least a right side area located on the right side when viewed from the front of the gaming machine and a left side area located on the left side when viewed from the front of the gaming machine.
A first starting ball entry means capable of entering at least a game ball flowing down the left side region,
A second starting ball entry means capable of entering the game ball flowing down the right side region and the game ball flowing down the left side region.
A specific entry port in which a game ball flowing down the right side area and a game ball flowing down the left side area can be entered, and a prize ball of the first prize number is given when the game ball enters. And, on the condition that the upper limit time elapses after opening the specific entry port or the upper limit number of game balls enter, the specific entry opening is closed up to the maximum number of times. Specific means of entering the ball where the game is performed, and
A game ball flowing down the left side region can be entered, and a prize ball having a second prize ball number, which is smaller than the number of the first prize balls, is awarded when the game ball enters. Equipped with a non-specific entry port,
The first lottery means for drawing a lottery as to whether or not the first specific result that triggers the generation of the first specific game is generated when the ball enters the first start ball entry means.
Whether or not any of the second specific results that trigger the generation of the second specific game, which has a higher probability of occurring than the first specific game, occurs when the ball enters the second start ball entry means. 2nd lottery means to draw lots of
When the result of the lottery by the first lottery means is the first specific result, the first specific game of opening and closing the specific ball opening is performed in the first opening / closing pattern, and after the end of the first specific game, the right side. A first specific game state generating means for generating a first specific game state for shifting to an advantageous gaming state in which a game ball is allowed to flow down to either an area or the left side area.
When the result of the lottery by the second lottery means is the second specific result, the second specific game state in which the second specific game of opening and closing the specific ball opening is opened and closed by the second opening / closing pattern is generated. Equipped with a game state generating means,
In the first opening / closing pattern, when the game balls are allowed to flow down to either the right side region or the left side region at regular time intervals during the first specific game, a predetermined number of game balls are used. It is an opening and closing pattern that allows you to enter a specific ball entrance.
In the second opening / closing pattern, when a game ball is allowed to flow down to the right side region at regular time intervals during the advantageous gaming state, a second number of game balls smaller than the first number is specified as the second specification. From the second number when the opening / closing pattern is such that the ball can be entered into the specific entrance during the game and the game ball is allowed to flow down to the left side region at regular time intervals during the advantageous gaming state. It is an opening / closing pattern that enables a third number of game balls, which are few in number, to enter the specific entry port during the second specific game.
The first number of game balls that flow down the left side region and enter the specific entry port during the first specific game and the game balls that enter the non-specific entry port at regular time intervals. The number of prize balls paid out based on the above-mentioned first number of game balls is paid out based on the first number of game balls that flow down the right side region and enter the specific entry slot at regular time intervals during the first specific game. It is configured to be larger than the number of prize balls
To the third number of gaming balls and the non-specific entry port that flow down the left side region at regular time intervals during the advantageous gaming state and enter the specific entry port during the second specific game. The number of prize balls paid out based on the game ball to be entered flows down the right side region at regular time intervals during the advantageous gaming state and enters the specific entry slot during the second specific game. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be smaller than the number of prize balls paid out based on the second number of gaming balls.

According to the gaming machine described in (G0), when the result of the lottery by the first lottery means performed by the entry into the first starting ball entry means is the first specific result, the first specific game A state occurs. In the first specific game state, the first specific game in which the specific entrance is opened and closed in the first opening / closing pattern is performed, and after the end of the first specific game, the game ball is made to flow down to the right side area or the left side area. Move to the state. In the first opening / closing pattern, when a game ball flows down to the right side region at regular time intervals during the first specific game, the first predetermined number of game balls can enter the specific entry port. Therefore, the number of prize balls (1650 balls) obtained by the first number × the number of first prize balls is paid out. Further, in the first opening / closing pattern, when a game ball flows down to the left side region at regular time intervals during the first specific game, the number of prize balls (1650 balls) obtained by the first number × the number of first prize balls (1650 balls) A prize ball (1740 balls) is paid out, which is the sum of the prize balls (90 prize balls) based on the entry into the non-specific entry port. The number of prize balls paid out based on the game ball that flows down the left side area at regular time intervals during the first specific game and enters the specific entry port and the game ball that enters the non-specific entry port is The number of prize balls is larger than the number of prize balls paid out based on the game balls that flow down the right side area at regular time intervals and enter the specific entry slot during the first specific game.

In the advantageous gaming state that occurs after the end of the first specific game, the ball can enter the second starting ball entry means regardless of whether the game ball flows down to either the right side region or the left side region. The second specific gaming state occurs when the result of the lottery by the second lottery means performed by the entry into the second start ball entry means is the second specific result. In the second specific game state, the second specific game in which the specific entrance is opened and closed by the second opening / closing pattern is performed. In the second opening / closing pattern, when the game balls flow down to the right side region at regular time intervals during the advantageous gaming state, the second number (14 counts) of the game balls, which is smaller than the first number, is in the second specific game. Since it is possible to enter the specific ball entrance, the number of prize balls (154 balls) obtained by the second number (14 counts) × the first prize ball number (11 balls / count) is paid out. Further, in the second opening / closing pattern, when the game ball flows down to the left side region at regular time intervals during the advantageous game state, the prize ball based on the entry into the non-specific entry port and the second specific game during the second specific game. Since a third number (3 counts) of game balls, which is less than the number of 2, can enter the specific entry slot, the third number (3 counts) x the first prize ball number (11 balls / count). The number of third prize balls (33 balls) that can be obtained in is paid out. That is, based on the game ball that flows down the left side region at regular time intervals during the advantageous game state and enters the specific entry port during the second specific game and the game ball that enters the non-specific entry opening. The number of prize balls to be paid out is smaller than the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the game balls that flow down the right area at regular time intervals during the advantageous game state and enter the specific entry slot during the second specific game. Become.

Therefore, during the first specific game, more prize balls can be obtained in the left area than in the right area, but in the advantageous gaming state after the end of the first specific game, the right area is more than the left area. Since many prize balls can be obtained, it is possible to reduce the difference in the number of prize balls paid out to the player even when the game balls are continuously flowed down to any one of the plurality of areas during the specific game state. ..

(G1) In a gaming machine equipped with a gaming area in which a gaming ball flows down,
The game area is a left side area provided on the left side of the center line that divides the width of the game area into two equal parts to the left and right, and a right side provided on the right side of the center line that divides the width of the game area into two equal parts to the left and right. It has a first right side region provided along the right outer edge of the right side region and a second right side region provided on the left side of the first right side region.
A first starting ball entry means capable of entering at least a game ball flowing down the left side region,
A second starting ball entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the first right side region and a game ball flowing down the second right side region.
It is possible to enter a game ball flowing down the first right side region and a game ball flowing down the second right side region, and a prize ball of the first prize number is given when the game ball enters. The upper limit is a game that has a specific entry port and closes the specific entry opening on condition that either the upper limit time elapses after the specific entry opening is opened or the upper limit number of game balls enter. Specific ball entry means in which specific games are performed up to the number of times,
A game ball flowing down the second right area can be entered, and a prize ball with a second prize ball number, which is smaller than the number of the first prize balls, is awarded when the game ball enters. With a non-specific entry port,
The first lottery means for drawing a lottery as to whether or not the first specific result that triggers the generation of the first specific game is generated when the ball enters the first start ball entry means.
A lottery for whether or not a second specific result that triggers the generation of the second specific game, which has a higher probability of occurring than the first specific game, is generated when the ball enters the second starting ball entry means. The second lottery means to be performed and
When the result of the lottery by the first lottery means is the first specific result, the first specific game for opening and closing the specific ball opening is performed in the first opening / closing pattern, and after the end of the first specific game, the first is performed. 1 A first specific game state generating means for generating a first specific game state for shifting to a right side game state in which a game ball flows down to the right side area or the second right side area, and
When the result of the lottery by the second lottery means is the second specific result, the second specific game state in which the second specific game of opening and closing the specific ball opening is opened and closed by the second opening / closing pattern is generated. Equipped with a game state generating means,
The first opening / closing pattern has a predetermined number of first opening / closing patterns, regardless of whether the game ball is allowed to flow down into either the first right side region or the second right side region at regular time intervals during the first specific game. It is an opening / closing pattern that allows a game ball to enter the specific entry port.
In the second opening / closing pattern, when a game ball is allowed to flow down to the first right side region at regular time intervals during the right side gaming state, a second number of game balls smaller than the first number is used. 2 When the opening / closing pattern is such that the ball can enter the specific entrance during the specific game and the game ball is allowed to flow down to the second right region at regular time intervals during the right game state, the first It is an opening / closing pattern that enables a third number of game balls, which is smaller than the number of 2, to enter the specific entry port during the second specific game.
A game in which the first number of game balls that flow down the second right area and enter the specific entry port and a game that enters the non-specific entry opening during the first specific game at regular time intervals. The number of prize balls paid out based on the ball is the first number of game balls that flow down the first right area and enter the specific entry port at regular time intervals during the first specific game. It is configured to be greater than the number of prize balls paid out based on
The third number of gaming balls and the non-specific entry ball that flow down the second right area at regular time intervals during the right side gaming state and enter the specific entry opening during the second specific game. The number of prize balls paid out based on the game ball entering the mouth is the specific entry port during the second specific game, flowing down the first right area at regular time intervals during the right game state. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be smaller than the number of prize balls paid out based on the second number of gaming balls entering the ball.

According to the gaming machine described in (G1), when the result of the lottery by the first lottery means performed by the entry into the first starting ball entry means is the first specific result, the first specific game A state occurs. In the first specific game state, the first specific game that opens and closes the specific entry port in the first opening / closing pattern is performed, and after the end of the first specific game, the game ball is made to flow down to the first right side area or the second right side area. It shifts to the right game state. In the first opening / closing pattern, when a game ball flows down to the first right region at regular time intervals during the first specific game, the first predetermined number of game balls enters the specific entry port. Since it is possible, the number of prize balls (1650 balls) obtained by the first number × the number of first prize balls is paid out. Further, in the first opening / closing pattern, when the game balls flow down to the second right region at regular time intervals during the first specific game, the number (1650 balls) obtained by the first number × the number of first prize balls. A prize ball (1740 balls), which is the sum of the prize ball and the prize ball (90 prize balls) based on the entry into the non-specific entry port, is paid out. The number of prize balls to be paid out based on a game ball that flows down the second right area at regular intervals during the first specific game and enters the specific entry slot and a game ball that enters the non-specific entry slot. Is larger than the number of prize balls paid out based on the game ball that flows down the first right side region and enters the specific entry slot at regular time intervals during the first specific game.

In the right-sided gaming state that occurs after the end of the first specific game, the ball can enter the second starting ball-entry means regardless of whether the game ball flows down into either the first right-hand side region or the second right-side region. The second specific gaming state occurs when the result of the lottery by the second lottery means performed by the entry into the second start ball entry means is the second specific result. In the second specific game state, the second specific game in which the specific entrance is opened and closed by the second opening / closing pattern is performed. In the second opening / closing pattern, when the game ball flows down to the first right area at regular time intervals during the right game state, the second number (14 counts) of the game ball, which is smaller than the first number, is specified second. Since it is possible to enter the specific entry slot during the game, the number of prize balls (154 balls) obtained by the second number (14 counts) × the first prize ball number (11 balls / count) is paid out. Further, in the second opening / closing pattern, when the game ball flows down to the second right area at regular time intervals during the right game state, the prize ball based on the entry into the non-specific entry port and the second specific game are in progress. Since a third number (3 counts) of game balls, which is less than the second number, can enter the specific entry slot, the third number (3 counts) x the number of first prize balls (11 balls /). The number of third prize balls (33 balls) that can be obtained by counting) is paid out. That is, a game ball that flows down the second right area at regular time intervals during the right game state and enters the specific entry port during the second specific game, and a game ball that enters the non-specific entry port. The number of prize balls paid out based on is paid out based on the game balls that flow down the first right area at regular time intervals during the right game state and enter the specific entry slot during the second specific game. It will be less than the number of prize balls.

Therefore, during the first specific game, more prize balls can be obtained in the second right area than in the first right area, but during the right game state after the end of the first specific game, the second right area is better than the second right area. However, since more prize balls can be obtained in the first right area, the number of prize balls paid out to the player even if the game ball continues to flow down to any one of the plurality of areas during the specific game state. It is possible to reduce the difference between the two.

(G2) In the gaming machine described in (G1) above,
In the first right side region, the time required for the game ball flowing down the first right side region to enter the specific entry port is such that the game ball flowing down the second right side region reaches the specific entry port. A first flow direction changing means for changing the flow direction of the game ball flowing down the first right region is provided so as to be shorter than the time required for entering the ball.
In the second right side region, the time required for the game ball flowing down the second right side region to enter the specific entry port is such that the game ball flowing down the first right side region reaches the specific entry port. A second flow-down direction changing means for changing the flow-down direction of the game ball flowing down the second right-hand region is provided so as to take longer than the time required to enter the ball.
In the first opening / closing pattern, when the result of the lottery by the first lottery means is the first specific result, whether the first upper limit time (30 seconds) elapses after the specific entry port is opened or the first. It is an opening / closing pattern in which the game of closing the specific entrance is performed up to the first upper limit number of times (15 rounds or 6 rounds) on condition that either the upper limit number (10 counts) of game balls enters.
In the second opening / closing pattern, when the result of the lottery by the second lottery means is the second specific result, the second upper limit time (0) shorter than the first upper limit time after opening the specific entry port. .4 seconds or 2.0 seconds) has elapsed, or the specified ball entry is performed on condition that a game ball having a second upper limit number (2 counts) smaller than the first upper limit number is entered. A gaming machine characterized in that it is an opening / closing pattern in which a game of closing a mouth is performed up to a second upper limit number (3 times), which is less than the first upper limit number of times.

According to the gaming machine described in (G2), in the first right-hand region, the time required for the gaming ball flowing down the first right-side region to enter the specific entry port by the first flow-down direction changing means. However, it is shorter than the time required for the gaming ball flowing down the second right side region to enter the specific entrance. In the second right side region, the time required for the game ball flowing down the second right side region to enter the specific entry port by the second flow direction changing means is the game ball flowing down the first right side region. Is longer than the time it takes to enter the specific ball entry port.

In the first opening / closing pattern, when the result of the lottery by the first lottery means is the first specific result, the first upper limit time (30 seconds) has elapsed from the opening of the specific entry slot, or the first upper limit number (1st upper limit number). It is an opening / closing pattern in which a game of closing a specific entrance is performed up to the first upper limit number of times (15 rounds or 6 rounds) on condition that either a game ball (10 counts) enters. That is, in the first opening / closing pattern, the opening upper limit time is longer, the ball entry upper limit number is larger, and the opening upper limit number is longer than in the second opening / closing pattern. When the game ball is allowed to flow down to any of the second right side regions, a predetermined first number of game balls can be entered into the specific entry slot.

In the second opening / closing pattern, when the result of the lottery by the second lottery means is the second specific result, the second upper limit time (0.4 seconds, 0.4 seconds, which is shorter than the first upper limit time after opening the specific entrance. Alternatively, a game in which the specific entry slot is closed on condition that either 2.0 seconds) has passed or a second upper limit number (2 counts) of game balls less than the first upper limit number is entered. It is an opening / closing pattern that is performed up to the second upper limit number (3 times), which is smaller than the first upper limit number of times. That is, in the second opening / closing pattern, the opening upper limit time is shorter than the first opening / closing pattern, the maximum number of balls entering is smaller, and the opening upper limit number is short. When the game balls are allowed to flow down, the number of game balls is smaller than that of the first number, but the second number of game balls can be entered into the specific entry port, whereas the number of game balls can be entered into the specific entry port for a certain period of time. When the game balls are allowed to flow down to the second right region at intervals, only a third number of game balls, which is smaller than the second number, can enter the specific entry port.

Therefore, even when the game ball is continuously flowed down to any one of the plurality of areas during the specific game state, it is possible to preferably realize a configuration capable of reducing the difference in the number of prize balls paid out to the player.

It should be noted that with respect to the various inventions disclosed in the present specification, various combinations are possible for all the constituent elements, and the invention can be independently established without other constituent requirements.

As described above, the present invention is suitable for gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

30 ... Game board 30c ... Game area 30d ... Game area 30l ... Left side game area (left side area)
30r ... Right game area (right area)
30r1 ... 1st right game area (1st right area)
30r2 ... 2nd right game area (2nd right area)
31 ... General winning slot (non-specific winning slot)
32 ... Variable winning device 32 (specific ball winning means)
32a ... Grand prize opening (specific ball entry means)
33a ... 1st starting port (1st starting ball entry means)
33b ... Second starting port (second starting ball entry means)

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine that variablely displays identification information due to the establishment of a start condition and shifts to a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player when the variable display result becomes a predetermined specific display mode.
Information output means that output auditory information that can be audibly recognized according to the progress of the game,
An information output control means that controls the output of information by the information output means,
Equipped with an operation means to receive the operation of the player,
The information output control means is
Specific information output control that controls the output of specific auditory information having a plurality of levels at which the first recognizable time point may differ depending on the player within the specific information production period during the variable display of the identification information based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. Means and
Within the specific information effect period, a setting means for setting an effective period during which the operation of the operation means is valid during the output of the specific auditory information, and a setting means.
A grasping means for grasping the level of the specific auditory information being output based on the operation of the operating means during the valid period, and a grasping means.
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a display control means for displaying information suggesting the level on the display means based on the grasped level.

Images